The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutBid Specifications - HR Tenant Improvements PROJECT MANUAL OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RENTON CITY HALL HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 1055 GRADY WAY SO. Renton, WA 98057 PROJECT NO. CAG-22-219 CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS/FACILITIES 1055 SOUTH GRADY WAY RENTON, WASHINGTON 98057 Armondo Pavone, Mayor December 5, 2022 January 3, 2023 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 1 of 6 CITY OF RENTON HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK RENTON CITY HALL – LOBBY 1055 S. GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 for the RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS CAG-22-219 Bids Due: 2:00 PM PDT February 1, 2023 Bidder’s Name: Address: Telephone: (MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED) Having carefully examined the Bidding Documents and Instructions to Bidders, the Project site and conditions affecting the Work, and all Addenda, the undersigned Bidder certifies that: (i) it has the personnel and means to complete the Work and (ii) it will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and management to perform all Work required by, and in strict accordance with, the above-named documents for the following sum within the time fixed. All Bid amounts shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). The undersigned Bidder certifies that it is, at the time of submitting the Bid, and shall remain throughout the period of the Contract, licensed by the State of Washington to perform the type of work required under the Contract Documents. It further certifies that it is skilled and regularly engaged in the general class and type of work called for in the Contract Documents. A. BASE BID The Bidder agrees to complete the Work for this Project for the following lump sum Base Bid amount: ____________________________________________DOLLARS $___________________ Base Bid Amount Written Numeric Do not include in the Base Bid amount Washington State Sales Tax. That amount will be paid based on the Contract Sum. B I D F O R M DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 2 of 6 B. ALTERNATES Alternate 1 - Replace HVAC System and Ceiling Grid $ _ (Alternate 1 Amount Written) (Numeric) Alternate 2 - Replace Lighting $ _ (Alternate 2 Amount Written) (Numeric) C. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING If Bid Amount is $1,000,000 or more, as required by RCW 39.30.060, Bidder must complete and provide the included Subcontractor listing forms (Form C) in accordance with the applicable timing requirements. D. RECEIPT OF ADDENDA Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. All requirements therein are included in the appropriate Bid amount. E. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL 1. Determination of Low Bidder: a. The City of Renton (alternatively referred to as “Owner” or “City”) reserves the right to award the Contract for the Project based on the Contractor’s Base Bid and any selected Alternates(s), in whatever manner is in the City’s best interest. 2. Overhead and Profit: a. All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). F. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID The undersigned hereby agrees that this Bid shall be a valid and firm offering for the period of sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date. Within sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date, the City will act either to accept the Bid Form the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The City reserves the right to request extensions of such Bid acceptance period. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 3 of 6 The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request to furnish a bond (if required), evidence of required insurance to execute the Agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. G. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT If the written Notice of Intent to Award Contract is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered via facsimile to the undersigned within the period of Bid validity noted above, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification, execute the City of Renton Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum (“Agreement”) set forth in the Contract Documents. H. TIME FOR COMPLETION Substantial Completion - The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the Work under the Base Bid (and accepted Alternates) no later than 120 days following Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed – Anticipated date for Notice to Proceed is March 1, 2023. Final Completion – All the Work shall achieve Final Completion in accordance with the contract documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion. I. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $250.00 for each calendar day beyond the date upon which Substantial Completion of the entire Work is required to be complete until Substantial Completion is achieved, in accordance with the Contract Documents. J. BID SECURITY (As per the Bidding Documents) If applicable, Bid Security must be submitted with the Bid Form. K. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The undersigned acknowledges that it has read, understands, and agrees to comply with all federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies during the performance of the Work. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 4 of 6 Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: _____ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signatory: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies, under the penalty of perjury, that within the three- year period immediately preceding the Bid Submission date, the Bidder has not been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries, or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction, to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid Signature of Authorized Official* Printed Name DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 5 of 6 Title Date City State Check One: Sole Proprietorship ☐Partnership ☐Joint Venture ☐Corporation ☐ LLC ☐ State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed: If a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted: *If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. _____________________________________________________________________________________________ NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he/she is the identical person who submitted the forgoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Renton City Hall HR Tenant Improvements Bid Form Page 6 of 6 FOR: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT HR Tenant Improvements / City of Renton Name of Bidder's Firm Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20 . End of Bid Form This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Permit | Bid Set 03 January 2023 Job Number 2210142.00 Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 1/5 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 03 – Bid Proposal Form 00 01 07 - Seals Page 00 01 10 - Table of Contents 00 11 13 – Advertisement for Bid 00 20 00 – Bidders Qualification Statement 00 23 00 – Supplementary Instructions 00 42 10 – Bid Submittal Checklist 00 52 00 – Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 00 72 00 – General Conditions 00 73 00 – Supplemental Conditions 00 80 00 – Forms 00 80 00a – Form A Proposal Bid Bond 00 80 00b – Form B List of Subcontractors 00 80 00c – Form C Contractor Qualifications 00 80 00d – Form D Qualifications of Project Key Personnel 00 80 00e – Form E Contract Bond Template SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 – Summary of Work 01 11 30 – Hazardous Materials 01 12 00 – Delegated Design 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Permit | Bid Set 03 January 2023 Table of Contents Job Number 2210142.00 00 01 10 - 2/5 01 21 00 – Prevailing Wage Rates 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements 01 30 01 – Electronic Data Request and Agreement 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 42 00 – Definitions 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 58 00 – Temporary Project Signage 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 - Demolition DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY DIVISION 05 -- METALS DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS 08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors 08 80 00 - Glazing DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Permit | Bid Set 03 January 2023 Job Number 2210142.00 Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 3/5 09 30 00 - Tiling 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 11 30 13 - Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 12 24 00 - Window Shades - MechoShade Systems 12 36 00 - Countertops DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 20 -- MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING 22 05 17 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 – General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping 22 10 06 – Plumbing Piping Specialties 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 13 – Motors and Variable Drives Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Permit | Bid Set 03 January 2023 Table of Contents Job Number 2210142.00 00 01 10 - 4/5 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Control 23 05 53 – Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 – Air System Testing and Balancing 23 07 13 – Equipment/Ductwork Insulation 23 09 00 – Addition to Existing Controls 23 21 00 – Sleeves and Seals for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 31 13 – Steel Ductwork 23 33 00 – HVAC Specialties 23 36 00 – VAV Terminal Box Units 23 37 00 – Air Terminals 23 90 00 – Mechanical Demolition DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 26 00 05 – Electrical Existing Systems 26 05 19 – Wires and Cables 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding 26 05 32 – Outlet and Pull Boxes 26 05 33 – Raceway 26 05 34 – Metal Clad Cable (Type MC) and Fittings 26 05 39 – Floor Outlet Devices Poke Through 26 05 73 – Electrical System Studies 26 09 23 – Lighting Control Panel 26 24 19 – Motor Controllers 26 27 26 – Switches and Receptacles 26 28 13 – Fuses Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Permit | Bid Set 03 January 2023 Job Number 2210142.00 Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 5/5 26 28 16 – Disconnects and Fused Switches 26 43 00 – Surge Protective Device 26 50 00 - Lighting DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 – Low Voltage Systems 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications Systems 27 200 00 – Data and Voice Infrastructure DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 13 00 – Access Control System DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES DIVISION 34 -- TRANSPORTATION DIVISION 40 -- PROCESS INTEGRATION DIVISION 46 -- WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 11 13 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 11 13 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Imporvements January 3, 2023 The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project: TITLE: RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS ESTIMATED BASE BID COST: $350,000 excluding WSST. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 1:00 PM. January 11, 2023. Meet in Renton City Hall Lobby. Attendees will be escorted to the 7th floor. Attendance at the pre-bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. SUBMITTAL TIME/DATE/LOCATION: Prior to 2:00 P.M. February 1, 2023 Bids must be hand delivered to: Office of the City Clerk Lobby, Renton City Hall 1055 S. Grady Way, Renton, WA, 98057 PUBLIC BID OPENING: Approximately 3:00 PM on February 1, 2023 via ZOOM. Public Bid Opening Zoom Information: Click or use this link to join the Pre-Bid Zoom Conference: https://us02web.zoom.us/j/85210775155?pwd=VXM5YW80ODQ3UEhUYzBMdTdhQ0VjUT09 Meeting ID: 852 1077 5155 Passcode: 418004 Or Via telephone by dialing: +12532158782, Followed by Meeting ID: 85210775155# and Passcode: 418004# The work, to be substantially completed from the date of commencement under this contract, but shall not exceed a Substantial Completion date of 120 days following Notice To Proceed; shall include, but not be limited to: Interior tenant improvement to SE corner of 7th floor. Project consists of upgrade of interior finishes to include floor finishes, casework, ceilings and addition of break room, secure file room, front reception area and conference rooms, to include Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing additions as required for the City of Renton, Washington, all as shown and described on the Contract Documents prepared by MacKenzie Inc., dated, January 3, 2023. Bid documents will be available January 3, 2023. Plans and specifications may be viewed on the City of Renton website via the following link City of Renton - Call For Bids and at Builder’s Exchange of Washington. Free-of-charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects", "Public Works", and "City of Renton". This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online documents with the ability to: download, view, print, order full/partial plan sets from DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 11 13 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 11 13 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Imporvements January 3, 2023 numerous reprographic sources, and a free online digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders “Register” in order to receive automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the “Self-Registered Bidders List". Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically check the on-line plan room for addenda issued on this project. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303 should you require assistance with access or registration. Please direct questions regarding this project to Kim Doyle, MACKENZIE; email kdoyle@mcknze.com. Document clarification questions must be submitted in writing no later than 1:00p.m. January 25, 2023. The City’s fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the most recent prevailing wage rates. The “Effective Date” for this project is the Bid Form due date above. The applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor & Industries website located at https://lni.wa.gov/licensing-permits/public-works-projects/prevailing-wage-rates/. A Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the total amount of the bid must accompany each bid. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities or irregularities in bids received. The City’s Fair Practices and Non-Discrimination policies and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. Mandatory 15% apprentice labor hours of the total labor hours are a requirement of the construction contract. Voluntary workforce diversity goals for this apprentice participation are identified in the Instructions to Bidders. Bidders may contact the Department of Labor & Industries, Apprenticeship Section, to obtain information on available apprenticeship programs. Bids shall be in a sealed envelope marked “RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS”. THE CITY OF RENTON Jason Seth, City Clerk Published: Daily Journal of Commerce on January 3, 2023. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 20 00 – Bidder’s Qualification Statement Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 20 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2022 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Each Bidder submitting a proposal on work included in these specifications shall prepare and submit as part of this bid, the following information. 1. Name of Bidder: __________________________________________________ 2. Business Address: __________________________________________________ 3. Telephone: _______________________________________________________ 4. How many years has said Bidder been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name? _____ 5. Contracts now in hand (Gross Amount): $_____________________________________________________ 6. Experience with similar projects: List at least three (3) projects accomplished within the last five (5) years in which the Bidder constructed comparable projects of similar scope of Work and value. Include the name, telephone number and email address of the Owner or Owner’s Representative responsible for the project. Describe how the project met customer satisfaction. The City of Renton will discuss performance with the named references. a. Provide FORM C – Contractor Qualifications, per Section 00 80 00 FORMS. 7. Work Plan: Provide a Gantt chart or comparable of how the work will be done within the time window allowed. Include a schedule of activities planned. 8. Assigned Key Personnel: Provide a resume for the Project Manager, Superintendent, Foreman, and other key personnel that will be assigned and committed to this project. a. Provide FORM D – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel, per Section 00 80 00 FORMS. PART 2 – NOT USED. PART 3 – NOT USED. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 23 00 – Supplementary Instructions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 23 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS A. The City’s fair practices and non-discrimination policies, and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. B. The Notice to Proceed shall be given after the City Council, City Attorney, and Risk Manager approves the Contract, and the Contract is signed by the Mayor. C. Upon Notification of Intent to Award Contract, the following documents must be submitted prior to commencement of the Work and not later than five (5) business days after receipt of Notification of Intent to Award Contract. 1. Standard Form of Agreement 2. Bond To the City of Renton 3. City of Renton Business License 4. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 5. Certificate of Liability Insurance; naming the City of Renton as additionally insured. 6. Project Schedule & Time of Completion 1.2 BIDDER SELECTION CRITERIA A. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and waive informalities or irregularities in bids received. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 42 10 – Bid Submittal Checklist Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 42 10 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 1.1 FORMS BELOW MUST BE TIMELY SUBMITTED FOR A BID TO BE CONSIDERED RESPONSIVE: 1. BID PROPOSAL FORM, includes CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING WAGE PAYMENT STATUTE 2. FORM A - PROPOSAL BID BOND 3. FORM B - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, (SUBMISSION OF PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS) – REQUIRED IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000 4. FORM C – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION 5. FORM D – QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT KEY PERSONNEL 6. FORM E – CONTRACT BOND FORM 1.2 Confirm Items Below Are Complete At Time of Bid Submission: 1. Have you included costs for Base Bid and 2 Alternatives as listed on the Bid Form? 2. Do written amounts in the Bid Form agree with amounts shown in figures? 3. Have you certified receipt of addenda? 4. Has the Bid Form been properly signed? 5. Have you completed the Deposit or Contract Bond Form? 6. Has a Bid Bond or certified check been enclosed with your Bid? 7. Is the amount of the Bid Bond at least 5% of the total amount of the Base Bid amount? 8. Are Bid Proposal Form and Form A (Bid Bond) listed above included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope? 1.3 Form B To Be Completed Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: REQUIRED IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000 1. Form B – List of Subcontractors, (Submission of Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors) 1.4 Forms To Be Completed By Apparent Low Bidder Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 1. Form C – Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 2. Form D – Qualifications of Key Personnel END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 52 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT CITY OF RENTON BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 52 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 SAMPLE AGREEMENT CONTRACT NO. CAG 22-219 THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of [Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "City” and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." Now, therefore the parties agree as follows: 1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as prepared by MacKenzie Inc., dated January 3, 2023 is fully set forth herein: Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Addenda, Proposal Form, Special Provisions, Contract Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor’s Proposal and all documents submitted therewith in response to the City’s Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents of the Standard Specifications, as revised by the Amendments and Special Provisions included with the City’s Call for Bids and Contract Documents. 2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the project entitled City of Renton – HR Tenant Improvements, CAG 22-219, including all changes to the Work and force account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a contract amount not to exceed $___________, unless modified by an approved change order or addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for the Work. 4. Substantial Completion Date. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If Substantial Completion under this Agreement is not achieved within the time specified, Contractor shall pay liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract Bid Documents. 5. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees. 6. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. 7. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 52 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 CONTRACTOR: CITY OF RENTON: President/Partner/Owner Armondo Pavone, Mayor ATTEST Secretary Jason Seth, City Clerk FIRM INFORMATION d/b/a [Enter Firm name] CHECK ONE: ☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation STATE OF INCORPORATION: [Enter state of incorporation] CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION: [Address Line 1] City of Renton [Address Line 2] 1055 South Grady Way [City, State and Zip] Renton, WA 98057 [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] Attention: If business is a CORPORATION, the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. If the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as) and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract. If the business is an limited Liability Company, an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her title. Contract Template Updated 12/29/2017-modified May 3, 2022 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 1 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Section Description Page PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Order of Precedence .......................................................................................................... 5 1.3 Execution and Intent ........................................................................................................... 5 PART 2 – INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................... 6 2.2 Coverage Limits ................................................................................................................. 7 2.3 Insurance Coverage Certificates ........................................................................................ 7 2.4 Payment and Performance Bonds ...................................................................................... 8 2.5 Alternative Surety ............................................................................................................... 8 2.6 Builders Risk ...................................................................................................................... 8 PART 3 – TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 Progress and Completion ................................................................................................... 9 3.2 Construction Schedule ....................................................................................................... 9 3.3 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work for Convenience ........................................................ 10 3.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work for Cause ......................................................................... 11 3.5 Delay .................................................................................................................................. 11 3.6 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes ..................................................................................... 12 3.7 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely Completion ........................................................... 12 PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 Discrepancies and Contract Document Review .................................................................. 13 4.2 Project Record .................................................................................................................... 14 4.3 Shop Drawings ................................................................................................................... 14 4.4 Organization of Specifications ............................................................................................ 15 4.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications & other Documents ................................. 16 PART 5 – PERFORMANCE 5.1 Contractor Control and Supervision .................................................................................... 17 5.2 Permits, Fees and Notices .................................................................................................. 18 5.3 Patents and Royalties ......................................................................................................... 18 5.4 Prevailing Wages ................................................................................................................ 18 5.5 Hours of Labor .................................................................................................................... 19 5.6 Nondiscrimination ............................................................................................................... 20 5.7 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 20 5.8 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage Areas............................................................. 23 5.9 Prior Notice of Excavation .................................................................................................. 24 5.10 Unforeseen Physical Conditions ......................................................................................... 24 5.11 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, Vegetation, Utilities, & Improvements ......... 24 5.12 Layout of Work ................................................................................................................... 24 5.13 Material and Equipment ...................................................................................................... 25 5.14 Availability and Use of Utility Services ................................................................................ 25 DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 2 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Section Description Page 5.15 Tests and Inspections ......................................................................................................... 25 5.16 Correction of Nonconforming Work .................................................................................... 26 5.17 Clean Up ............................................................................................................................ 28 5.18 Access to Work ................................................................................................................... 28 5.19 Subcontractors and Suppliers ............................................................................................. 28 5.20 Warranty of Construction .................................................................................................... 30 5.21 Indemnification ................................................................................................................... 30 PART 6 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 Contract Sum ...................................................................................................................... 31 6.2 Schedule of Values ............................................................................................................. 31 6.3 Application for Payment ...................................................................................................... 31 6.4 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................ 32 6.5 Payments Withheld ............................................................................................................. 33 6.6 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights ...................................................................................... 33 6.7 Substantial Completion ....................................................................................................... 33 6.8 Prior Occupancy ................................................................................................................. 34 6.9 Final Completion, Acceptance, and Payment ..................................................................... 34 PART 7 – CHANGES 7.1 Change in the Work ............................................................................................................ 35 7.2 Change in the Contract Sum .............................................................................................. 36 7.3 Change in the Contract Time .............................................................................................. 43 PART 8 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 Claims Procedure ............................................................................................................... 45 8.2 Arbitration ........................................................................................................................... 47 8.3 Claims Audits ...................................................................................................................... 47 PART 9 – TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 Termination by Owner for Cause ........................................................................................ 49 9.2 Termination by Owner for Convenience ............................................................................. 50 PART 10 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 Governing Law ................................................................................................................... 51 10.2 Successors and Assigns ..................................................................................................... 51 10.3 Meaning of Words .............................................................................................................. 51 10.4 Rights and Remedies ......................................................................................................... 52 10.5 Contractor Registration ....................................................................................................... 52 10.6 Time Computations............................................................................................................. 52 10.7 Records Retention .............................................................................................................. 52 10.8 Third-Party Agreements ...................................................................................................... 53 10.9 Antitrust Assignments ......................................................................................................... 53 10.10 Headings and Captions ...................................................................................................... 53 10.11 Diverse Business Participation ........................................................................................... 53 10.12 Apprenticeship Participation ............................................................................................... 53 DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 3 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. “Application for Payment” means a written request submitted by Contractor to Owner and Architect for payment of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values, supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E may require. B. “Architect,” “Engineer,” or “A/E” means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority. C. “Change Order” means a written instrument signed by Owner and Architect and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. D. “Claim” means Contractor’s exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the terms of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part 8. E. “Contract Award Amount” is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates. F. “Contract Documents” means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Public Works Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and modifications thereof. G. “Contract Sum” is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Work, except Washington State sales tax. H. “Contract Time” is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. I. “Contractor” means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. J. “Day(s): Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendar day(s).” K. “Drawings” are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. L. “Final Acceptance” means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 4 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9 B. M. “Final Completion” means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6. 9 A. N. “Force Majeure” means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3. 5A. O. “Notice” means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice. P. “Notice to Proceed” means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the Contract Time begins. Q. “Owner” means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative with the authority to enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and make related determinations and findings. R. “Person” means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or individual. S. “Prior Occupancy” means Owner’s use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.8 A. T. “Progress Schedule” means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner and Architect, as further set forth in Section 3.2. U. “Project” means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors. V. “Project Record” means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in paragraph 4.2A. W. “Schedule of Values” means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner and Architect. X. “Specifications” are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. Y. “Subcontract” means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work. Z. “Subcontractor” means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 5 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Work. AA. “Substantial Completion” means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.7. AB. “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes, but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in the following order: 1. Signed Agreement, including any Change Orders. 2. Supplemental Conditions. 3. Modifications to the General Conditions. 4. General Conditions. 5. Provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over provisions of any other Division. 6. In case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale drawings. 7. In case of conflict within the Contract Documents, the greater of quality, extent or greater value shall be provided. 8. Signed and Completed Bid Form. 9. Instructions to Bidders. 10. Advertisement for Bids. 1.3 EXECUTION AND INTENT A. Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner: B. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract Documents; C. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof; D. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 6 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Contractor’s obligations required by the Contract Documents; and E. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so. PART 2 – INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor’s insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner. B. Term of insurance coverage: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years. Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any corrective Work required by Section 5.16. 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to: a. Completed operations/products liability; b. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed; and c. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington. 2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance: Required if a commercial vehicle will be used in performance of work or delivery of products by the contractor, beyond normal commutes. 3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architect, engineering, surveying, legal, or medical) are being provided to the Owner and if those professional services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if coverage is maintained at least 3-years beyond the conclusion of work. 4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability coverage limits. 5. Builders Risk – When applicable to the work being performed, is required up to the amount of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance provisions. See section 2.6. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 7 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 6. Pollution Liability – Required if work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage may be included in other required policies. C. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers’ Compensation): Contractor shall comply with the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Act and the Jones Act. D. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by Contractor or any Subcontractor. E. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton as a Primary and Non-contributory Additional Insured on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability, Excess/Umbrella, when applicable). F. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk Manager or with Risk Manager approval. 2.2 COVERAGE LIMITS Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be as follows for applicable required insurance: A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each Accident or Loss. C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability. D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability. E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or limits are adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities. 2.3 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance coverage. B. List Project info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder. The certificate holder should read: City of Renton ATTN: Kelsey Urban 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the policy holder. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 8 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 2.4 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount, plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders, increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or more. No payment or performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is $35,000 or less and Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the period allowed by RCW 39.08.010. 2.5 ALTERNATIVE SURETY When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or materials required by the Contract Documents if: A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety; or B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required by Owner. 2.6 BUILDER’S RISK A. Contractor to buy Builders Risk Insurance: When the project involves substantial new building construction, as determined by the Owner, Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. For projects not involving New Building Construction, “Installation Floater” is an acceptable substitute for the Builder’s Risk Insurance. The insurance shall cover the interest of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear. B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an “all risk” basis and insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements and shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E’s services and expenses required as a result of an insured loss. C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E’s sub-consultants, separate contractors described in Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 9 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. PART 3 – TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) calendar days thereafter. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within 14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work, and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment. 1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion Date. 2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs to the project. B. Form of Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as specified by Owner and Architect. The preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions and milestones of the Work, with a more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed by Owner and Architect. C. Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner and Architect shall return comments on the preliminary Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner and Architect of Contractor’s schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor’s construction means, methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this section. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 10 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 D. Monthly updates and compliance with Progress Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.5, Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the Work. E. Contractor to notify Owner and Architect of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect in writing of any actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 3.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually agreed. B. Compliance with suspension; Owner’s options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either: 1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work; or 2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of Part 9. C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work. D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements set forth in Part 7. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 11 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 3.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor’s failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. B. No Equitable Adjustment for Contractor’s failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of performance attributable to Contractor’s failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure. 3.5 DELAY A. Force Majeure actions not a default; Force Majeure defined: Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party (“Force Majeure”). Acts of Force Majeure include, but are not limited to: 1. Acts of God or the public enemy; 2. Acts or omissions of any government entity; 3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible; 4. Quarantine or epidemic; 5. Strike or defensive lockout; 6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated; and 7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available. B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force Majeure. C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor’s performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request according to Sections 7.2 and 7.3. D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 12 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3 but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum. F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise. 3.6 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to Owner. B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-subcontracts, that in the event timely performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the dispute. 3.7 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION A. Liquidated Damages 1. Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated damages are included in the Contract Documents. 2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain. This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 13 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 damages sustained by the Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the Contractor. 3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to the Contract Documents. B. Actual Damages Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs against any payment due Contractor. PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary: The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner and Architect in writing. D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents – responsibility: Contractor shall do no Work without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner or Architect. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 14 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the performance and shall bear the cost for its correction. E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically. F. Interpretation questions referred to Architect: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Architect. 4.2 PROJECT RECORD A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including horizontal and vertical locations of sub-structural materials referenced to permanent visible and accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals (COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the “Project Record.” B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled “PROJECT RECORD.” The Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to Owner and Architect at all times. C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance 4.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Definition of Shop Drawings: “Shop Drawings” means documents and other information required to be submitted to Architect by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own expense. Owner and Architect may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 15 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed by the City of Renton. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor’s approval shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or Architect or separate contractors. Contractor’s submittal schedule shall allow a reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop Drawings approved: Approval, or other appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during construction or constitute an approval of Contractor’s means or methods of construction. If Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of correction. D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents: If Shop Drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the Project Record. E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor. 4.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally to trade practices. These sections are for Owner,Architect and Contractor convenience and shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 16 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 4.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS A. The City/Owner not Contractor, owns Copyright of Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E’s contracted service to the City through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor’s set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work. B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this Project: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work. C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non- exclusive license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein, prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in Section 5.3 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising out of Owner’s use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor’s own cost, licenses in conformity with this section. D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 17 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 5 – PERFORMANCE 5.1 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner. B. Competent Superintendent required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor. The superintendent must be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for transition. C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and agents: Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents. D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among all of the Contractor’s employees and other persons performing the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor’s employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable. E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings. F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors’ employees, if they are in violation of this act. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 18 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 5.2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Permits: Owner will obtain and pay for the Building Permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed permits shall be delivered to Owner. B. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 5.3 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement 5.4 PREVAILING WAGES A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Washington Department of Labor . The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The State of Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in King County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and Industries: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates, based upon the bid submittal deadline for this project. B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: Before payment is made by the Owner to the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate. C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 19 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Owner an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project. D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060. E. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of Intent at job site: Each Application for Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre-filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made. F. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296- 127 WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification. G. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall submit a certified copy of payroll records with each monthly pay application. 5.5 HOURS OF LABOR A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service. B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such agreement may provide that the employees work ten-hour days for more than four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any such agreement. 5.6 NONDISCRIMINATION DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 20 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status, honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement. B. During performance of the Work: 1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW 49.60. 2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability. 3. Contractor to notify unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers’ representative of Contractor’s obligations according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60. 4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this section of the Contract Documents. 5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in every Subcontract. 5.7 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractor shall: 1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner’s representative prior to the initial scheduled construction meeting. 2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 21 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades, signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators, shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles, construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local laws and regulations. 3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. 4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction site. B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions relating to employees, public, or agents of the Contractors. C. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. D. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of exposure. E. Contractor to provide HazMat training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area. 1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of: a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health Standards; b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present; and c. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 22 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC. 2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the Project site which includes: a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.); b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area; c. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and d. Hazard communications program: The details of the hazard communications program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor’s responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or harmful substances shall include the following duties: 1. Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport, generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter collectively referred to as “hazardous substances”), in violation of any such law, regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be stored more than 90 Days on the Project site. 2. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law, regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the Project site. G. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public. Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor’s responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be borne by Contractor. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 23 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 H. Contractor to act in an emergency: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed. I. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as imposing any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public. 5.8 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGE AREAS A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas. B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work. C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation. D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or applicable law. E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on-site: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use. F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equipment: Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of Substantial Completion and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 24 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor. 5.9 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION A. Excavation defined; Use of locator services: “excavation” means an operation in which earth, rock, or other material on or below the ground is moved or otherwise displaced by any means, except the tilling of soil less than 12 inches in depth for agricultural purposes, or road ditch maintenance that does not change the original road grad or ditch flow line. Before commencing any excavation, Contractor shall provide notice of the scheduled commencement of excavation to the owners of underground facilities or utilities, through locator services. 5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice. B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a change in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7. 5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. Contractor to protect and repair property: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site. Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to Contractor. 5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision. B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 25 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 and benchmarks indicated on the Drawings and shall be responsible for all field measurements about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks established. 5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly or receive or be received by work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance by Owner. C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be rejected by Owner. 5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A. Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost to the Contractor. 5.15 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Contractor to provide for all testing and inspection of Work: Contractor shall maintain an adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection and quality surveillance of all its Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 26 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 approvals. Contractor shall give Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner. B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Constitute or imply acceptance; 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or equipment; 4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or 5. Impair Owner’s right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any other remedy to which it may be entitled. C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract Documents: Neither observations by an inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents. D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work. 5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Architect or Owner, be uncovered for Owner’s and Architect’s observation and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and without change in the Contract Time. B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If, at any time prior to Final Completion, Owner or Architect desire to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner or Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of uncovering and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 27 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and reconstruction. C. Contractor to correct and pay for non-conforming Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by Owner or Architect not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including additional testing and inspections. D. Contractor’s compliance with warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.8, or within the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner or Architect to do so. Owner or Architect shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor’s duty to correct with respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance. E. Contractor to remove non-conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner or Architect. F. Owner may charge Contractor for non-conforming Work: If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace, correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor’s obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may be commenced. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 28 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 I. Owner may accept non-conforming Work and charge Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable. 5.17 CLEAN UP Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site, including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. 5.18 ACCESS TO WORK Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in progress wherever located. 5.19 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A. Subcontractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in each of its first-tier subcontracts and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first-tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: 1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; 2. Have a current City of Renton business license; 3. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; 4. If applicable, have: a. Industrial Insurance (workers’ compensation) coverage for the subcontractor’s employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW; c. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; 5. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). 6. Not be disqualified from bidding or working on any project receiving federal public DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 29 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 works contract under SAM.gov. 7. On a project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of compliance by the Washington state apprenticeship and training council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year period immediately preceding the date of the Owner’s first advertisement of the project. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of $2,500. Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection and shall obtain Owner’s written consent before making any substitutions or additions. C. Subcontracts in writing and pass-through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds. D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents. E. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that: 1. Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.1 and only for those Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 30 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 2. Owner assumes Contractor’s responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed in the Subcontract. 3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5.20 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by Contractor. B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall: 1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; 2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of Owner; 3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by Owner; and 4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor’s, manufacturer’s, or supplier’s warranties should they extend beyond the period specified in the Contract Documents. C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final Acceptance. 5.20 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Renton, its elected officials, officers, agents, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising from injury or death to persons, including injuries, sickness, disease or death of Contractor’s own employees, agents and volunteers, or damage to property caused by Contractor’s negligent act or omission, except for those acts caused by or resulting from a negligent act or omission by Renton and its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest, including copyright, trademark, and trade secret. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115, (Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration, improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate) then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 31 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor and Renton, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers, Contractor’s liability shall be only to the extent of Contractor’s negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement constitute Contractor’s waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. PART 6 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 CONTRACT SUM Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner or Architect (“Schedule of Values”). The approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner and Architect as the basis for progress payments. Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of Values. 6.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner or Architect may require. B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW 60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section 1.3, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor’s knowledge, as of the date of the Application for Payment. C. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner and Architect, the actual progress of the Work with the Progress Schedule. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 32 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 D. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off-site: If authorized by Owner, the Application for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of the following: 1. Suitable facility or location: The material will be placed in a facility or location that is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored; 2. Facility or location within 10 miles of Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner; 3. Facility or location exclusive to Project’s materials: Only materials for the Project are stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside for the Project); 4. Insurance provided on materials in facility or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of insurance extending Contractor’s insurance coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit; 5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor’s authorized personnel shall have access; 6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall have the right of access in company of Contractor; 7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for stored materials: Contractor and its surety assume total responsibility for the stored materials; and 8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials are moved from storage to the Project site. 6.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Withholding retainage; Options for retainage: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner’s request, consent of surety to release of the retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 33 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents. D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Owner’s right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to: 1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16; 4. Contractor’s failure to perform: Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 5. Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the result of Contractor’s fault or negligent acts or omissions. B. Owner to notify Contractor of withholding for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.6 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW, concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully set forth herein. 6.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use for which it is intended. All Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and operating normally, if all required occupancy permits DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 34 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 have not been issued, or if the Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion which must be approved by Change Order. Owner’s occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved. 6.8 PRIOR OCCUPANCY A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor, take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work (“Prior Occupancy”) at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims. B. Damage; Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy. Contractor’s one-year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. 6.9 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action. B. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and performance bonds, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 35 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 made in accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8. PART 7 – CHANGES 7.1 CHANGE IN THE WORK A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time by Change Order: Owner or Architect may, at any time and without notice to Contractor’s surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Section 7.2 or 7.3, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be incorporated into a Change Order. B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as mutually agreed. Contractor’s Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change in the Work. C. COP negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.2 and 7.3, Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner’s approval. All Work done pursuant to any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 36 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 response within 30 Days of Contractor’s request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner’s final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement, Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8. F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project. The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following: 1. The scope of work 2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount 3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time 4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions 5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data, a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order. 7.2 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM A. General Application 1. Contract Sum changes only by Change Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Sum in its Change Order Proposal. 2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor’s performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor’s changed cost of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner; or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.5. a. Notice and record keeping for equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes of this part, “occurrence” means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 37 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 prosecution of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and, if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner. b. Content of notice for equitable adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. c. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.3C. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. d. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. e. Contractor to combine requests for same event together: Any requests by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together. 3. Methods for calculating Change Order amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined by one of the following methods: a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.2B. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 38 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as determined in paragraph 7.2C. c. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph 7.2D. 4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may direct otherwise: When Owner has requested Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the basis of the fixed price method. B. Change Order Pricing – Fixed Price Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following procedures shall apply: 1. Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor’s Change Order Proposal, or request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below and shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner. 2. Use of industry standards in calculating costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and Contractor. 3. Costs contingent on Owner’s actions: If any of Contractor’s pricing assumptions are contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the proposal or request for an equitable adjustment. 4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools, overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference. 5. Breakdown not required if change less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fair value. 6. Breakdown required if change between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to determine fair value: DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 39 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 a. lump sum labor; b. lump sum material; c. lump sum equipment usage; d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below. 7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the fixed price method shall include only the following items: a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following: (1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the Department of Labor and Industries approved “statement of intent to pay prevailing wages” or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working supervisor’s hours. (2) Worker’s insurance: Direct contributions to the City of Renton for industrial insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates established by the Department of Labor and Industries. (3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State Unemployment Compensation Act. (4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, not exceeding those allowances established by regional labor union agreements, which are itemized and identified separately. (5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2% of the sum of the amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3) above. b. Material costs: This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts. Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges shall be itemized. c. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 40 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 rental costs actually incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following sources: (1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the Associated General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. (2) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical work. (3) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on mechanical work. The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. d. Allowance for small tools, expendables & consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools which cost $250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following: (1) 3% for Contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs. (2) 5% for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs. Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be itemized. e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors’ cost of Work shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor. f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract Sum. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.3D, the amount of such compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this subsection (f). This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all non-craft labor, temporary construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 41 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 none can be agreed upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1) Projects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. (2) Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. g. Allowance for profit: Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 42 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 which contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.3. It shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1) Contractor / Subcontractor markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6% of the cost developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. (2) Contractor / Subcontractor markup for Work performed at lower tier: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of a lower tier, 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – h. h. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is defined as: (1) Contractor’s liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor’s liability insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order; and (2) Payment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for Contractor’s bond arising directly from the changed Work. The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g above. C. Change Order Pricing – Unit Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a unit-price basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material quantities; and c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Cooperate with Owner and Architect and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner or Architect, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; and c. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.2B and satisfy the following requirements: DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 43 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs; and b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement statements signed by Owner or Architect. D. Change Order Pricing – Time-and-Material Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any, for material quantities or labor; and c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner or Architect, identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2 working days for Owner and Architect review. c. Allow Owner or Architect to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; d. Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as efficiently as possible; and e. Not exceed Owner’s cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s or Architect’s prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.2B and additional verification supported by: a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and b. Invoices: Invoices for material. 7.3 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME A. COP requests for Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order Proposal. B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor’s fault: If the time of Contractor’s performance is changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 44 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor’s changed time of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. 1. Notice and record keeping for Contract Time request: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish copies of such record to Owner. 2. Timing and content of Contractor’s Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. 3. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.3B.2 with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner and Architect. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. 4. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule: Any change in the Contract Time covered by a Change Order or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor’s schedule attributable to the change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 45 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 adjustment. Any Change Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives. D. Cost of change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.3D, subject to the following conditions: 1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or A/E; 2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.3B; 3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.3C; and 4. Limitations on daily costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.2B 7f for any change in the Work that contributed to this change in Contract Time: a. Non-productive supervision or labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or labor extended because of delay; b. Weekly meetings and indirect activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar indirect activities extended because of the delay; c. Temporary facilities or equipment rental: cost of temporary facilities or equipment rental extended because of the delay; d. Insurance premiums: cost of insurance extended because of the delay; e. Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon, but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay. PART 8 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 CLAIMS PROCEDURE A. Claim is Contractor’s remedy: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7. 1, or on the resolution of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7. 2 or the Contract Time as provided in Section 7. 3, Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as provided in this section. B. Claim filing deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner’s final offer made in accordance with paragraph 7. 1E, or by the date of Final Acceptance, whichever occurs first. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 46 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor may be entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain the following information: 1. Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the Claim; 2. Dates: The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the Claim; 3. Owner and A/E employee’s knowledgeable about Claim: The name of each employee of Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim; 4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents which support the Claim; 5. Identification of other supporting information: The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim; 6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the Contract Documents, that support the Claim; 7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor’s analysis of its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time; 8. Details on Claim for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.2; and 9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and accurate to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes Owner is liable. D. Owner’s response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, to Contractor as follows: 1. Response time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received; or 2. Response time for Claim of $50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a written decision in such additional time. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 47 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 E. Owner’s review of Claim and finality of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor’s Claim, Owner or Architect may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final resolution of any Claim. Owner’s written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in Section 8.2. F. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with this Section: Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 8.2 ARBITRATION A. Timing of Contractor’s demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner’s decision rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.1D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 Days after the date of Owner’s decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said 30 Day period shall result in Owner’s decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its Subcontractors. B. Filing of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows: 1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules; or 2. Claims greater than $30,000: Disputes over $30,000 shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to use the expedited rules. C. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained. D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Change Order: If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity. 8.3 CLAIMS AUDITS DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 48 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 A. Owner may audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery. B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents: 1. Daily time sheets and supervisor’s daily reports; 2. Collective bargaining agreements; 3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records; 4. Payroll registers; 5. Earnings records; 6. Payroll tax forms; 7. Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery confirmations; 8. Material cost distribution worksheet; 9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.); 10. Vendors’, rental agencies’, Subcontractors’, and agents’ invoices; 11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts; 12. Subcontractors’ and agents’ payment certificates; 13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors); 14. Job cost report, including monthly totals; 15. Job payroll ledger; 16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries; 17. General ledger; 18. Cash disbursements journal; 19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Work; 20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, or others; 21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor’s internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents; 22. All non-privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time sought by each Claim; 23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals; and 24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 49 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours. Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner’s auditors. PART 9 – TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time; 2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; 3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents; 4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled workers or proper materials or equipment; 5. Contractor failure to pay Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor; 6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; or 7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of any provision of the Contract Documents. B. Owner’s actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at its option: 1. Take possession of Project site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work; 2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.20; and 3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems expedient. C. Surety’s role: Owner’s rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Contractor’s required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 50 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 section, Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.2B and shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is accepted. E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E’s services and expenses made necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the Work, or as a result of Contractor’s actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These obligations for payment shall survive termination. F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work performed: Termination of the Work in accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for Work performed. G. Conversion of “Termination for Cause” to “Termination for Convenience”: If Owner terminates Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in paragraph 9.1A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 9.2. 9.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of Owner. B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly: 1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of termination; 2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is not terminated; 3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated; 4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts; 5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest; and 6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not terminated C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 51 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 or any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part 7. D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner. PART 10 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 GOVERNING LAW Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King County. 10.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Bound to successors; Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations set forth in the Contract Documents. 10.3 MEANING OF WORDS Meaning of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical, or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings or required to complete the installation. 10.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 52 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 No waiver of rights: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 10.5 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Contractor must be registered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or licensed as required by the laws of the City of Renton, including but not limited to RCW 18.27. 10.6 TIME COMPUTATIONS Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are excluded from the computation. 10.7 RECORDS RETENTION / PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS A. Six-year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.3, shall be retained for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance. B. Record Keeping and Reporting: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act (Chapter 42.56 RCW). C. Public Records Compliance: To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at Contractor’s own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys’ fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which Contractor has withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 53 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 10.8 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS No third-party relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons other than Owner and Contractor. 10.9 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order. Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub- Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor. 10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for convenience of reference and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect, interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions. 10.11 DIVERSE BUSINESS PARTICIPATION The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Diverse Businesses as found in RCW Chapters 39, 43, and WAC 326. The voluntary Diverse Business goal of 26%, which is an aggregate of: 10% Minority Business Enterprises (MBE), 6% Women Business Enterprises (WBE), 5% Veteran-owned Business, and 5% Washington Small Businesses self- identified in the Washington Electronic Business Solution (WEBS) http://www.des.wa.gov/services/ContractingPurchasing/Business/Pages/WEBSRegistration.aspx. Contractors are encouraged to meet or exceed the project goals in the advertisement by any level of participation, regardless of category. 10.12 APPRENTICESHIP PARTICIPATION In accordance with RCW 39.04.320, the City of Renton requires 15% apprenticeship participation for projects estimated to cost one million dollars or more. Apprentice participation, under this contract, may be counted towards the required percentage (%) only if the apprentices are from an apprenticeship program registered and approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (RCW 49.04 and WAC 296-05). A. Bidders may contact the Department of Labor and Industries, Specialty Compliance Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-4530 by DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF RENTON – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 72 00 - 54 of 54 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 phone at (360) 902-5320, and e-mail at Apprentice@Lni.wa.gov, to obtain information on available apprenticeship programs. B. For each project that has apprentice requirements, the contractor shall submit a “Statement of Apprentice and Journeyman Participation” in a format approved by the City with every request for progress payment. The Contractor shall submit consolidated and cumulative data collected by the Contractor and collected from all subcontractors by the Contractor. The data to be collected and submitted includes the following: 1. Contractor name and address 2. Contract number 3. Project name END OF SECTION DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 00 80 00 - Forms Contract No. CAG-22-219 00 80 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 1.1 Submit With Bid 1. Bid Proposal Form 2. Form A – Proposal Bid Bond 1.2 Submit Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: Required only if Bid is $1,000,000 or more 1. Form B – List of Subcontractors, (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical Subcontractors) 1.4 Submit Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 1. Form C – Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 2. Form D– Qualifications of Key Personnel 1.5 Submit With Executed Agreement – Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 1. Form E – 100% Contract and Performance Bond Form 2. Required Insurance Certificates END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Proposal Bid Bond – FORM A BID BOND PAGE 1 OF 1 FORM A Proposal Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor] ________________________________ ____________________of [address] ____________________________________________ as Principal, and [Surety] __________________________________________________________________ a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of ____________________________________ , and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the Bid of said Principal for the Work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its sealed Bid for the following construction, to wit: ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ said Bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal Bid by said Principal be accepted, and the Contract be awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said Contract and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10) days from and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect. IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of Renton in accordance with the terms of the Bidding Documents and furnish a performance bond with Surety or Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and sealed this ___________________________ day of ___________________________, ________. ________________________________ ________________________________ [Principal] [Surety] ________________________________ ________________________________ [Signature of authorized official] [Signature of authorized official] ________________________________ By: _____________________________ [Title] [Attorney-in-Fact] ________________________________ [Address] ________________________________ [Phone Number] This page intentionally left blank RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS List of Subcontractors, FORM B Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements Page 1 of 2 List of Subcontractors – FORM B January 3, 2023 CITY OF RENTON EMAIL TO: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov If bid amount exceeds $1,000,000, this list must be submitted within one (1) hour of the time and date specified for Bid Submission. Bidder’s Name: Project: Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements 1055 S. Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 CAG 22-219 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING If the bid amount exceeds $1,000,000 or more including Washington State Sales Tax, bidder must list the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Plumbing, and Electrical subcontractors as required per RCW 39.30.060. Subcontractor Name Work Category 1. HVAC 2. Plumbing 3. Electrical [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: _____ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS List of Subcontractors, FORM B Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements Page 2 of 2 List of Subcontractors – FORM B January 3, 2023 Authorized Signature: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: End of Form RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation - FORM C (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 1 | P a g e Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation – FORM C +Contractor Name: Date Incorporated: Mailing Address: State Incorporated: Business Phone: Owner/President’s Name: Contact Name and Title: Other or Former Organization Name(s) Contact Phone: Contact Email: Reason for Name Change(s): PERFORMANCE EXPERIENCE · Has company been disqualified (debarred) from performing public work by State of Washington or federal government? · Yes No · Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending against company or its officers? Yes No If Yes, please describe: Judgments · Has company ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? Yes No If Yes, please describe: · Has company been obligated for liquidated damages within the past 5 years? Yes No If Yes, please describe: FINANCIAL INFORMATION 1. Average total annual value of construction work performed during the past 5 years: 2. Provide at least three trade references: · Name/Contact · Name/Contact · Name/Contact 3. Provide surety company and agent name: Surety PROJECT EXPERIENCE – Projects of Similar Scope Requiring Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages within Past 5 Years (3 Required) PROJECT #1 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation - FORM C (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS 2 | P a g e Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation – FORM C Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #2 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #3 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D Page 1 of 2 PROJECT MANAGER Name: Current Position with Company: Years’ Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D Page 2 of 2 SUPERINTENDENT Name: Current Position with Company: Years’ Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: End of Form RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Contract Bond – FORM E RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Page 1 of 2 Contract Bond to the CITY of Renton 12/05/2022 F clb CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON Bond No. ________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, (CONTRACTOR/PRINCIPAL) ______________________ of [address]________________________________________________ as PRINCIPAL , and (SURETY)_________________________________________ a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ________________________ as a SURETY corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become SURETY upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as SURETY , are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton (CITY/OWNER) in the sum of________________________________________________ US Dollars ($________________________) Total Contract Amount, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our heirs, successors, assigns, executors, administrators and personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into pursuant to the laws of the State of Washington and the ordinances of the City of Renton. Dated at _____________, Washington, this ________ day of ____________________, 20______. NOW, THEREFORE THE CONDITIONS OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION ARE AS FOLLOWS: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. CAG-22-015 providing for construction of the Philip Arnold Park Site Improvements ; the PRINCIPAL has accepted, or is about to accept, the Contract, and undertake to perform the Work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth. · The SURETY indemnifies, defends, and protects and holds the CITY/OWNER, its officers, agents, and assigns harmless from and against all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment, and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and reimbursing and paying CITY/OWNER all expenses that CITY/OWNER may incur in making good any default by PRINCIPAL; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, (or the subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors material persons, and all persons who shall supply such contractor or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns (or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to faithfully perform the Contract. • The indemnities to CITY/OWNER shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other design professionals retained by OWNER in connection with the Project. • No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect SURETY 's obligation on the Contract Bond. SURETY , for value received, hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or the Work to be performed thereunder and agrees that modifications and changes to the terms and conditions of the Contract that increase the total amount to be paid the PRINCIPAL shall automatically increase the obligation of the SURETY on this Contract Bond and notice to SURETY is not required for such increased obligation. 01/03/2023 RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Contract Bond – FORM E RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Page 2 of 2 Contract Bond to the CITY of Renton 12/05/2022 F clb · This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and venue shall be in King County, Washington. FURTHERMORE, this Contract Bond shall be satisfied and released only upon the conditions that PRINCIPAL or SURETY: · Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by CITY/OWNER in the manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract; · Pay, in accordance with Chapters 39.08, 39.12 and 60.28 Revised Code of Washington (RCW), the sums due all workers, laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material suppliers, and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials for carrying on of such work under the Contract; · Pay all taxes, increases and penalties, if any, incurred on or related to the Contract under Titles 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and any and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW or any other law; · Receives a written discharge/release of bond from CITY, signed by the Mayor or by a duly authorized representative of CITY. This Contract Bond shall be executed in two (2) original counterparts, and shall be signed by the parties’ duly authorized officers. This Contract Bond will only be accepted if is accompanied by a fully executed and original power of attorney for the office executing on behalf of the SURETY. PRINCIPAL SURETY [PRINCIPAL] [SURETY] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Printed Name] [Printed Name] [Title] [Title] [Date] [Date] Name and address of local office of Agent and/or SURETY Company: Telephone: 01/03/2023 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 10 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of contract. 3. Permits, fees and bonds. 4. Work sequence 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Contractor use of site and premises. 7. Work restrictions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.03 PROJECT A. Project Name: Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements 1. Owner's Name: City of Renton 2. Architect’s Name: MacKenzie, Inc. 3. The Project consists of the following: Interior tenant improvement to SE corner of 7th floor. Project consists of upgrade of interior finishes to include floor finishes, casework, ceilings and addition of break room, secure file room, front reception area and conference rooms, to include Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing additions as required (some of which are Alternates per the project documents), all as shown and described on the Contract Documents prepared by MacKenzie, Inc., LLC., dated, January 3, 2023. 1.04 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: Single General Construction Contract based on a single lump-sum price as described in Division 00 11 13 – Advertisement for Bids. 1.05 PERMITS, FEES AND BONDS A. The Owner will obtain and pay for the Building Permit prior to a Notice to Proceed. B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all Plumbing, Electrical, Mechanical and any other permits as required by the City of Renton and other regulatory agencies. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 10 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 A. The work will be a single project with Notice to Proceed (NTP) and Substantial Completion dates. 1. Anticipated Notice to Proceed: February 28, 2023. 2. Substantial Completion Date: NTP + 120 Days. B. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the contract time. 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Renton City Hall is occupied 24/7 and 365 days per year. Cooperate with Owner to minimize disruption and to facilitate Owner's ongoing operations within City Hall. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent facilities. Schedule delivery and removal of materials and equipment to minimize disruption to Owner’s ongoing operations. Do not close any other area outside of the construction limits without written permission from Owner. 1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Others. 2. Work by Owner. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law. 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 10 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 D. SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS 1. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts. Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions. 2. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 3. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule. 4. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 5. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 6. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 7. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. F. WORK RESTRICTIONS 1. Hours of Operation: Per City of Renton Municipal Code 4-4-030 C.: Commercial, multi- family, new single family and other nonresidential construction activities shall be restricted to the hours between seven o’clock (7:00) a.m. and eight o’clock (8:00) p.m., Monday through Friday. No noise shall be generated Monday’s after 3:00 PM. Haul hours shall be restricted to the hours between eight-thirty (8:30) a.m. and three-thirty (3:30) p.m., Monday through Friday, and work on Saturdays shall be restricted to the hours between nine o’clock (9:00) and seven o’clock (7:00), unless otherwise approved in advance by the Owner, in conjunction with the Parks and Recreation Division. 2. Existing Services and Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt building services or utilities occupied by Owner unless permitted under the following conditions according to requirements indicated. a. Provide Owner not less than 72 hours’ notice in advance of proposed service and /or utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed without Owner's written permission. 3. Contractor will coordinate construction activities, including all deliveries and equipment movement with Public Works/Facilities staff before commencing activities in the construction area. Contractor will notify Owner of any planned construction activities outside of the defined limits of construction. 4. Other Restriction per Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 11 30 – Hazardous Materials Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 11 30 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for hazardous materials. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 NOT USED 1.04 CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION A. Contractor to provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended to be used during execution of the project, including storage locations. 1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is encountered during execution of the Work. The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification procedure for its abatement by the Contractor. B. Compliance with Regulations: All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements. The disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable federal, state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 12 00 – Delegated Design Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 12 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 1 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 14 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways and sidewalks clear and available to Owner, the general public and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize disruption of ongoing Owner activities minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Work Hours: 1. Weekdays (Monday through Friday): 5 a.m. to 5 p.m. 2. Weekday Evenings (Monday through Friday) after 5 p.m. – With Advance Owner Approval 3. Weekends: a. Saturday: 5 a.m. to 5 p.m. - With Advance Owner Approval b. Sunday and Holidays (City of Renton official recognized): No work permitted. 1.03 NOISE CONTROL A. Schedule loud noise generating activities (roto-hammers, core-drilling, impact tools, etc.) prior to 8 a.m.(or after 5 p.m. with advance Owner approval) B. No noise shall be generated which is audible outside of the work area after 3:00 p.m. on Mondays PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 20 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Modification procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. See General Conditions all requirements pertaining to retainage. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Format: On 8-1/2" X 11" paper. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit printed schedule on form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit for Owner and Architect approval, electronic format of Schedule of Values, a minimum of 15 days before first Application for Payment submittal. Approved Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner and Architect as the basis for review and approval of progress payments. E. Format: Schedule of Values shall breakdown the total Contract Sum to each category of work utilizing the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. 1. Site mobilization shall not exceed 5% of Contract Sum. 2. Construction closeout shall not be less than 3% of Contract Sum. 3. For each line item exceeding 5% of Contract Sum, show breakdown bymaterial and labor/installation. 4. Cross reference Schedule of Values amounts to the Construction Progress Schedule scheduled tasks with specified in Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule. 5. Round figures to nearest dollar amount. 6. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum. 7. Major cost items, which are not directly a cost of actual work-in-place may be either shown as items in schedule of values or included in General Conditions, mobilization and/or demobilization at Contractor's option. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders – listing Change Order Proposals (COP), with each Application for Payment. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 20 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, if not stipulated, at monthly intervals. B. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit approved Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms for Contractor and all subcontractors. Without exception, processing of an Application for Payment will not begin until approved copies are on file with Owner for each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed by Contractor or subcontractors included in that Application. 1. Submit a list of all subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Submit instructions to Owner for the disposition of retainage funds. a. In accordance with chapter 60.28 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW), Owner shall reserve a contract retainage not to exceed Five percent of the moneys earned by Contractor as trust fund for the protection and payment of: 1) The claims of any person and Owner arising in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) The state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such Contractor. b. The funds held in retainage shall be held until forty-five (45) days following Final Acceptance subject to the provisions of chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW. c. Contractor's written instructions should be addressed to the Owner with a copy to the Architect. d. At the option of Contractor, the moneys reserved by Owner shall be either: 1) Retained in a fund by Owner. 2) Bonded for all or any portion of the contract retainage in a form acceptable to Owner; or 3) Deposited in an interest-bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association. 4) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by Owner. (a) Escrow Agent: If the retained funds are to be placed in escrow, Contractor will select the escrow agent, subject to approval by Owner. The selected agent must be a bank or trust company in the State of Washington. (b) Pursuant to electing the escrow option, an escrow agreement shall be executed by Contractor, Owner, and bank. Three copies of the agreement should be completed and executed by Contractor and returned to Owner for joint execution, who in turn will forward all copies to the bank for receipt and acceptance. The bank will retain one copy and return one copy each to Contractor and Owner. A completed and signed escrow agreement must be on file with Owner for payment before Contractor's first application is processed. (c) Escrow Payments: As each progress estimate is presented for payment, DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 20 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Contractor shall make a vouchered request for the retained funds that are to be placed in escrow. Upon receiving a retainage invoice, Owner will issue a check payable to Contractor and the bank jointly. Such checks will be mailed to the bank and Contractor will receive copies of check transmittal letters. (d) Escrow Investments: The bank shall invest the retained funds in bonds and other securities selected by Contractor from the following list approved by Owner: (1) Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States. (2) Other obligations of the United States or its agencies. (3) Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States. (4) Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association. (5) Time deposits in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (e) Deposits in savings accounts in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (f) The investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the contract, including extensions thereof or forty-five (45) days following the Final Acceptance of the improvement or work. Interest on such investments shall be paid to Contractor as it accrues. (g) Escrow Costs and Fees: All escrow costs and fees shall be paid by Contractor, in accordance with the Escrow Agreement. (h) Release of Escrow Investments to Contractor: Upon Final Acceptance and the expiration of forty-five (45) days following the date of Acceptance, and contingent upon Contractor's compliance with provisions of the public works statutes, Owner will issue written instructions to the bank to release to Contractor the investment held in escrow. If there should be either unpaid taxes or other unsatisfied claims against the retained percentage, the provisions of the Escrow Agreement will govern. C. Submit draft Application for Payment to Owner and Architect for approval 10 days prior to submittal of actual Application for Payment. D. Present required information in digital form. E. Form: As approved by the Owner and Architect (Use AIA G701/702 or similar) F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. H. List each authorized Change Order with each Change Order Proposal listed as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. I. Submit one signed digital image of each Application for Payment. J. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule revised and current as specified in Section 01 32 16. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 20 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 2. Conditional release of liens from Contractor, major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products if any per General Conditions. 4. Statements of Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages as documented by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for each contractor or subcontractor included on the Pay Application. 5. List with Contractor, sub-contractors, and all sub-sub-contractors invoice amounts, UBI number, and Affidavit of Intent’s number. 6. Copies of Certified Payroll from Contractor and all sub-contractors. K. When Owner or Architect require substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Owner or Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Owner's standard form. B. For other required changes, Owner or Architect may issue a Field Authorization (FA) signed by the Owner, A/E and Contractor instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes, will identify an initial estimate of the probable cost of any changes, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Owner or Architect will issue a request for Change Order Proposal (COP) that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 5 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Owner and Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. E. Computation of Change in Contract Sum: Will be as specified in the Agreement and the General Conditions. 1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 3. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 20 00 - 5 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. f. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item listing each COP and adjust the Contract Price. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. Closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Contractor's Certification of Payment of Debts Claims. 3. Contractor's Certificate of Release of Liens. 4. Owner's and Architect’s approval of Closeout submittals specified in Section 01 78 00. 5. Completion of punchlist with Owner’s and Architect’s approval. 6. Completion of all Change Orders. 7. Submittal of Affidavit of wages paid for Contractor and subcontractors. 8. L&I release. 9. Sign-off of all required permits. 10. Posting of Certificate of Occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 21 00 – Prevailing Wage Rates Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 21 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This project, located in King County Washington, is subject to the payment of prevailing wages to all workers. It is the contractor’s responsibility to determine and use the applicable rates for the appropriate area of the state, as published by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. These rates are available on the web at https://lni.wa.gov/licensing- permits/public-works-projects/prevailing-wage-rates/. 1. Contractor must include these provisions in all subcontracts for work performed under this Contract. B. Based in the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this project is date bids opened. Upon written request, the Owner will mail a hard copy of the applicable prevailing wages for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1/4 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 00 21 13 -Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests. DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products,assemblies,and equipment. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Unavailability. Regulatory changes. Reduction in contract time.. Reduction in contract sum. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.CSI/CSC Form 1.5C -Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage)Current Edition. B.CSI/CSC Form 13.1A -Substitution Request (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase)Current Edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Substitution Request for products,assemblies,materials,and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product,equipment,assembly,or system. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Substitution Procedures Job Number 2210142.00 01 25 00 - 2/4 Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete,with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re- approval by authorities. A Substitution Request for specified installer constitutes a representation that the submitter: Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer,but was unable to come to commercial,or other terms. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request,and information necessary to provide an actionable response. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose,and must be used. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. Submit an electronic document,combining the request form with supporting data into single document. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT Submittal Time Restrictions: Instructions to Bidders specifies time restrictions and the documents required for submitting substitution requests during the bidding period. Submittal Form (before award of contract): Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C -Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form;other forms of submission are unacceptable. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION Submittal Form (after award of contract): Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A -Substitution Request (After Bidding/Negotiating). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form;other forms of submission are unacceptable. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution,but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect,in order to stay on 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 3/4 approved project schedule. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals,without having received prior approval. Without a separate written request. RESOLUTION Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form. ACCEPTANCE Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order,Construction Change Directive,Architectural Supplementary Instructions,or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals,for closeout submittals. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record.Include both approved and rejected Requests. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administration and supervisory personnel. B. Communication procedures. C. Project meetings. D. Preconstruction meeting. E. Site mobilization meeting. F. Progress meetings. G. Coordination procedures. H. Submittal Types. I. Submittals for review and information. J. Number of copies of submittals. K. Submittal procedures. L. Daily Progress reports. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy. C. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. D. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. F. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel. B. Coordination drawings. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at progress meeting intervals, as approved by Owner and Architect. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES A. General 1. Address all Project correspondence through Architect. Do not contact Architect’s or Owner’s consultants directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the Owner, Architect, or Architect’s sub consultants. 2. Architect will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be recognized. Architect to coordinate all decisions and communications with the Owner. Architect will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor. a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes. 3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project title and number on all correspondence. B. Requests for Information 1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Architect or Architect’s sub consultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI) to the Architect. 2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner and Architect, containing the following information: a. Project name and number. b. RFI number (three digits, beginning with 001). c. Date of request. d. Date of required response. e. Subject title. f. Initiator of request. g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification). h. Location on site. i. Description of issue. j. Contractor's proposed solution, if known. k. Cost impacts, if known. l. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply. 3. Provide only one question per RFI. 4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence. 5. Allow 10 working days for Architect to issue response. 6. Owner and Architect reserve the right to deny any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract Documents. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Meeting 1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed. 2. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and selected consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, - and major site related subcontractors. d. 3. Agenda: a. Distribution of Contract Documents. b. Designation of project personnel. c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, and substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout. d. Scheduling, early occupancy. e. Working hours. f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. g. Construction related air quality control procedures. h. Safety. i. Security. j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability. 4. Contractor will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Owner for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. B. Progress Meetings 1. Attend progress meetings at approved intervals or as required by the Owner and Architect. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of applications for payment. 2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings. 3. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and required sub consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent. d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, Manufacturers Representatives, and Consultants. 4. Agenda: a. Safety Report. b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve. c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions. f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for impeding planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules. g. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction. h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. i. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. j. Review Requests for Information status. k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions. l. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress schedule. m. Maintenance of quality and work standards. n. Other business relating to Work. 5. Contractor will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Owner for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. a. Required performance results. b. Protection of construction and personnel. 3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work, with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others. B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved, describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner, Architect and separate contractors if coordination of their work is required. C. Coordination Meetings: Contractor will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress and pre-installation meetings. 1. Required Attendees: a. Architect, and Architect’s consultants, as required b. Contractor c. Superintendent d. Subcontractors e. Suppliers f. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. 2. Agenda: a. Scheduling. b. Interface requirements. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 5 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 c. Off-site fabrication. d. Access requirements. e. Site utilization. f. Temporary facilities and controls. g. Quality standards. 3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable, manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions; factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings, dimensions (field and factory), roughing-in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination requirements, and other project-specific information. C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns. D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns. E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 32 16. F. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or person. G. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer, manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of materials or products for compliance with requirements. I. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements. J. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project. K. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. L. Project Record Documents, Operation & Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 6 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Combination of submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 78 00. N. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner and Architect O. Others as indicated. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR ARCHITECT’S REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Schedules. 6. Qualification Data. 7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals, etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Permits. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Architect . Access to the document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy. At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage device acceptable to the Architect and Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 30 00 - 7 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 one physical copy of all project submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs, titles, and edge identification. B. Superintendents Daily Report 1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report concerning events at the Project site as follows: a. List of subcontractors on site. b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities. c. Equipment on site. d. Material deliveries. e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. f. Accidents. g. Meetings and significant decisions. h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below. i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. j. Emergency procedures. k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. l. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented. m. Change Orders received and implemented. n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same. o. Services connected and disconnected. p. Equipment or system tests and startups. Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner and Architect at Progress Meetings. 2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the Owner and Architect within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner and Architect in advance when these events are known or predictable. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Electronic Data Request and Agreement 01 30 01 - 1/2 SECTION 01 30 01 ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND AGREEMENT DATE:_________________ REQUESTOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________ REQUESTOR'S ADDRESS:__________________________________________________ REQUESTOR'S PHONE:_________________E-MAIL:_______________________________ TO: MACKENZIE. Attention:Brueck Brakefield 500 Union Street,#410,Seattle,Washington 98101 Phone:206.749.9993 Email:bbrakefield@mcknze.com RE: PROJECT NAME: RENTON CITY HALL -7TH FLOOR HR TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT NUMBER: 2210142.00 Provision of Electronic Data Dear __________________: Requestor hereby requests the following electronic data for subject project: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF REQUESTED INFORMATION HERE: Requestor understands that the information contained therein may change during the course of the project. Requestor will use the information only as follows: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF USE HERE: Requestor acknowledges the following: MACKENZIE.is not responsible for any modifications to this data,whether intentional or unintentional,without MACKENZIE.'s participation. All copyrights assigned to this data or portions of it shall remain the property of the original copyright holders. Although MACKENZIE.will make every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of information provided, MACKENZIE will not be responsible for inaccuracy or incompleteness. Because of the differences among the many available software and hardware systems and the different ways in which various systems represent drawing elements,it is not possible to ensure complete,accurate information. Signature _________________________ Printed Name ___________________________ END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 32 16 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: For work sequence, Owner occupancy, and Owner-furnished items. C. Section 01 20 00 - Payment Procedures: For schedule of values. D. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: For superintendent's daily progress reports. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Progress Schedule: Indicate complete construction sequence, from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion. 1. Submit within 7 days of Notice to Proceed. 2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 3. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 1. Break down work so that no activity is longer than 21 days, unless allowed by Owner. 2. List submittals, materials and installation as separate line items. 3. List all permit submittals showing submittal and anticipated issuance dates. 4. List all Owner supplied material delivery dates on schedule. 5. List all Work by Owner completion dates on schedule. B. Identify each activity by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 32 16 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 D. Indicate procurement activities for long-lead and major items, including submittal, approval, and fabrication activities. See Section 01 30 00 for submittal review durations. E. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00. F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification, and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using the current approved schedule to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 3.02 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first workday of each week. 3.03 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Owner and Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days. 3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to General Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect and to the Owner. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection agencies and services. F. Control of installation. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. I. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 42 00 - Definitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements. A. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work used to evaluate that actual product incorporated into the Work comply with requirements. Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures. B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that materials, products, workmanship, on-site and off-site fabrication, construction, and operations are in compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function as a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will include the following: 1. Qualification Data: For Contractor-provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report performed by a recognized authority. 2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular form and include the following: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Description of test or inspection. c. Identification of applicable standards. d. Identification of test and inspection methods. e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required. f. Time schedule (or time span) for tests and inspections. g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. h. Requirements for obtaining samples. i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service. 3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-monthly intervals. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated performance and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include the list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers, fabricators, specialists, or factory-authorized service representatives, provide entities with the following qualifications: DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 5. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the drawings. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing test results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency, Contractor shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing agency services. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Owner and Architect will consider requests for Substitutions up to 10 days prior to bid opening date. Approved Substitutions will be listed on Addenda. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 B. Substitutions may be considered after bid opening only when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder/Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed substitution Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. All substitution requests shall be accompanied with the Substitution Request Form, completely filled out. Substitution Request Forms are found in the Specifications in Section 01 40 10. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 5 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Obtain Architect’s 's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 1Architect will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mock-up. 2. Make corrections as necessary until Architect’s approval is issued. E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to remain, protect from all damage. G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Tolerances will not be cumulative. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. 3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 4. Test or inspection results. 5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect and Owner. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 6 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's and Architect’s reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for Payment. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work. 2. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 3. Schedule tests and inspections with Testing Agency. Notify Owner, Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 40 00 - 7 Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements January 3, 2023 D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Owner. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum. 3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner and Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Maintain a Log of Non-conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution. 3.08 SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s) approved by Owner and Architect. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non-Conforming Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they impact quality assurance or quality control. B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports. Verification shall include a statement that all materials and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as noted. C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 50 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner, Architect, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor. 1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. NA 1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 50 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 1.07 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll-up type fencing is allowed. B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plan for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting all Work required under the Contract. Maintain materials and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective materials and equipment and uses made thereof. B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work. Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations. 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking areas, park roads, and city streets. D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations. E. Traffic Control Plan: Contractor will prepare, obtain and maintain a Traffic Control Plan approval and permit from the City of Renton for all work associated with Union Avenue and work for the park project. F. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to existing pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Do not park vehicles in traffic lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic control signs and devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries. Storage of materials adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless authorized by the Owner. 1.11 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. Owner will indicate location of any facilities required outside of work area. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 50 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Not Required 1.13 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposure. 1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specify condition. 1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: 1. General: Comply with the following: a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". b. ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition". 2. Recommendations: Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations. 3. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.16 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 50 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 efficient manner. 2. Take necessary fire prevention measures. 3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's operations. 4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1.17 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility connections, staging areas and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility provision. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 58 00 – Temporary Project Signage Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 58 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 NOT USED This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre-installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. D. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at completion. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor (if used) B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit digital record survey for the project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building, site improvements, benchmarks, and utilities. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed. D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Washington. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. B. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. C. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 Summary of Work for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Owner four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Owner. G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Saw cut existing work smooth to avoid damage to existing work to remain. 3. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 4. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 5. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 6. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 7. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 8. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 9. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill: 1. To complete the work. 2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work. 3. To remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 5 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical, and other services. 6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work. 7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods, saw cutting, that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Cutting: 1. Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure(s) with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations. 2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic hammering and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are durable and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 4. Match color, texture, and appearance. 5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 6 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. 3.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 7 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to complete each item and anticipated dates of completion. 1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollar value of Work remaining, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit substantial completion checklist. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with individual specification section requirements. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner and Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During inspection, Owner /Architect will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as necessary to form the Owner’s/Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List. The Owner’s/Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List will subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Owner/Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on the Contractor's Punch List or the Owner’s/ Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: If, following Owner’s/Architect’s inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not granted, request re-inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all Substantial Completion re-inspections. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 8 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 3.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 2. Submit copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification by the QAM stating that every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all accessory keys. 6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in technical specifications. 7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and certification. 8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements and notify Owner of their findings. Owner will certify Application for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for Final Completion re-inspections greater than one in number. C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.12 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST) A. General: The QAM shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 70 00 - 9 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean site: sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 74 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Treated wood. 5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 6. Glass. 7. Plastic sheeting. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166 codified in King County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, and City of Renton requirements pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 74 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 74 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled, i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 74 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Engineer. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. Regular job-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. Location of containers to be left on site shall be designated by Owner. Assume remote parking lot if exterior containers are required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 1 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial Completion and Final Completions Checklists. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner/Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future items. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 2 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full-size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets, "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda changes on the applicable drawing sheet or specification section. 2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Changes made by Change Order. d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 3 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 2. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate sheet numbers. C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets and tabs. 3.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of selections made. 1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed. 3.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted and approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an organized and tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each. 3.05 O&M MANUALS, GENERAL A. Provide PDF files that are organized by section and file and fully tabbed and labeled. Provide files in original size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save files at a resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file sizes. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 4 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 furnished by multiple sources, assemble and coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant, inapplicable, or unnecessary information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation. The QAM is responsible for final assembly of manuals. B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual. 2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to O&M Manuals that contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification Sections in which each system or subsystem is addressed. 3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Engineer. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals. F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 5 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Files: Documents shall be submitted as electronic PDFs. a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each file," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. Use layout supplied by Owner in electronic format approved by Owner. 2. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing sheet. Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files. 3.06 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: Organize digital PDF manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RENTON CITY HALL – HR IMPROVEMENTS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Contract No. CAG-22-219 01 78 00 - 6 Renton City Hall – HR Improvements January 3, 2023 3.07 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.08 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. Warranties shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic copy forms per the below instructions for format. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic no-print-transfer-type covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Demolition 02 41 00 - 1/4 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor. Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.29 CFR 1926 -Safety and Health Regulations for Construction Current Edition. B.NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations 2022,with Errata (2021). QUALITY ASSURANCE Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. Minimum of 3years of documentedexperience. PART 3 EXECUTION SCOPE Remove portions of existing buildings in the following sequence: interior walls,doors,frames,sidelites,and ceiling as described on demolition plans.. Remove other items indicated,for relocation. GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. Obtain required permits. Provide,erect,and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Demolition Job Number 2210142.00 02 41 00 - 2/4 Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits;do not obstruct required exits at any time;protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations,stop work and notify Architect and Owner;hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials,lead,PCB's,and mercury. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. Set aside reusable,recyclable,and salvageable materials;store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. Remove items indicated on drawings. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC,Plumbing,Fire Protection,Electrical,and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation;maintain access to equipment and operational components. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. Remove abandoned pipe,ducts,conduits,and equipment,including those above accessible ceilings;remove back to source of supply where possible,otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. Protect existing work to remain. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Demolition 02 41 00 - 3/4 Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. Patch as specified for patching new work. DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL Remove debris,junk,and trash from site. Leave site in clean condition,ready for subsequent work. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 41 00 - 1/4 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Specially fabricated cabinet units. Hardware. Preparation for installing utilities. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 12 36 00 -Countertops. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards,2nd Edition 2014,with Errata (2016). B.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards,2nd Edition 2014,with Errata (2016). C.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)-North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 2021,with Errata. D.BHMA A156.9 -Cabinet Hardware 2020. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials,component profiles,fastening methods,jointing details,and accessories. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot,minimum. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction,minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet,countertop,and shelf unit substrate and finish. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls,hinges,shelf standards,and locksets, demonstrating hardware design,quality,and finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Protect units from moisture damage. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Architectural Wood Casework Job Number 2210142.00 06 41 00 - 2/4 FIELD CONDITIONS During and after installation of custom cabinets,maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Genothen;www.genothen.com. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures CABINETS Quality Standard: Custom Grade,in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. Cabinets: Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs.per sq.ft. Deflection: L/144. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. LAMINATE MATERIALS Manufacturers: Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. ACCESSORIES Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC,flatshaped;smoothfinish;self locking serrated tongue;of width to match component thickness. Color: As selected by Architectfrom manufacturer's fullrange. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 41 00 - 3/4 HARDWARE Hardware: BHMA A156.9,types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supportsand coordinated self rests,satin chromefinish,for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. Drawer and DoorPulls: Berenson Wire Pull 4".Finish,satin chrome.. Catches: Magnetic. Drawer Slides: Type: Full extension. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. Mounting: Side mounted. Stops: Integral type. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. Manufacturers: Accuride International,Inc: www.accuride.com/#sle. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company;Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides: www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Hinges: European style concealedself-closingtype,stainless ,steel with satin finish. Manufacturers: Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com/#sle. Blum,Inc: www.blum.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. FABRICATION Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Architectural Wood Casework Job Number 2210142.00 06 41 00 - 4/4 Edging: Fit shelves,doors,and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. Fitting:When necessary to cut and fit on site,provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline;secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Set and secure custom cabinets in place,assuring that they are rigid,plumb,and level. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Hollow Metal Frames 08 12 13 - 1/4 SECTION 08 12 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Fire-rated hollow metal frames for non-hollow metal doors. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors: Non-hollow metal door for hollow metal frames. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glazed borrowed lites. Section 09 91 23 -Interior Painting: Field painting. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI/SDI A250.3 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames 2019. B.ANSI/SDI A250.8 -Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100)2017. C.ANSI/SDI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames 2020. D.BHMA A156.115 -Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 2016. E.NAAMM HMMA 840 -Guide Specifications For Receipt,Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2017. F.NFPA 80 -Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2022. G.UL 10B -Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction,hardware locations,reinforcement type and locations,anchorage and fastening methods,and finishes;and one copy of referenced grade standard. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening,showing elevations,glazing,frame profiles,and identifying location of different finishes,if any. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions,including any special installation instructions relating to this project. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Hollow Metal Frames Job Number 2210142.00 08 12 13 - 2/4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Store in accordance with applicable requirements and in compliance with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Hollow Metal Frames with Integral Casings: Curries,an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. Republic Doors,an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle. Steelcraft,an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings for frame sizes,fire ratings,sound ratings,finishing, door hardware to be installed,and other variations,if any. Door Frame Type: Provide hollow metal door frames with integral casings. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement,comply with the specified requirements for each type;for instance,an exterior frame that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior frames and for sound-rated frames;where two requirements conflict,comply with the most stringent. Hardware Preparations,Selections and Locations: Comply with BHMA A156.115,NAAMM HMMA 830, NAAMM HMMA 831 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100)in accordance with specified requirements. HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES WITH INTEGRAL CASINGS Fire-Rated Door Frames: Slip-on type. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). Level 2 -Heavy-duty. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Hollow Metal Frames 08 12 13 - 3/4 Physical Performance Level B 500 000 cycles;in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage,0.053 inch,minimum. Zinc Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating thickness;ASTM A653/A653M. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule,tested in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests"). Provide units listed and labeled by ITS (DIR)or UL (DIR). Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. FINISHES Primer: Rust-inhibiting,complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10,door manufacturer's standard. ACCESSORIES Silencers: Resilient rubber,fitted into drilled hole;3 on strike side of single door,3 on center mullion of pairs,and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. TOLERANCES Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges,crossed corner to corner. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 1/4 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Flush wood doors;flushconfiguration;fire-rated and non-rated. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 12 13 -Hollow Metal Frames. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards,2nd Edition 2014,with Errata (2016). B.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)-North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 2021,with Errata. C.UL 10B -Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. D.UL 10C -Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction;veneer species,type and characteristics. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames,elevations,sizes,types,swings,undercuts,beveling,blocking for hardware,factory machining,factory finishing,cutouts for glazing and other details. Samples: Submit twosamples of door veneer,8 1/2 x11 inchin size illustrating wood grain,stain color, and sheen. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. Installer's Qualification Statement. Warranty,executed in Owner's name. QUALITY ASSURANCE Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section,with not less than three years of documented experience. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Flush Wood Doors Job Number 2210142.00 08 14 16 - 2/4 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Package,deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. WARRANTY See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials,and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Wood Veneer Faced Doors: Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com/#sle. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. DOORS AND PANELS Doors:Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements. Quality Standard: Custom Grade,Heavy Dutyperformance,in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS),unless noted otherwise. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. Provide solid core doors at each location. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C -Positive Pressure;Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL)or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI)labeled without any visible seals when door is open. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 3/4 DOOR AND PANEL CORES Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC),plies and faces as indicated. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type,with fire resistant composite core (FD),plies and faces as indicated above;with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. DOOR FACINGS Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White birch,veneer grade in accordance with quality standard indicated,plain sliced (flat cut),with book matchbetween leaves of veneer,running matchof spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face. DOOR CONSTRUCTION Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware,in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 5 -Finishing for grade specified and as follows: Transparent: System -4 Latex Acrylic Water-based. Stain: As selected by Architect. Sheen: Satin. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. ACCESSORIES Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 11 13. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Flush Wood Doors Job Number 2210142.00 08 14 16 - 4/4 PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. INSTALLATION Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim;if fit or clearance is not correct,replace door. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. Coordinate installation of glazing. TOLERANCES Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing,warp,and squareness. ADJUSTING Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Glazing 08 80 00 - 1/4 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Glazing units. Glazing compounds and accessories. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials Current Edition. B.ASTM C864 -Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,Setting Blocks, and Spacers 2005 (Reapproved 2019). C.ASTM C1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2021. D.ASTM C1048 -Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass 2018. E.GANA (GM)-GANA Glazing Manual 2008. F.GANA (SM)-GANA Sealant Manual 2008. G.UL (DIR)-Online Certifications Directory Current Edition. H.UL 9 -Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. I.UL 10B -Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. J.UL 10C -Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,Including All Revisions. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical,functional,and environmental characteristics,limitations,special application requirements,and identify available colors. Samples: Submit twosamples 4 by 4 inchin sizeof glass units. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Glazing Job Number 2210142.00 08 80 00 - 2/4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM)and GANA (SM)for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Glass Manufactures: PPG Industries,Inc.:www.ppg.com. Guardian:www.guardian.com. Substitutions:Refer to Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. GLAZING UNITS Safety Glass (Type T)-Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing: Applications: Door and side lite glazing unless noted otherwise. Glass Type: Fully temperedfloat glass. Tint: Clear. Thickness: 1/4 inch,nominal. Rated Doors -Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type,thickness,and configuration of glazing that contains flame,smoke,and does not block radiant heat,as required to achieve fire-doors indicated fire-rating period of 90 minutes or less. Applications: Glazing in fire-rated door assembly. Provide products listed by {\rs\#2}or {\rs\#2}and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating. Fire-Rating Period: As indicated on drawings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Glazing 08 80 00 - 3/4 Markings for Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Assemblies: Provide permanent markings on fire- protection-rated glazing in compliance with {\rs\#1},local building code,and authorities having jurisdiction "D"-meets fire door assembly criteria of NFPA 252,UL 10B,or UL 10C fire test standards. "OH"-meets fire window assembly criteria including hose stream test of NFPA 257,or UL 9 fire test standards. "H"-meets fire door assembly hose stream test of NFPA 252, UL 10B,or UL 10C fire tests standards. "XXX"-placeholder that represents fire-rating period,in minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances,including those for size, squareness,and offsets at corners. INSTALLATION,GENERAL Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass,gaskets,and other glazing material manufacturers,unless more stringent requirements are indicated,including those in glazing referenced standards. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193,GANA (SM),and manufacturer's instructions. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as,and not limited to the following;weld splatter,fire-safing,plastering,mortar droppings,etc. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. CLEANING Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Glazing Job Number 2210142.00 08 80 00 - 4/4 Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. PROTECTION After installation,mark pane with an 'X'by using removable plastic tape or paste. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 05 61 - 1/6 SECTION 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor coverings: Carpet tile. Resilient Tile. Preparation of existingconcrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). Patching compound. Remedial floor coatings. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C109/C109M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in.or [50 mm]Cube Specimens)2021. B.ASTM C472 -Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,Gypsum Plasters,and Gypsum Concrete 2020. C.ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 2021. D.ASTM F1869 -Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 2022. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing,so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing. SUBMITTALS Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers'Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate,floor covering,and adhesive to be used;showing: Moisture and alkalinity (pH)limits and test methods. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. Testing Agency's Report: Description of areas tested;include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation Job Number 2210142.00 09 05 61 - 2/6 Summary of conditions encountered. Moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. Copies of specified test methods. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. Product data for recommended remedial coating. Submit report to Architect. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. QUALITY ASSURANCE Moisture and alkalinity (pH)testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required,with project Owner's project contact information. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver,store,handle,and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging;include installation instructions. Keep materials from freezing. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 05 61 - 3/6 FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48 hours prior to testing,at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48 hours prior to testing,at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product,suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer,provide a product with the following characteristics: Cementitious moisture-,mildew-,and alkali-resistant compound,compatible with floor,floor covering,and floor covering adhesive,and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi,minimum,after 28 days,when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472,whichever is appropriate. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product,suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present;low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer,provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. Remedial Floor Coating: Single-or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits,resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH)found,and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. Use product recommended by testing agency. PART 3 EXECUTION CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION Perform following operations in the order indicated: Preliminary cleaning. Moisture vapor emission tests;3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet,unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. Internal relative humidity tests;in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests,unless otherwise indicated. Alkalinity (pH)tests;in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests,unless otherwise indicated. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation Job Number 2210142.00 09 05 61 - 4/6 Specified remediation,if required. Patching,smoothing,and leveling,as required. Other preparation specified. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. Protection. Remediations: Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation;re-test after correction. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer,use that adhesive for installation of the flooring;if not,apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over entire suspect floor area. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture,no additional remediation is required;if not,if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer,use that adhesive for installation of the flooring;otherwise,apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. PRELIMINARY CLEANING Clean floors of dust,solvents,paint,wax,oil,grease,asphalt,residual adhesive,adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds,sealing compounds,alkaline salts,excessive laitance,mold,mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method,comply with the requirements of this section. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits,perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits,perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 05 61 - 5/6 Report: Report the information required by the test method. ALKALINITY TESTING Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements. The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710,repeated here for the Contractor's convenience. Use a wide range alkalinity (pH)test paper,its associated chart,and distilled or deionized water. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete,forming a puddle approximately 1 inchin diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds,then dip the alkalinity (pH)test paper into the water,remove it,and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity (pH)reading. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits,perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits,perform remediation if alkalinity (pH)test value is over 10. PREPARATION See individual floor covering section(s)for additional requirements. Comply with recommendations of testing agency. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. Fill and smooth surface cracks,grooves,depressions,control joints and other non-moving joints,and other irregularities with patching compound. Do not fill expansion joints,isolation joints,or other moving joints. ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. PROTECTION Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 1/8 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. Metal stud wall framing. Acoustic insulation. Gypsum wallboard. Joint treatment and accessories. RELATED REQUIREMENTS REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C475/C475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board 2017 (Reapproved 2022). ASTM C 630/C 630M -Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board;2000. B.ASTM C645 -Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members 2018. C.ASTM C754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products 2020. D.ASTM C840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 2020. E.ASTM C1002 -Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs 2022. F.ASTM C1047 -Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base 2019. G.ASTM C1280 -Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing 2018. H.ASTM C1396/C1396M -Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017. I.ASTM D3273 -Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 2021. J.ASTM E413 -Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2022. K.UL (FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition. L.UL (FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job Number 2210142.00 09 21 16 - 2/8 SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing,gypsum board,accessories,and joint finishing system. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754,provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840.Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum 3 years of experience. Apprentice workers may be employed only under constant supervision from experienced installers or applicators. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicablecode for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Storage and Protection Store materials in dry,ventilated space,under cover and 4 inches above concrete floor slabs. Protect members from excessive stress during erection. Distribute gypsum panels throughout the building to prevent overstressing the floor structural systems during construction. Store gypsum panels on flat surface and protect panels from warp and edge damage. SITE CONDITIONS Temperature and Humidity Requirements: Maintain ambient air temperature above 55 degrees F. Maintain 70 percent maximum relative humidity. Maintain air temperature and humidity within the above limits in each work area for 48 hours prior to,during,and after installation of gypsum board systems. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 3/8 PART 2 PRODUCTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. Interior Partitions,Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No.U419;1 hour rating. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL (FRD). METAL FRAMING MATERIALS Manufacturers -Metal Framing,Connectors,and Accessories: ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. Jaimes Industries:www.jaimesind.com/#sle. Marino: www.marinoware.com/#sle. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle. Steel Construction Systems: www.steelconsystems.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories: Same manufacturer as framing. Simpson Strong-Tie Company,Inc.:wwwstrongtie.com Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645;galvanized sheet steel,of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated,with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksiminimum yield strength is used,the metal is continuously dimpled,the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness,and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. Studs: "C"shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job Number 2210142.00 09 21 16 - 4/8 Runners: U shaped,sized to match studs. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. Furring: Hat-shaped sections,minimum depth of 7/8 inch. Ceiling Hangers:Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes,screws and anti-friction bushings,preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code,when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet,SS Grade 50/340,with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems indicated on drawings. BOARD MATERIALS Manufacturers -Gypsum-Based Board: American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place;ends square cut. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings,unless otherwise indicated. Mold Resistance: Score of 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. Mold resistant board is required At Sink Walls. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;if no tested assembly is indicated,use Type X board,UL or WH listed. Thickness: Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 5/8 Ceilings: 5/8 inch. Paper-Faced Products: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Fireguard X. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Mold-Guard. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M;ends square cut. Application:Sink Areas. Core Type:Regular &Type X. Thickness:5/8 inch,as indicated. Edges:Tapered. GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665;preformed glass fiber,friction fit type,unfaced. Thickness: Full Stud inch. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant;do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. Products: Franklin International,Inc;Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke and Sound Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle. Liquid Nails,a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings;AS-825 Acoustical Sound Sealant: www.liquidnails.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Acoustical Caulking,CK-3: ASTM C 919,non-hardening polyisobutylene rubber. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047,galvanized steel or rolled zinc,unless noted otherwise. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job Number 2210142.00 09 21 16 - 6/8 Beads,Joint Accessories,and Other Trim: ASTM C1047,rigid plastic,galvanized steel,or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. Corner Beads: Low profile,for 90 degree outside corners. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. Fiberglass Tape:2 inch wide,coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners,except as otherwise indicated. Paper Tape:2 inch wide,creased paper tape for joints and corners,except as otherwise indicated. Joint Compound: Drying type,vinyl-based,ready-mixed. Products: CertainTeed Corporation;Extreme All-Purpose Joint Compound: www.certainteed.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping screws,corrosion resistant. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;steel drill screws,corrosion resistant. Screws: ASTM C 1002;self-piercing tapping type. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood ASTM C557 and Wood ASTM C557: Products: Franklin International,Inc;Titebond PROvantage Professional Drywall Adhesive: www.titebond.com/#sle. Liquid Nails,a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings;DWP-24 Drywall Construction Adhesive: www.liquidnails.com/#sle. Substitution:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures PART 3 EXECUTION PERFORMANCE Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. Examine structural framing and conditions under which wall and ceiling systems are to be installed. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 7/8 Start of wall and ceiling system Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within each area. Protection: Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of joint compound on adjacent finished surfaces. FRAMING INSTALLATION Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to to ceiling framing in accordance with details. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure,maintain clearance between top of studs and structure. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels,using not less than double studs at jambs. Blocking: Install blocking for support of wall cabinets. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces,around cut openings,behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. Seal around all penetrations by conduit,pipe,ducts,and rough-in boxes,except where firestopping is provided. BOARD INSTALLATION Comply with ASTM C840,GA-216,and manufacturer's instructions.Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints,cut edges,and holes with water-resistant sealant. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job Number 2210142.00 09 21 16 - 8/8 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES Corner Beads: Install at external corners,using longest practical lengths. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. JOINT TREATMENT Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paperjoint tape,bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-basedjoint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-basedjoint compound. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840,as follows: Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish. Level 2: In utility areas,behind cabinetry,and on backing board to receive tile finish. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings,whether or not accessible in the completed construction. Tape,fill,and sand exposed joints,edges,and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. Taping,filling,and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. Taping,filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. TOLERANCES Do not exceed 3/16 inch variation in 8'-0"from plumb,level,and true lines. Do not exceed 1/8 inch variation in 8'-0"from level surface in areas scheduled to receive thin set ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced polyester resin panels. Do not exceed 1/16 inch offset at joints between panels within the same plane. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Tiling 09 30 00 - 1/6 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Tile for wall applications. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. Non-ceramic trim. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A108/A118/A136 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium)2019. B.ANSI A108.1a -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method,with Portland Cement Mortar 2017. C.ANSI A108.1b -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar 2017. D.ANSI A108.1c -Contractor's Option:Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry- Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar 1999 (Reaffirmed 2021). E.ANSI A108.5 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar 2021. F.ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework 2017. G.ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units 2018. H.ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar 2019. I.ANSI A118.7 -American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation 2019. J.ANSI A118.9 -American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units 2019. K.ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile 2022. L.TCNA (HB)-Handbook for Ceramic,Glass,and Stone Tile Installation 2022. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Tiling Job Number 2210142.00 09 30 00 - 2/6 Product Data:Provide manufacturers'data sheets on tile,mortar,grout,and accessories.Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout,patterns,color arrangement,perimeter conditions,junctions with dissimilar materials,control and expansion joints,thresholds,ceramic accessories,and setting details. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels,minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern,color variations,and grout joint size variations. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. Installer's Qualification Statement: Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA)or Tile Contractors' Association of America (TCAA)accreditation. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods,cleaning materials,and stain removal methods. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Extra Tile: 1 percentof each size,color,and surface finish combination. QUALITY ASSURANCE Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB)on site. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section,with minimum five years of documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation,with minimum of five years of documented experience. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. FIELD CONDITIONS Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS TILE Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. United Tile:www.unitedtile.com/#sle. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Tiling 09 30 00 - 3/6 Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures Glazed Wall Tile:ANSI A137.1 standard grade. Size: 3 by 12 inch,nominal. Thickness:9.52 mm Surface Finish: Matte glaze. Color(s): As indicated on drawings. Products: United Tile -Settecento,New Yorker:www.unitedtile.com/#sle. TRIM AND ACCESSORIES Non-CeramicTrim: [_______],style and dimensions as indicated on drawings,for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. Applications: Open edges of wall tile. Manufacturers: Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. SETTING MATERIALS Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. Products: ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX N 23 MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com Custom Building Products;ProLite Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar,with Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete 735 Premium Flex: www.merkrete.com TEC,an H.B.Fuller Construction Products Brand;TEC Ultimate Large Tile Mortar: www.tecspecialty.com Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. GROUTS High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Tiling Job Number 2210142.00 09 30 00 - 4/6 Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger;use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. Color(s): As indicated on drawings. Products: ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX FL: www.ardexamericas.com Custom Building Products;Fusion Pro Single Component Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com LATICRETE International,Inc;LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete Pro Grout: www.merkrete.com TEC,an H.B.Fuller Construction Products Brand;TEC AccuColor Plus Grout: www.tecspecialty.com Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied,moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. Products: Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. ACCESSORY MATERIALS Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density,glass fiber reinforced,1/2 inch thick;2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. Products: Custom Building Products;WonderBoard Lite Backerboard: www.custombuildingproducts.com Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Tiling 09 30 00 - 5/6 PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free,and are ready to receive tile. PREPARATION Protect surrounding work from damage. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners,cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. INSTALLATION -GENERAL Install tile,thresholds,and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13,manufacturer's instructions,and TCNA (HB)recommendations. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. Place tile joints uniform in width,subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids,cracks,excess mortar or excess grout,or too little grout. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. Prior to grouting,allow installation to completely cure;minimum of 48 hours. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints,use tile sealant instead of grout,with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. INSTALLATION -WALL TILE CLEANING Clean tile and grout surfaces. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 00 - 1/4 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Suspended metal grid ceiling system. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 21 13 00 -Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. Section 23 37 00 -Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. Section 26 51 00 -Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. Section 28 46 00 -Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C635/C635M -Standard Specification for Manufacture,Performance,and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 2022. B.ASTM C636/C636M -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels 2019. C.ASTM E580/E580M -Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions 2022. D.ASTM E1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 2022. E.UL (FRD)-Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided,dust generating activities have terminated,and overhead work is completed,tested,and approved. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. Samples: Submit twosamples each,4 incheslong,of suspension system main runner. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Acoustical Ceilings Job Number 2210142.00 09 51 00 - 2/4 Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. QUALITY ASSURANCE Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F,and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to,during,and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Suspension Systems: Armstrong World Industries,Inc: www.armstrong.com/#sle. USG: www.usg.com/#sle. Match Existing System Where Indicated. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. ACOUSTICAL UNITS Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E1264,Class A. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber,ASTM E1264 Type III,with the following characteristics: Size: 24 by 48 inches. Thickness: 7/8 inches. Composition: Wet felted. Edge: SquareLay-in Surface Color: White. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. Suspension System: ExposedgridType 15/16 PRELUDE. Products: 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 00 - 3/4 Armstrong Ultima -Square Lay-in. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) Metal Suspension Systems -General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M;die cut and interlocking components,with stabilizer bars,clips,splices,perimeter moldings,and hold down clips as required. ExposedSteelSuspension System: Formed steel,commercial quality cold rolled;heavy-duty. Profile: Tee;15/16 inchwide face. Finish: White painted. Products: Armstrong:15/16 PRELUDE. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures ACCESSORIES Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel;size and type to suit application,seismic requirements,and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening,non-skinning,for use in conjunction with suspended ceiling system. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M,ASTM E580/E580M,ASTM C636/C636M,ASTM E580/E580M,ASTM C636/C636M,and ASTM E580/E580M and as supplemented in this section. Rigidly secure system,including integral mechanical and electrical components,for maximum deflection of 1:360. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Acoustical Ceilings Job Number 2210142.00 09 51 00 - 4/4 Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. Hang suspension system independent of walls,columns,ducts,pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced,avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers,reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner,or support components independently. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. Use longest practical lengths. Overlap and rivetcorners. INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Fit acoustical units in place,free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. Install acoustical units level,in uniform plane,and free from twist,warp,and dents. Cutting Acoustical Units: Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system;comply with fire rating requirements. TOLERANCES Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 1/4 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Resilient tile flooring. Resilient base. Installation accessories. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 2021. B.ASTM F1861 -Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 2021. C.RFCI (RWP)-Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings 2011. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes,patterns and colors available;and installation instructions. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. Verification Samples: Submit twosamples,4 by 4 inchin size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710. Concrete Sub-floor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring,submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures,recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning,stripping,and re-waxing. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Resilient Flooring Job Number 2210142.00 09 65 00 - 2/4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Upon receipt,immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style,color,quantity and run numbers. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized,weather-tight space. Maintain temperature in storage area between 65 degrees Fand 85 degrees F. Do not double stack pallets. FIELD CONDITIONS Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS TILE FLOORING Vinyl Tile-Type LVT: Surface-decorated,with wear layer. Manufacturers: Shaw Contract:www.shawcontract.com/#sle Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700,of Class corresponding to type specified. Plank Tile Size: 9 by 48 inch. Total Thickness: 0.197 inch. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. Color: As indicated on drawings. RESILIENT BASE Resilient Base: ASTM F1861,Type TS rubber,vulcanized thermoset;top set Style B,Cove. Manufacturers: Johnsonite,a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle. Substitution:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures Height: 4 inch. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 3/4 Finish: Satin. Length: Roll. Color: Refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners. ACCESSORIES Primers,Adhesives,and Seam Sealer: Waterproof;types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Moldings,Transition and Edge Strips: Vinyl, color as selected by Architect. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer,free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring,clean,dry,and free of curing compounds,surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free,and are ready to receive resilient base. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. PREPARATION Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives;follow the recommendations of RFCI (RWP). Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. Clean substrate. INSTALLATION -GENERAL Starting installation constitutes acceptance of wall conditions. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Adhesive-Applied Installation: Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Resilient Flooring Job Number 2210142.00 09 65 00 - 4/4 Fit joints and butt seams tightly. Set flooring in place,press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. Where type of floor finish,pattern,or color are different on opposite sides of door,terminate flooring under centerline of door. Scribe flooring to walls,columns,cabinets,floor outlets,and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. INSTALLATION -TILE FLOORING Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed,unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows. INSTALLATION -RESILIENT BASE Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. Miter internal corners. At external corners,use premolded units. At exposed ends,use premolded units. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. PROTECTION Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Tile Carpeting 09 68 13 - 1/4 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Carpet tile,loose laid with edges and control grid adhered. Removal of existing carpet tile. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 09 05 61 -Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of concrete slabs,removal of existing floor coverings,cleaning,and preparation. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D2859 -Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials 2016 (Reapproved 2021). B.ASTM E648 -Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2019a,with Editorial Revision (2020). C.CRI 104 -Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet 2015. D.CRI (GLP)-Green Label Plus Testing Program -Certified Products Current Edition. E.NFPA 253 -Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2023. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,patterns,colors available,and method of installation. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures,recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Tile Carpeting Job Number 2210142.00 09 68 13 - 2/4 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Tile Carpeting: Mohawk Group:www.mohawkgroup.com Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. MATERIALS Tile Carpeting,Type 1: Multi-level pattern loop,manufactured in one color dye lot. Product:As shown on drawings. Tile Size: 12 x 36 inch,nominal. Thickness: 0.210 inch. Color: As indicated on drawings. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP)certified product;in lieu of labeling,independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. ACCESSORIES Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex;type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. Edge Strips: Vinyl,color as selected by Architect. Adhesives: Compatible with materials being adhered;maximum VOC content of 50 g/L;CRI (GLP)certified;in lieu of labeled product,independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Tile Carpeting 09 68 13 - 3/4 Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. PREPARATION Remove existing carpet. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61. INSTALLATION Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms,at perimeter of rooms,where tiles are cut, and at 15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. Complete installation of edge strips,concealing exposed edges. CLEANING Remove excess adhesive without damage,from floor,base,and wall surfaces. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Painting and Coating 09 90 00 - 1/6 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface preparation. Field application of paints. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view,unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated;materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. Items indicated to receive other finishes. Items indicated to remain unfinished. Fire rating labels,equipment serial number and capacity labels,and operating parts of equipment. Floors,unless specifically so indicated. Glass. Concealed pipes,ducts,and conduits. REFERENCE STANDARDS B.40 CFR 59,Subpart D -National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings;U.S.Environmental Protection Agency current edition. C.ASTM D16 -Standard Terminology for Paint,Related Coatings,Materials,and Applications 2019. D.ASTM D4442 -Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood- Based Materials 2020. E.GreenSeal GS-11 -Standard for Paints,Coatings,Stains,and Sealers 2021. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used,with the following information for each: Manufacturer's name,product name and/or catalog number,and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Painting and Coating Job Number 2210142.00 09 90 00 - 2/6 MPI product number (e.g.MPI #47). Cross-reference to specified paint system(s)product is to be used in;include description of each system. Samples: Submit threepaper "draw down"samples,8-1/2 by 11 inchesin size,illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. Where sheen is specified,submit samples in only that sheen. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. Maintenance Data: Submit dataincluding care and cleaning instructions,touch-up procedures,and repair of painted and coated surfaces. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,with minimum threeyears documentedexperience. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers;inspect to verify acceptability. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint,brand name,lot number,brand code, coverage,surface preparation,drying time,cleanup requirements,color designation,and instructions for mixing and reducing. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees Fand a maximum of 90 degrees F,in ventilated area,and as required by manufacturer's instructions. FIELD CONDITIONS Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results,including testing of substrates,moisture in substrates,and humidity and temperature limitations. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees Ffor interiors;50 degrees Ffor exterior;unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candlesmeasured mid-height at substrate surface. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Painting and Coating 09 90 00 - 3/6 PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;no exceptions. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products,minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architectis obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. Paints: Benjamin Moore &Co: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Product Requirements.. PAINTS AND COATINGS -GENERAL Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed,unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency,capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating,with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. Do not reduce,thin,or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate,use primer categorized as "best"by the manufacturer. Gypsum Board: Interior Institutional Low Odor/VOC Primer Sealer;MPI #149. Wood: Latex Primer for Interior Wood;MPI #39. Steel,Uncoated: Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal;MPI #79. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Painting and Coating Job Number 2210142.00 09 90 00 - 4/6 Steel --Shop Primer: Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal;MPI #76. Products: Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content: Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: 40 CFR 59,Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. Architectural coatings VOC limits of Washington. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24),exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). Acrolein,acrylonitrile,antimony,benzene,butyl benzyl phthalate,cadmium,di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate,di-n-butyl phthalate,di-n-octyl phthalate,1,2-dichlorobenzene,diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate,ethylbenzene,formaldehyde,hexavalent chromium,isophorone,lead, mercury,methyl ethyl ketone,methyl isobutyl ketone,methylene chloride,naphthalene,toluene (methylbenzene),1,1,1-trichloroethane,vinyl chloride. Colors: As indicated on drawings PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR TypicalAll Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted,Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board and wood. Two top coatsand one coat primer. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex;MPI #143-148. Top Coat Product(s): Sherwin-Williams Harmony Interior Acrylic Latex.(MPI #44,53,54,143,144) Substitution:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. Door FramesMedium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants,including metals: Medium duty applications include door frames. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Painting and Coating 09 90 00 - 5/6 Two top coatsand one coat primer. Top Coat Product(s): Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating.(MPI #153,154) Substitution:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. ACCESSORY MATERIALS Accessory Materials: Provide all primers,sealers,cleaning agents,cleaning cloths,sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. Patching Material: Latexfiller. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latexfiller. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architectof unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: Gypsum Wallboard: 12percent. Interior Wood: 15percent,measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Remove or masksurface appurtenances,including electrical plates,hardware,light fixture trim, escutcheons,and fittings,prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Painting and Coating Job Number 2210142.00 09 90 00 - 6/6 Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphateand bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. APPLICATION Remove unfinished louvers,grilles,covers,and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Sand wood and metalsurfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. Reinstall electrical cover plates,hardware,light fixture trim,escutcheons,and fittings removed prior to finishing. CLEANING Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard,place in closed metal containers,and remove daily from site. PROTECTION Protect finished coatings until completion of project. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. SCHEDULE -PAINT SYSTEMS As indicated on drawings.. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Wall and Corner Guards 10 26 01 - 1/2 SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Corner guards. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards -2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010. B.ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017. C.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2022. D.ASTM E119 -Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2022. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions,features,anchorage details,and rough-in measurements. Samples: Submit twosections of corner guard,6"inchlong,illustrating component design, configuration,color and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Wall and Corner Guards: Construction Specialties,Inc;CO-8 |CO-8M: www.c-sgroup.com. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. COMPONENTS Corner Guards -Surface Mounted: Material: Type 304stainless steel,No.4finish,16 gage,.051 inchthick. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 10 or lessand smoke developed index of 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Height:4 feet Width of Wings: 2 inches. Corner: Square. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Wall and Corner Guards Job Number 2210142.00 10 26 01 - 2/2 Field verify corner angles at conditions not equal to 90 degrees for CO-8M Corner Guards. Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings. Length: One piece. FABRICATION Fabricate components with tight joints,corners and seams. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that rough openings,concealed blocking,and anchors are correctly sized and located. INSTALLATION Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,level and plumb,secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. TOLERANCES Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Residential Appliances 11 30 13 - 1/2 SECTION 11 30 13 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Kitchen appliances. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. Section 26 05 83 -Wiring Connections: Electrical connections for appliances. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.UL (DIR)-Online Certifications Directory Current Edition. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions,capacity,and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS KITCHEN APPLIANCES Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. Dishwasher,Type ADA: Undercounter. Controls: Solid state electronic. Wash Levels: Three (3). Cycles: Six (6),including normal,rinse and hold,short,china/crystal,and pot and pan. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser,optional no-heat dry,optional water temperature boost, adjustable upper rack,and adjustable lower rack. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel ,color as indicated. Manufacturers: Bosch:www.bosch-home.com/#sle.. Product:800 Series (SGX78BFFUC) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Residential Appliances Job Number 2210142.00 11 30 13 - 2/2 Substitution:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located. INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CLEANING Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Window Shades -MechoShade Systems 12 24 00 - 1/6 SECTION 12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES -MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Manual roller shades and accessories. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NFPA 701 -Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films 2019. B.UL (GGG)-GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products Current Edition. C.WCMA A100.1 -Safety of Window Covering Products 2018. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Sequencing: Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with finished conditions in place. "Hold to"dimensions are not acceptable. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product to be used including materials,finishes,fabrication details,dimensions,profiles,mounting requirements,and accessories. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size,location and keys to details. Source Quality Control Submittals: Provide test reports indicating compliance with specified fabric properties. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers,and operation and maintenance instructions;include copy of shop drawings. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Window Shades -MechoShade Systems Job Number 2210142.00 12 24 00 - 2/6 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum ten years of documented experience with shading systems of similar size,type,and complexity;manufacturer's authorized representative. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging,labeled to identify each shade for each opening. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. FIELD CONDITIONS Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; www.mechoshade.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures ROLLER SHADES General: Provide shade system components that are designed to remove or adjust without removal of mounted shade brackets. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered. Roller ShadesMechoShade Systems LLC;Mecho/5 System;www.mechoshade.com/#sle. Description: Single roller,manually operated fabric window shades. Size: As indicated on drawings at existing doors with lites,sidelites,and exterior windows. Existing conditions to be field verified.. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated and to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight. Material: Steel,1/8 inch thick. Roller Tubes: Material: Extruded aluminum. Size: As recommended by manufacturer;selected for suitability for installation conditions, span,and weight of shades. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric edge. Shade band to be removable and replaceable without removing roller tube from 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Window Shades -MechoShade Systems 12 24 00 - 3/6 brackets or inserting spline from the side of the roller tube. Roller tubes to be capable of being removed and reinstalled without affecting roller shade limit adjustments. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat. Style: Full wrap fabric covered bottom bar,flat profile with heat sealed closed ends. Clutch Operator: Manufacturer's standard material and design integrated with bracket/brake assembly. Provide a permanently lubricated brake assembly mounted on a oil-impregnated hub with wrapped spring clutch. Brake must withstand minimum pull force of 50 pounds in the stopped position. Mount clutch/brake assembly on the support brackets,fully independent of the roller tube components. Drive Chain: Continuous loop stainless steel beaded ball chain,95 pound minimum breaking strength. Provide upper and lower limit stops. Chain Retainer: Chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1. Accessories: Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia,size as required to conceal shade mounting, attachable to brackets without exposed fasteners;As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.. Fascia to be capable of installation across two or more shade bands in one piece. Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings. Profile: Square. SHADE FABRIC Fabric-Type 1: Non-flammable,color-fast,impervious to heat and moisture,and able to retain its shape under normal operation. Material Certificates and Product Disclosures: Low-Emitting Material Certification: Greenguard Gold certified and listed in UL (GGG). Performance Requirements: Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large or small scale test. Products: 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Window Shades -MechoShade Systems Job Number 2210142.00 12 24 00 - 4/6 MechoShade Systems LLC Inc;Soho -1900 Series (5%open): www.mechoshade.com/#sle. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/4 inchspace between bottom bar and window stool. Horizontal Dimensions -Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb. Horizontal Dimensions -Outside Mounting: Cover window frames,trim,and casings completely. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers,locate roller joints at window mullion centers;butt rollers end-to-end. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates. PREPARATION Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project conditions. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades. INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings,using mounting devices as indicated. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner. Adjust level,projection,and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation. CLEANING Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Window Shades -MechoShade Systems 12 24 00 - 5/6 Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new"condition. PROTECTION Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Countertops 12 36 00 - 1/4 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Countertops for manufactured casework. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards,2nd Edition 2014,with Errata (2016). B.ISFA 3-01 -Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material 2013. C.MIA (DSDM)-Dimensional Stone Design Manual,Version VIII 2016. SUBMITTALS See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,including: Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Specimen warranty. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ;combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified,color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing,showing compliance with specified requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent-based materials,in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Countertops Job Number 2210142.00 12 36 00 - 2/4 FIELD CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions (temperature,humidity,and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS COUNTERTOPS Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin over continuous substrate. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch,minimum. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets,Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA 3-01 and NEMA LD 3;orthophthalic polyester resin,mineral filler,and pigments;homogenous,non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools;no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. Manufacturers: Pental Quartz;www.pentalquartz.com. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inchthick;square edge. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer's standard requirements. MATERIALS Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade,A-C veneer grade,minimum 5-ply;minimum 3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. FABRICATION Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable,with top surface of joints flush. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 Countertops 12 36 00 - 3/4 Prepare all cutouts accurately to size;replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. Height: 4 inches,unless otherwise indicated. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate topsup to 144 incheslong in one piece;join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INSTALLATION Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. TOLERANCES Variation From Horizontal:1/8 inch in 10 feet,maximum. Offset From Wall,Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum;1/16 inch minimum. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide,maximum. CLEANING Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall -HR Tenant Improvement - Permit |Bid Set 05 December 2022 Countertops Job Number 2210142.00 12 36 00 - 4/4 PROTECTION Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 1/15 SECTION 20 00 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A.Includes, but not limited to, furnishing labor, materials, and equipment for completion of work unless indicated or noted otherwise. See Division 1 for sequence of work. B.Work indicated on the mechanical plans and in the specifications that will not be performed by this Mechanical Contractor (i.e. duct and pipe block-outs, penetrations through walls, floors, and attic, wall patching, work indicated to be performed by other Contractors, etc) shall be coordinated with the General Contractor prior to bid. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for identifying quantity, size, and type of work with the General Contractor. Work not coordinated will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and shall not be charged as additional cost to the Owner. C.This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities governing the installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact all utility organizations serving the building, prior to bid, and to include all charges for inspections, installation of materials, equipment and connection of all required utilities. D.Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to Division 26, prior to bid. E.Putting heating, ventilating, cooling, and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their operation during each working day of testing and balancing. F.Making changes in mechanical drive systems (pulleys, belts, VFD’s, motor speed, etc) and dampers or adding dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Section 23 05 93 and at no additional cost to Owner. All equipment shall be provided with a single point electrical connection, unless otherwise indicated. G.The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. H.The ductwork and accessibility to HVAC equipment shall take precedence over all other equipment in the ceiling interstitial spaces or other mechanical areas including, but not limited to, sprinkler piping, heating piping, domestic water piping and electrical conduit (except fire pump rooms where as fire sprinkler equipment takes precedence). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A.General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A.Access doors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes. 2.In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. B.Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 2/15 C.Warranties: 1.In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions, guarantee heating, cooling, and plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 2.In order to be protected, secure proper guarantees from suppliers and Subcontractors. 3.Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment. Clearly record "start-up" date of each piece of equipment on certificate. Include certificates as part of Operation & Maintenance Manual. D.Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project. E.Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation. 1.Washington State Energy Code -- Latest Approved Edition 2.International Building Code -- Latest Approved Edition 3.International Fire Code - Latest Approved Edition 4.International Mechanical Code -- Latest Approved Edition 5.Uniform Plumbing Code -- Latest Approved Edition 6.Local Sewer and Water District Requirements 7.State and County Department of Health 8.Local Fire Marshal 10.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 11.Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) 12.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.06 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A.Site Inspection: 1.Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. 2.No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. 1.07 DESIGN DRAWINGS A.Mechanical drawings are not shop drawings and are intended to show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. B.Consider architectural, structural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. Architectural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 3/15 C.Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the bid a sufficient quantity of offsets, fittings, and accessories for the size of the project, based upon the contractor’s experience, necessary to facilitate mechanical utility installation. No additional costs shall be charged for additional offsets, fittings, and accessories required for installation of the mechanical utilities shown on the design drawings. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required in meeting the design conditions. 1.08 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETING A.This Contractor is responsible to participate in coordination meetings with the General Contractor, Fire Protection Contractor and other subcontractors needing to coordinate special requirements (such as electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, plumbing contractor, etc.) B.Coordination meetings shall consider elevations, required clearances, and routings of all trades to assure that all trades can be installed without conflict. C.The outcome of this coordination shall allow each system (Mechanical, Fire Protection, Plumbing, Electrical, etc) to be installed without further conflicts for space or locations. D.Failure to coordinate with other trades and/or existing conditions that result in the removal and re- installation of systems shall not be charged as additional costs. 1.09 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.Develop coordination drawings, and other pre-installation coordination methods as necessary to coordinate layouts prior to installation. Coordination drawings shall consist of overlay drawings, or other similar methods to graphically indicate plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, electrical, and other similar elements in a single location in order to identify conflicts. All elements shall be drawn to scale. Coordination drawings are not required to be submitted for approval, except where indicated otherwise in the specification. However, a minimum of one hard copy of coordination drawings shall be present on site at all times and made available to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) Representative upon request. If coordination drawings are not on file, or if systems are not installed per coordination drawings, costs and delays of required reengineering, replacement and other work required to correct conflicts shall be solely the Contractor’s. 1.Contractor shall have the underground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E Representative within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. 2.Contractor shall have the aboveground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E Representative within 90 days after Notice to Proceed. B.Coordination drawings shall consist of one of the following: 1.Drawing sheets developed sequentially by each trade with all components drawn to scale and color coded to represent each trade. C.Where coordination drawings, or other preinstallation coordination methods show that available space is inadequate or that modifications will affect architectural elements, request information from the Architect before proceeding with work. No additional payment will be made for installation conflicts which could have been identified by coordination drawings or other pre-installation coordination methods. D.Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 4/15 E.Each subcontractor shall: 1.Indicate the exact name, location and dimension of each element to be provided by that subcontractor. 2.Arrange components as necessary to avoid conflict with new and existing conditions and the work of other subcontractors as directed by the General Contractor. 3.Note requirements for sleeves, block-outs, cutting, patching, access doors, blocking, supports, inserts and other similar items. 4.Notify the General Contractor of conflicts. 5.Approve the coordination drawings when all conflicts are resolved and an acceptable layout is obtained. F.The General Contractor shall coordinate the layouts indicated on the coordination drawings and resolve any conflicts prior to commencement of subject portions of the work. 1.10 ELECTRICAL A.All electrical work, conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring as required to install the control equipment as specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed complete by the Division 26 Contractor. B.All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable portions of the Division 26 specifications and shall conform to all governing codes. C.All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection to electrical service. D.Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor, the motor shall be furnished and mounted by this Contractor. Motor starter, disconnect switches and wiring from the electrical panel to the motor control devices and to the motor shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor unless stated otherwise in the mechanical specification and/or on the mechanical drawings. E.All motor controllers and equipment panels (including but not limited to packaged equipment, custom control panels, custom air handler panels) shall comply with NEC (including, but not limited to, marking on controllers and labeling requirements). 1.11 TEMPORARY HEATING A.Temporary heating for facility during construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent system installed under these specifications, unless all of the following are satisfied: 1.Product warranties shall be extended to account for construction use. Contractor shall furnish certified document stating such extended warranties. 2.Contractor shall obtain letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand equipment expected life may be shortened due to severe usage. 3.Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils and vacuum cleaning all ductwork prior to occupancy. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A.Contractor is responsible for protection of all material, equipment and apparatus provided under this Section from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and when installed, until final project acceptance. B.Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment. C.Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during construction. D.Handle and protect equipment and/or material in manner precluding unnecessary fire hazard. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 5/15 E.Equipment requiring rotation and/or lubrication during storage shall have records maintained and witnessed on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Architect/Engineer prior to acceptance. Provide recorded maintenance for the O&M Manual. F.Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected. G.Equipment finish that is damaged by handling, storage, etc. shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 DEFINITIONS A.Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered, paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance. B.Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas, such as fan rooms, mechanical and boiler rooms, etc., where appearance is not a factor. C.Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between double walls; furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces. D.Exposed: Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other construction. E.Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and unexcavated or crawl spaces. F.Conditioned Space: An area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for human habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building envelope insulation. G.Replace: Existing mechanical equipment and components shall be demolished and discarded from the project site or as directed otherwise. New mechanical equipment and components shall be installed in the area where the existing mechanical equipment and components were demolished or as indicated on the contract documents. H.Removed: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents shall be taken apart, taken down, and discarded from the project site unless directed otherwise on plan. Removed items shall not be brought back to the project site for use or reinstallation. I.Reinstall: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents that need to be taken down and installed in the same or new location. 1.14 ABBREVIATIONS ADA Americans with Disabilities Act A/E Architect/Engineer AFF Above Finish Floor AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APWA American Public Works Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing & Materials AWWA American Water Works Association BFF Below Finish Floor BHP Brake Horsepower BTU British Thermal Unit 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 6/15 CFM Cubic Feet per Minute CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute fpm feet per minute FS Federal Specifications FDC Fire Department Connection FCO Flush Cleanout FD Floor Drain PWH Freeze Proof Wall Hydrant GPM Gallons per Minute HP Horsepower IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials IAQ Indoor Air Quality IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers KW Kilowatt LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas MBH One Thousand British Thermal Units per Hour MS Military Specifications MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NP Non-Potable Water NPSH Net Positive Suction Head OS&Y Outside Screw and Yoke PIV Post Indicator Valve PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute per in accordance with POC Point of Connection PSI Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure PVC Polyvinyl Chloride SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SP Static Pressure SWP Steam Working Pressure UL Underwriter's Laboratories VFD Variable Frequency Drive VTR Vent Thru Roof wg Water Gauge (inches of water) WP Working Pressure WPL Weatherproof Louver WQA Water Quality Association Additional abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 7/15 1.15 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.General: Provide schedule of values per Division 1 and related project requirements: 1.Division 22 and 23 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values, broken down into labor and materials per specification section at a minimum. Further breakdown into subcategories is at the option of the Contractor, except as noted below: a.Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for “Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout and Owner Training”. The dollar value for this subcategory shall be no less than 2.25% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher. The contractor shall receive payment upon completion of all Mechanical Punchlist and Closeout items and Owner Training. b.Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning HVAC System: The dollar value for “Commissioning” shall in no case be less than 0.75% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). The contractor shall receive payment upon completion of all outstanding commissioning items as identified by the commissioning agent, Engineer, and/or Owner. B.The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final completion (i.e. “Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training”), as specified above and in Division 1, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely tested, adjusted, and balanced. 1.16 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and/or Engineer reserve the right to reject any material, the appearance of which has been damaged on the site or in shipment. The material shall be of pre-approved equal quality to that which is specified. Should the make and type of material differ from that specified, the Contractor may be required to submit catalog and engineering data (samples if requested) necessary to make a comparison and determine its suitability. The Contractor shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect of the project (electrical, mechanical, building, etc.) made necessary by any approved substitutions. Approved substitutions include those listed as approved manufacturers or approved substitutions. Tentative approval of substitute material and equipment will be made prior to bid only. Such request for approval shall be made two weeks in advance of the bid opening to allow time to assess its suitability. Failure to obtain approval prior to bid shall require the successful bidder to furnish materials and equipment only as specified herein (see paragraph 2.01, this specification). B.Equipment submittals shall be submitted per one of the following processes as selected by the Architect/Engineer Representative and/or Owner: 1.Electronic Submittal Process: a.The Contractor shall upload one complete PDF file of the Electronic Submittal Package to the Architect’s SharePoint Site for approval. The Electronic Submittal package shall include the following: 1)All required submittals (i.e. equipment cut sheets, shop drawings, etc.) per each specification section. 2)Table of contents identifying each specification section, submittal requirement of each specification, and the manufacturer name and model number of each item submitted. 3)Index sheet for each specification section. 4)Submission of PDF files of individual specifications or equipment cuts will be automatically rejected. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 8/15 5)The Contractor shall complete and upload a Submittal Information Form, in Microsoft WORD format, for the A/E team to review. The equipment submittal will not be considered “Received” nor will a review be provided until both the Electronic Submittal Package and Submittal information Form have been uploaded. 6)If the Electronic Submittal Process is not feasible for a particular submittal section (i.e. samples, certain shop drawings, recorded videos, CD’s, etc.), the Contractor shall submit a request in writing to the A/E Representative to deviate from the Electronic Submittal Process. If acceptable by the A/E Representative the Contractor shall follow the Hard Copy Submittal Process for the submission. 2.Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for quantities, measurements, and compliance with the intent of all contract documents. 3.Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual sections may contain more specific submittal listing of the particular section labeled “Submittal Requirements.” Furnish on each particular section and the following equipment: a.Pipe b.Pipe Insulation c.Duct Insulation and Lining d.Hot Water Tanks e.Plumbing Fixtures f.Valves g.Pipe Hangers h.Piping Specialties i.HVAC Equipment j.Temperature Control Equipment and Shop Drawings k.Air Balance Contractor l.Fire Marshal Stamped and Approved Shop Drawings for Fire Sprinkler System m.Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed and replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost. n.Mechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™ Revision 2015 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for development of shop drawings and/or "As-Builts" for a fee of $30.00 per sheet. Full payment to be made prior to release of drawing files. 1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A.Bind Operation & Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in three-ring, hard-backed binder with clear plastic pocket on spine. Spine of each binder shall have following typewritten lettering inserted: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B.Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic permanent tab indexes for Sections of Manual. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 9/15 C.First Section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Architect, General Contractor, and Mechanical, Plumbing, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, Temperature control, and Electrical Subcontractors. Also include complete list of equipment installed with name, address, and phone number of each vendor. D.Provide Section for each type of item of equipment. E.Submit copies as specified by Division 1 and at a minimum provide three (3) copies of Operation & Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approval. F.Include descriptive literature (Manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. G.Include all warranties/guarantees including extended warranties. H.Include all start-up logs. I.Operating Instructions shall include: 1.General description of each mechanical system 2.Step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation 3.Provide schematic control diagrams for all systems. Each diagram shall show locations of start-stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats, thermometers, firestats, pressure gauges, automatic valves, refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating settings for each control instrument on these diagrams. 4.Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. 5.Provide drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components on panels and their function. J.Maintenance Instructions shall include: 1.Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions. 2.Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication. 3.List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. 4.For hydronic systems, include gallons in system, amounts and types of each chemical, etc. Also, include step-by-step procedure to recharge the system. 1.18 COMMISSIONING A.General Requirements: The building’s systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment, and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with the approved plans and specifications. This shall include the following: 1.Commissioning Plan 2.Systems Testing and Balancing 3.Controls Functional Performance Testing 4.Preliminary Commissioning Report 5.Post Construction Documentation 6.Final Commissioning Report 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 10/15 B.Commissioning Plan: A commissioning plan shall be developed by a registered design professional or approved agency and shall include at a minimum the following: 1.A detailed explanation of the design intent 2.Equipment and systems to be tested 3.Functions to be tested (for example, economizer control, discharge air temperature control, etc.) 4.Conditions under which the test shall be performed 5.Measureable criteria for acceptable performance C.System Testing and Balancing: Provide testing and balancing as specified in Sections 23 05 93. D.Controls Functional Performance Testing: Functional testing shall demonstrate the correct installation and operation of each component, system, and system to system intertie relationship in accordance with the plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove operation, function, and maintenance serviceability for each of the commissioned systems. Testing shall include all modes of operation, including: 1.All modes as described in the sequence of operation 2.Performance of alarms 3.Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power 4.The HVAC control system shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment, and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. E.Preliminary Commissioning Report: The preliminary commissioning report, completed and certified by the registered design professional or approved agency, shall be provided to the Owner. The preliminary commissioning report shall include test procedures and results, and shall identify the following: 1.Deficiencies found during testing which have not been corrected at the time of report preparation and the anticipated date of correction. 2.Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic conditions. Include the climatic conditions required for testing and the anticipated date of each deferred test. 3.Record of progress and completion of operator training. F.Post Construction Documentation: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) data, as-built record drawings, final commissioning report and test and balance report, as specified in this section, within 90 days of the date of receipt of the Certificate of Occupancy. G.Final Commissioning Report: Provide a complete report of test procedures and results and submitted to the Engineer and the Owner. The report shall identify the following: 1.Procedures and results of all functional performance tests 2.Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective measures used or proposed H.The Contractor is responsible to submit to the code official a commissioning compliance checklist, per section C408 of the WSEC, signed by the building owner. 1.19 WARRANTY A.All warranty information shall be submitted as part of the “Operation and Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems” in this section. B.All warranties for mechanical and plumbing equipment shall start upon completion of commissioning. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 11/15 1.20 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A.The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to coordination drawings, an as-built set of prints that clearly identify all deviations from the original design. The As-Built drawings shall be drafted per one of the following methods: 1.Draft all revisions on a separate dark layer, on the coordination drawing set. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of the original coordination drawing set. 2.Draft all revisions on the design drawings with a red color pencil. B.This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders, and Contractor revisions. C.Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe and duct installed by this Contractor. Underground pipes and ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included. D.The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, air handlers, heat pumps etc. 1.Upon completion of the Division 22 and 23 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in ACAD 2015 format and PDF files to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A.Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. B.The manufacturer listed as Approved Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the items indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require prior approval. C.The listing of a manufacturer as an Approved Manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of those manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the past manufactured, items equal to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying manufacturers. D.Products provided by Approved Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the specified manufacturer's item in function, appearance, and quality, and shall fulfill all requirements of the plans and specifications. The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge as to whether an item meets these requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not certain that his product meets these requirements or not, then the manufacturer shall submit data as required to obtain the Design Consultant's approval prior to bid opening. E.The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and specifications. F.Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required in accommodating any products which are different from those specified or shown. G.In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following: engineering data showing item's performance, proper local representation of manufacturer, likelihood of future manufacturer's local support of product, service availability, previous installation, previous use by Owner/Engineer/Architect and record, product quality, availability/quality of maintenance and operation data, capacity/performance compared to specified items, acoustics, items geometry/access utility needs, and similar concerns. H.If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 12/15 I.If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Division assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS A.This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing flush mounted access doors in walls, ceiling and floors and chases where the following equipment is concealed and is not accessible through same. 1.Valves (shut off, balancing, control, trap primers, etc) 2.Dampers (control, balancing, fire, smoke, etc.) B.Doors shall be UL listed 20 ga. cold rolled steel with concealed hinge, screwdriver operated lock and prime coated. Furnish suitable for area mounted. Provide stainless steel access doors for non-painted surfaces (i.e. tile, MDF) C.Approved Manufacturers: 1.Milcor 2.Acudor 3.Greenheck 4.Nystrom PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A.This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike manner or is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall or replace same and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, without increase in cost to the Owner. 3.02 FINAL INSPECTION A.Final Inspection: 1.Prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, the Contractor shall put all mechanical systems into operation for a period of not less than 5 working days so that they may be inspected by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's representatives. 2.The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. 3.The Contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during inspection. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A.Upon completion of the work, and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s) having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various mechanical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be Superintendents or Foremen knowledgeable in each system and Supplier's Representative when so specified. B.Scheduled instruction periods shall be: 1.HVAC System Controls 1 Hour 2.HVAC Equipment Maintenance 1 Hour 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 13/15 C.The contractor shall, at a minimum, include an Owner Training sign-in sheet in the O&M Manual that indicates the start and end times of the training and the type of training provided. Owner shall sign off on the Owner training sign-in sheet to be considered complete and satisfactory to Owner. D.Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid. 3.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Requirements: Final approval of mechanical installation will be recommended upon completion of the following: 1.Completion of all punchlist items 2.Owner Training Sign-In sheet with Owner's signature 3.Permit Submittal 4.Valve Diagrams 5.Reproducible As-Built drawings delivered to Architect 6.Air Balance Report 7.Asbestos Free Statement 8.Guarantees 9.Equipment Manufacturer of all HVAC compressor units shall provide start-up logs. 10.EMCS Trend Logs 3.05 PREPARATION A.Existing Buildings: 1.Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. 2.Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes by General Contractor. 3.Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. 4.This work shall be scheduled such that utility services and/or existing systems for the facility are not interrupted during normal operating hours, without prior written permission of the Owner's representative. Work that is performed during normal operational hours shall not interfere with the normal function of the facility's daily operation. 5.The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical equipment and utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and reinstallation of all existing mechanical equipment and utilities that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or required and shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical equipment and utilities indicated to be abandoned that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or required. All mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be transported - stored - or disposed of, as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner. 3.06 INSTALLATION A.Install mechanical equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance, and so that parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance, (e.g., coils, heat exchanger bundles, sheaves, filters, motors, bearings, etc.) can be removed. Relocate items, which interfere with access. B.Provide access doors in equipment, ducts, and walls/ceilings as required to allow for inspection and proper maintenance. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00 20 00 00 - 14/15 C.Valves, damper operators, and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be located so as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. Any such items which are not in the open shall be made accessible through access openings in the building construction. D.Gauges, thermometers, instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor equipment performance, operating conditions, etc., shall be oriented so as to be easily read by a person standing on the floor. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed. E.If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect/Engineer before installing the item in a poor access location. F.Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a danger to personnel, shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations. G.Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not specified in another way, use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering inserts. H.Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space clear above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3.5 feet directly in front of panel, except where indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. Such offsets are typically not shown on the drawings, but are required per this paragraph. I.Piping Through Framing: Piping through framing shall be installed in the approximate center of the member. Where located such that nails or screws are likely to damage the pipe, a steel plate at least 1/16-inch thick shall be installed to provide protection. At metal framing, wrap piping to prevent contact of dissimilar metals. At metal and wood framing, provide plastic pipe insulators at piping penetrations through framing nearest each fixture and on at least 48-inch centers. J.Safety Protection: All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this Contractor that present a safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into maintenance access paths, etc.) shall be covered (at hazardous area) with 3/4" thick elastomeric insulation and 2" wide reflective red/white striped self-sticking safety tape. K.Equipment Access: Access to equipment is of utmost importance. Contractor shall apply extra attention to the laying out of pipe and duct routings, and in coordinating all work. Poor access to equipment will not be accepted. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas, piping routed in ceiling space needs to run in joist space, necessitating elbows/fittings/transitions at crosses with other trades, at structural beams, and at all connections to mains and branches. Hatched areas at HVAC units indicate equipment access areas. These (and all other) access areas shall be clear of obstructions. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible to coordinate and ensure that all trades stay clear of access areas for any Division 22 and 23 furnished equipment. L.Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. M.Pipe Installation: Install piping in longest reasonable lengths. The use of short lengths of pipe with multiple couplings where a single length of pipe could have been used is not acceptable. 3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A.Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance. B.Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures, remove debris from site. Repair all damaged finishes and leave everything in working order. C.Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 00 00 - 15/15 3.08 PAINTING A.Paint all exposed pieces of equipment if not factory finished or painted under the Architectural Section of these specifications. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats enamel color as directed by the Architect. 3.09 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A.It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 22 and 23 Work. To further expedite this process, if a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. RFI’s will be returned to the Contractor within seven (7) business days from the time received by the Architect/Engineer Representative. All Mechanical RFIs shall be written on the form provided at the back of this Section. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - 1/3 SECTION 22 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe sleeves B. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2016 B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a (Reapproved 2017) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Seals 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE SLEEVES A. Vertical Piping: 1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch (25 mm) above finished floor. 2. Provide sealant for watertight joint. 3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle set in silicon adhesive around opening. 4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. B. Sheet Metal: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions, and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are specified below. C. Pipe Passing Through Below Grade Exterior Walls: 1. Zinc coated or cast iron pipe. 2. Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and pipe on both pipe ends. D. Pipe Passing Through Concrete Beam Flanges, except where Brass Pipe Sleeves are Specified: 1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating. 2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms. E. Pipe Passing Through Mechanical, Laundry, and kitchen above Basement: 1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Job Number 2210142.00 22 05 17 - 2/3 2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms. F. Penetrations in concrete beam flanges are permitted but are prohibited through ribs or beams without prior approval from the Architect. G. Clearances: 1. Provide allowance for insulated piping. 2. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 0.5 inch (13 mm) greater than external; pipe diameter. 3. All Rated Openings: Caulked tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. 2.02 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexicraft Industries; PipeSeal 2. Thunderline; Link-Seal B. Modular/Mechanical Seal: 1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing opening. 2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening. 3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Install piping and pipe sleeves to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. D. Structural Considerations: 1. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. E. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, partitions, and similar elements. Seal pipe including sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 1. Underground Piping: Caulk pipe sleeve watertight with mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal components. 2. Aboveground Piping: a. Pack solid using mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C592. b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch (15 mm) where penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces. 3. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - 3/3 4. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components. F. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems: 1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete walls at piping entrances into building. 2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve inner diameter or penetration diameter. 3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration. 4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and piping. 5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal. 6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. H. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for use with insulated pipes. I. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 1/5 SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Applications B. General requirements C. Angle valves D. Ball valves E. Butterfly valves F. Check valves G. Gate valves H. Globe valves I. Plug valves J. Thermostatic balancing valves K. Balancing valves 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements B. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment C. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment D. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation E. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber D. NRS: Non-rising stem E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke F. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene G. RS: Rising stem H. SWP: Steam working pressure I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARD A.ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013 B.ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2015 C.ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2017 D.ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves; 2017 E.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012 F.ASME B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End; 2017 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 2/5 Job Number 2210142.00 G.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014 H.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators; 2017 I.ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2016) J.ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2014) K.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014) L.ASTM B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings; 2015 M.ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017 N.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015 O.MSS SP-45 - Bypass and Drain Connections; 2003 (Reaffirmed 2008) P.MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2017 Q.MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011 R.MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011, with Errata (2013) S.MSS SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service; 2010a T.MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011 U.MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013 V.MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011 W.MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010 X.MSS SP-125 - Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-Line, Spring-Loaded, Center-Guided Check Valves; 2010 Y.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017 Z.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish Owner with one wrench for every ten plug valves, in each size of square plug valve head. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer. 2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX. C. Domestic water fittings, joining materials, and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water shall be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act. 1. Lead-free shall mean: a. Not containing more than 0.2% lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and b. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25% when used with respect to the wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 3/5 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position. 2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion. 3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange faces. 4. Adjust globe, gate, and angle valves to the closed position to avoid clattering. 5. Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position. 6. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt. a. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. b. Maintain caps in place until installation. 2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. a. Store valves indoors in dry environment. b. Store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures when indoor storage is not an option. C. Exercise the following precautions for handling: 1. Handle large valves with sling, modified to avoid damage to exposed parts. 2. Avoid the use of operating handles or stems as rigging or lifting points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. See drawings for specific valve locations. B. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on drawings: 1. Shutoff: Ball C. Substitutions of valves with higher CWP classes or SWP ratings for same valve types are permitted when specified CWP ratings or SWP classes are not available. D. Domestic, Hot and Cold Water Valves: 1. 2 NPS (50 DN) and Smaller: a. Ball: One piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for system pressures and temperatures. B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. C. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types 2. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS (150 DN) and smaller 3. Wrench: Plug valves with square heads 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 4/5 Job Number 2210142.00 D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 NPS (50 DN) stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. E. Valve-End Connections: 1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1 2. Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves 3. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 NPS (15 DN) through 24 NPS (600 DN): ASME B16.5 4. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18 5. Grooved End Connections: AWWA C606 F. General ASME Compliance: 1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 2. Solder-joint Connections: ASME B16.18 3. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9 G. Valve Materials for Potable Water: NSF 61 and NSF 372 H. Bronze Valves: 1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material 2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45 J. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer 2.03 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. One Piece, Reduced Port with Bronze Trim: 1. Comply with MSS SP-110 2. SWP Rating: 400 psig 3. CWP Rating: 600 psig 4. Body: Bronze 5. Ends: Press 6. Seats: PTFE B. Two Piece, Full Port with Stainless Steel Trim: 1. Comply with MSS SP-110 2. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) 3. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa) 4. Body: Bronze 5. Ends: Threaded 6. Seats: PTFE or TFE 7. Stem: Stainless steel 8. Ball: Stainless steel, vented 9. Manufacturers: a. Nibco b. Stockham 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 5/5 c. Apollo d. Jomar PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads and flanges are completely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage. B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open. C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and without defects that could compromise effectiveness. D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing. B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of piping, maintaining unimpeded stem movement. C. Install check valves where necessary to maintain direction of flow as follows: 1. Lift Check: Install with stem plumb and vertical. 2. Swing Check: Install horizontal maintaining hinge pin level. 3. Orient plate-type and center-guided into horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 1/9 SECTION 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the International Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings. B.Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A.Equipment support bases B.Vibration isolators C.Seismic snubber assemblies D.Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; 2016 B.ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2018 C.SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; 2008 D.Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria E.Applicable Manufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for Proprietary listed seismic braces and mounting hardware 1.05 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA A.Occupancy Category of Structure (I-IV) per ICC (IBC) or ASCE 7 B.Component Importance Factor (Ip) per ASCE 7 C.Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S1 and (Ss) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings D.Site Class (A - F) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings E.Site Coefficient (Fa) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings F.Site Coefficient (Fv) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings G.Seismic Design Category (A - D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings H.Seismic Design Category (A - D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings I.Amplification Factor ap per ASCE 7 J.Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 7 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 2/9 Job Number 2210142.00 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: 1.Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS. 2.Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases, member sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment. 2.Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete weights, equipment static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolator location and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator. 3.Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. 4.Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations. 5.Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. 6.Include the seal of the Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington in which the Project is located, on drawings and calculations which at a minimum include the following: a.Seismic Restraint Details: Detailed drawings of seismic restraints and snubbers including anchorage details that indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration, edge distance, and spacing of anchors. b.Equipment Seismic Qualification Certification: Certification by the manufacturer or responsible party that each piece of equipment provided will withstand seismic force levels as specified in the applicable building code for seismic controls. 1)Basis for Certification: Indicate whether the withstand certification is based on actual testing of assembled components, on calculations, or on historic data. 2)Indicate equipment to be sufficiently durable to resist design forces and or remain functional after the seismic event. c.Dimensioned outline drawings of equipment identifying center of gravity, locations, and provisions for mounting and anchorage. d.Detailed description of the equipment anchorage devices on which the certifications are based. e.Statement of Special Inspections: Prepared by the registered design professional in responsible charge. C.Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of components/systems requiring periodic special inspections per ICC (IBC). D.Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a “Designated Seismic System” for active plumbing equipment that must remain operable following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be submitted to the AHJ. E.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 3/9 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes. B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design of seismic controls under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Kinetics Noise Control, Inc B.Mason Industries C.Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: 1.All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads. 2.Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection. 3.All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating clearance of 2 inches (50 mm) between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise. 2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES A.Structural Bases: 1.Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting of the isolators 2.Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped 3.Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers. B.Concrete Inertia Bases: 1.Construction: Engineered, steel forms, with integrated isolator brackets and anchor bolts, welded or tied reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer 2.Size: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum depth and sized to accommodate elbow supports 3.Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment 4.Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base including template and fastening devices for equipment 5.Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 3000 psi (20 mPa) concrete. See Section 03 30 00 for additional requirements 2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.Non-Seismic Type: 1.All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads: a.Configuration: Flat or molded b.Thickness: 0.25 inch (6 mm) minimum 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 4/9 Job Number 2210142.00 c.Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface 2.Elastomeric Mounts: a.Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds b.Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure 3.Steel Springs: a.Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing b.Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame 4.Restrained Steel Springs: a.Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and operating height from changing during temporary weight reduction. b.Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipment and isolator base plate to supporting structure 5.Elastomeric Hangers: a.Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to prevent rod contact with housing and short-circuiting of isolating function b.Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to housing. 6.Spring Hanger: a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element preventing metal to metal contact b.Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment 7.Thrust Restraints: a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element installed in pairs to resist air pressure thrusts b.Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment B.Seismic Type: 1.Coil Springs Consisting of Single Elements: a.Housing: Manufactured from cast iron material b.Ductile Material: Designed and rated for seismic applications c.Spring: Restrained by housing without significant degradation of vibration isolation capabilities during normal equipment operating conditions d.Resilient Snubbing Grommet System: Incorporated and designed with clearances of no more than 0.25 inch (6 mm) in any direction preventing direct metal-to-metal contact between supported member and fixed restraint housing e.Resilient Pad: Located in series with spring f.Coil Springs: Color coded elements to have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness with 50 percent overload capacity g.Finish: Suitable for the application 2.All Directional Elastomeric: a.Material: Molded from oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 5/9 b.Operating Parameters: Designed to operate within the isolator strain limits providing maximum performance and service life c.Attachment Method: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure d.Rating: Cast iron and aluminum housings rated for seismic restraint applications e.Minimum Operating Static Deflections: Deflections indicated in project documents are not to exceed published load capacities 2.05 SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES A.Comply with: 1.SMACNA (SRM) B.All Directional External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all directions. 2.Construction: Interlocking steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact C.Lateral External: 1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed by other restraints. 2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact D.Omni Directional External: 1.Application: Minimum four (4) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions. 2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 6/9 Job Number 2210142.00 E.Horizontal Single Axis External: 1.Application: Minimum four (4) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed by other restraints. 2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner consistent with anticipated design loads 3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of 0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of the isolator during normal operating conditions 4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact 2.06 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A.Comply with: 1.SMACNA (SRM) B.Cable Restraints: 1.Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions 2.Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage 3.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry 4.Connections: a.Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool- less wedge insert lock connectors. b.Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. C.Rigid Restraints: 1.Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both compressive and tensile loading 2.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry 3.Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation. 4.Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the system 5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Bases: 1.Set steel bases for one inch (25 mm) clearance between housekeeping pad and base. 2.Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inches (50 mm) clearance between housekeeping pad and base. 3.Adjust equipment level. C.On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 7/9 D.Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. E.Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC (1.5 kPa) static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. F.Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance. 1.Up to 4 Inches (100 mm) Pipe Size: First three points of support 2.5 to 8 Inches (125 to 200 mm) Pipe Size: First four points of support 3.10 inches (250 mm) Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support 4.Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch (25 mm) static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch (25 mm) static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC A.Seismic Snubbers: 1.Provide on all isolated equipment and piping. 2.Provide minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators. 3.Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch (1.5 mm) maximum clearance. B.Floor and Base-Mounted Equipment, Vibration Isolated Equipment and associated Vibration and Seismic Controls for Connections: 1.Install equipment anchorage items designed to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install vibration and seismic controls designed to include base and isolator requirements. 3.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 4.Provide isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational and seismic forces. 5.Where equipment is not designed to be point loaded, provide base capable of transferring gravity and seismic demands from equipment to isolator base plate anchorage. 6.Where concrete floor thickness is less than required for expansion anchor installation, install through bolt in lieu of expansion anchor. 7.Where timber/wood floor or other substrate is inadequate for installation of lag bolts, screws or other mechanical fasteners, install supplemental framing or blocking to transfer loads to structural elements. C.Suspended Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide supports and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping. 3.Brace equipment hung from spring mounts using cable or other bracing that will not transmit vibration to the structure. 4.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. D.Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment: 1.Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. 2.Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 8/9 Job Number 2210142.00 3.Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist imposed loads is not permitted. E.Piping: 1.Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7. 2.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces. 3.Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an earthquake. 4.Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent transmission of vibrations and noise to the structure. 5.Brace every run 5.0 feet (1.5 m) or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing locations. 6.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections) and is 2.5 inches and larger and all fuel piping 1 inch and larger: a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center. b.For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet (6.1 m) on center. c.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 80.0 feet (24.4 m) on center. d.For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center. e.Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or tee of similar size. f.Piping conveying fluids at 100°F. and higher shall have expansion devices provided in between longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion. g.Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger. 7.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials (cast iron, no-hub, plastic or non-UL listed grooved coupling pipe) and is 2.5 inches and larger: a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet (6.1 m) on center. b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center. c.Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or tee of similar size. d.Piping conveying fluids at 100°F. and higher shall have expansion devices provided in between longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion. e.Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger. 8.Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet (9.1 m) on center or as required for horizontal runs, whichever is less. 9.Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements: a.Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - 9/9 b.Install piping consistent with ASCE 7, such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components. 10.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design. 11.For equipment 400 lbs or greater, provide lateral force calculations per ICC (IBC) if required by the building official. 12.Provide earthquake bumpers for all equipment that is supported on isolators and weighing over 300 lbs. including base. Provide minimum of four bumpers for equipment weighing less than 2,000 lbs., and eight bumpers for heavier equipment. 13.Re-use of Existing Hangers: a.Re-using existing hangers at locations of seismic bracing are to be judged on a case-by-case basis by the registered project design professional. b.Unless otherwise shown on drawings, it is assumed all hangers supporting new piping, located at a seismic brace, will be new. F.Tanks: 1.Provide seismic bracing for hot water tanks. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1/4 SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates B. Tags C. Stencils D. Pipe markers 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Identification painting 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Valve Diagram: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve diagram. 2. Valve Tag Schedule: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve tag schedule. 3. Concealed Items Legend: Provide a color legend listing the colors used to label equipment above the ceiling. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Brimar Industries, Inc 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 3. Seton Identification Products B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm) 3. Background Color: Black 4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709 2.02 TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 2/4 Job Number 2210142.00 5. Seton Identification Products. 6. Or equal. B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter. C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter with smooth edges. D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list hard laminated. 2.03 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Or equal. B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 23, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1 2.04 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc 3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 4. Seton Identification Products 5. Or equal B. Comply with ASME A13.1 C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service. F. Color code assignments shall be verified with the Owner prior to ordering. Color code as follows: 1. Potable Domestic Cold, Hot, and Hot Recirculation Water: Green with white letters 2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters 3. Non-Potable Cold, Hot, and Hot Recirculation Water: Orange with black letters with added words stating "CAUTION: NON_POTABLE, DO NOT DRINK" 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 3/4 4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters 5. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters 2.05 VALVE TAG SCHEDULES A. Provide a Valve Tag Schedule for each piping system, typewritten, and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper, hard laminated. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. 2.06 VALVE DIAGRAM A. Provide a Valve Diagram showing the location of all valves relative to the floor plan of the building. Each Valve Diagram shall be 11x17, hard laminated sheets. Each piping system shall be in a unique color and a legend noting the system colors shall be placed on the first page. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. 3.03 PIPE MARKERS AND COLOR BANDS A. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied space, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations or in accessible ceiling spaces. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floor/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 3.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of plumbing equipment and each operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices. Provide signs or suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling. 1. Pumps and similar motor-driven units. 2. Tanks and pressure vessels. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 4/4 Job Number 2210142.00 3.05 NON POTABLE DOMESTIC SYSTEMS A. Furnish and install label reading “CAUTION: NON-POTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK” at each fixture served by a non-potable system. 3.06 CONCEALED ITEMS A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access, shall have the ceiling marked to indicate such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with ½” tall engraved lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner, and unless directed otherwise, shall be: 1. Fire Protection System Components: Red 2. Domestic Plumbing System Component: Green 3.07 VALVE TAG SCHEDULE A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Tag Schedule in the mechanical/janitors room. 3.08 VALVE DIAGRAM A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Diagram in the mechanical/janitors room. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1/5 SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation B. Jackets and accessories 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015 B.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014 C.ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014 D.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013 E.ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013) F.ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013) G.ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017 H.ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2013 I.ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016 J.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2017 K.ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2016a L.ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013 M.ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013) N.ASTM C1695 - Standard Specification for Fabrication of Flexible Removable and Reusable Blanket Insulation for Hot Service; 2010 (Reapproved 2015) O.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017 P.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016 Q.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2/5 Job Number 2210142.00 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation 2. Johns Manville Corporation 3. Knauf Insulation 4. Owens Corning Corporation; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation ASJ 5. Manson Insulation B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible 1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C) 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C) 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume 4. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50 C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m). D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish G. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color H. Outdoor Breather Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color I. Insulating Cement: ASTM C449 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Aeroflex USA, Inc 2. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex 3. K-Flex USA LLC; Insul-Tube 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 3/5 4. Durkflex. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F (Minus 40 degrees C) 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C) 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive 4. K” Value: 0.25 Btu-in per hour per square foot °F at 75 degrees F 5. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50 6. Maximum water vapor permeability, wet cup, perm-in 0.10 7. Fiber free, formaldehyde-free, and low VOC’s C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation 2.07 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation; Zeston 2000 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, gloss white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (Minus 18 degrees C) b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C) c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm) e. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq. yd (220 g/sq. m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet 2. Finish: Embossed 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Thickness: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 2. Finish: Smooth 3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 4/5 Job Number 2210142.00 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Insulated Pipe Supports and Shields: 1. Install in place at each hanger and support as required be Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping prior to insulating. 2. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. 3. Shields: Galvanized steel or PVC as follows: a. 20 gauge (18 gauge for pipe larger than 3 inches) galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and insulated pipe supports. Shield shall cover a minimum of 40% of the insulation where the pipe is supported from the bottom and 100% of the insulation where the pipe is clamped. b. PVC shield the full diameter of the pipe insulation with 20 gauge galvanized steel shield riveted to the PVC. 4. Insulated Pipe Supports Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 5. Insulated Pipe Support Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation. Provide 9 inches (230 mm) long insulated pipe support and 18 gauge galvanized steel shield for pipes larger than 3 inches. 6. Insert Material: See Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations except where prohibited by code. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Fire Stop Specification Section 07 84 00. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 5/5 K. Exposed Work: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is installed. A pre- cut "Hi-Lo Temp" insulation insert, conforming to the UL 25/50 rating, shall be snugly tucked around the fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the full thickness of insulation. 1. All others provide covering in pad form, constructed as follows: Use 1-inch thick Owens-Corning Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool, Type I, non-oiled, fully enclosed on all sides and edges within tight- weave canvas jacket. Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to device with edges tightly butted and secure with copper wire laced between hooks. Provide vapor seal where vapor seal is required for adjacent insulation. . L. Elastomeric Insulation Installation: 1. For PEX piping installation, elastomeric insulation shall be installed continuous through stud framing and all penetration locations through walls, floors, and ceilings. 2. Elastomeric insulation with wall thicknesses greater than 1” shall not be installed in air plenums. 3. All elastomeric foam and sheet seams shall be sealed with adhesive per the insulation manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Install elastomeric insulation on all PEX domestic hot water and recirculation water piping. 3.03 PIPE HANGERS A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply (including Recirculation): a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2-1.25 inch 2) Thickness: 1 inch 3) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber: All Sizes on metal pipes: 1 inch (25 mm) END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 1/13 SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems. 1.Sanitary sewer 2.Domestic water 3.Flanges, unions, and couplings 4.Pipe hangers and supports 5.Manufactured sleeve-seal systems 6.Strainers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B.Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012 B.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013 C.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014 D.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators; 2017 E.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014 F.ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014) G.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017 H.ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a I.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014) J.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016 K.ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2016 L.ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2016 M.ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016 N.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012 O.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014 P.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets; 2015 Q.ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2017 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 2/13 Job Number 2210142.00 R.ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2011a S.ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2015 T.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015 U.AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2014 V.CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009 (Revised 2012) W.CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011 (Revised 2012) X.ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2015 Y.ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2015 Z.ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015 AA.ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2016 AB.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2009 AC.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017 AD.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016 AE.PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS), Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe; 2017 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B.Welder Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX. C.Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings. D.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. E.Operation and Maintenance Data 1.Domestic water sterilization test 2.Domestic water pressure tests 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B.Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body C.Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D.Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX E.Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 3/13 F.Domestic water fittings, joining materials, and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water shall be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act. 1.Lead-free shall mean: a.Not containing more than 0.2% lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and b.Not more than a weighted average of 0.25% when used with respect to the vetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Cast Iron Pipe: Conform to CISPI 301, hubless pipe and fittings 1.Manufacturers: a.AB&I b.Charlotte c.Tyler B.Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Couplings shall be constructed of 300 Series type stainless steel. There shall be 2 bands for pipe sizes up to 4” and a minimum of 4 bands for pipe sizes 5” and larger. Sealing bands shall require a minimum of 60-inch lbs. torque per band. Neoprene gasket shall meet ASTM C 564. 1.Manufacturers: a.Thermafit Regular Duty b.Tyler Standard No-Hub c.Clamp-All HI-TORQ 80 C.Flashing: Lead flashing, 4 lbs. per sq. ft. of sheet lead flashing. Flashing skirt radius from the inserted pipe of at least 8 inches or 2 foot square. 1.Manufacturers: a.Elmdor Stoneman D.Vent Cap: Vandal Resistant. Cast Iron. Minimum of 2 to 1 open area compared to the cross-sectional area of the vent pipe 1.Manufacturers: a.Elmdor Stoneman E.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, schedule 40, DWV, solid core pipe 1.Fittings: PVC 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 4/13 Job Number 2210142.00 2.Joints: ASTM D2564 a.Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an elastomeric seal conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN/CSA-B602. Mechanical joints shall not be installed in above-ground systems, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. b.Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer that conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and conforming to ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN/CSA-B137.3, CSA CAN/CSA-B181.2 or CSA CAN/CSA-B182.1 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall be made while the cement is wet and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Solvent-cement joints shall be permitted above or below ground. c.Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Approved thread lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only. 3.Manufacturers: a.Charlotte b.Mueller Industries c.Cresline 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), hard drawn 1.Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2.Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder, lead free conforming to UPC standards for solder and all local code requirements. a.Manufacturers: 1)Canfield 2)J.W. Harris 3)Aqua-Clean 3.Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified, utilizing EPDM, non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements. a.Manufacturers: 1)Grinnell Products 2)Viega LLC 3)Nibco 4.Mechanical Couplings on pipe 2.5" and larger: NSF 61 a.Manufacturers: 1)Victualic 2)Gruvlok B.Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877. Pipe shall be NSF 61 and NSF 14 certified. 1.Manufacturers: a.Uponor, Inc b.Viega LLC 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 5/13 c.Zurn Industries, LLC d.Watts. e.Rehau 2.PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis: a.100 psig (689 kPa) at maximum 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) 3.Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer (EP) ASTM F1960 4.Joints: Mechanical compression fittings 5.Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings 2.04 CONDENSATE PIPING A.Schedule 40 PVC, solid core B.Type L copper for use in air plenum, penetrating a fire wall, or used with gas-fired equipment C.Insulate per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A.Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under: 1.Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions 2.Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints B.Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch (25 mm): 1.Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets 2.Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets C.Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1.Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606 2.Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized 3.Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber suitable for operating temperature range from minus 20 degrees F to 180 degrees F (minus 29 degrees C to 82 degrees C) 4.Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel 5.When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools 6.Manufacturers: a.Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business b.Victaulic c.Gruvlok D.Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier 2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1.If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 6/13 Job Number 2210142.00 2.Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not exceed the following: a.610 pounds for 3/8" diameter rods b.1130 pounds for 1/2" diameter rods 3.Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. a.Cold and Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Double hangers 4.Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure 5.Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp, epoxy coated 6.Steel: Provide structural steel per ASTM A36/A36M 7.Wood: Shall be fire treated 8.Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows: a.Bases: High density polypropylene. b.Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. c.Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. d.Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. e.Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) under pipe to top of roofing. f.Manufacturers: 1)PDH 2)Elcen 3)Grinnel 4)B-line 5)Unistrut 6)Caddy 7)Tolco B.Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook. 4.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. C.Plumbing Piping - Water: 1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2.Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 7/13 3.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) to 4 Inches (100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis 4.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll, double hanger 5.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook 6.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp 7.Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll 8.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated D.Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1.Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193 2.Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01 3.Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193 4.Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106 5.Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308 6.Other Types: As required 7.Manufacturers: a.Powers Fasteners, Inc b.Rawplug c.Phillips d.Hilti e.Caddy E.Insulated Pipe Inserts and Insulation Shields: 1.Insulated pipe insert shall have no more than 5% deformation at 100 psi and a thermal conductivity no more than 0.38 Btu/hr./sq. ft./degree F/1-inch thick at 75°F. 2.Insulated pipe insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to match pipe in which it is used on. See Section 22 07 19 for insulation sizes. 3.Provide shield per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation. 4.Manufacturers: a.TPS Thermal Pipe Shields b.B-Line c.Clement Support Services d.Snappitz F.PEX Pipe Hangers and supports 1.Provide continuous steel channel pipe supports at all horizontal PEX pipe runs greater than 6’-0” in length. a.Steel Channel Pipe Supports: 1)23-gauge, galvanized steel channel with a copper tube size controlled outside diameter. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 8/13 Job Number 2210142.00 2)Steel channel pipe supports shall be available in lengths up to 9’-0” for pipe sizes ½” - 3 ½”. 3)Secure pipe to channel support with stainless steel straps rated for 300-pound tensile strength. 2.Manufacturers: a.Uponor PEX-a Pipe, or approved equivalent 3.All horizontal PEX pipe shall utilize steel brackets, clevis, J-hangers, or trapeze style hangers. 2.07 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.Manufacturers: 1.The Metraflex Company; MetraSeal 2.Link Seal B.Modular/Mechanical Seal: 1.Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing opening. 2.Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening. 3.Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates. 2.08 STRAINERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Armstrong International, Inc 2.Bell and Gossett 3.Apollo Conbraco 4.Hoffman 5.Wheatley 6.Nibco B.Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under: 1.Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. 2.Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. C.Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm): 1.Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. D.Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger: 1.Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 9/13 B.Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C.Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION A.Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D.Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces, ducts, electrical equipment, ceiling heights, door openings, window openings, and other details and report discrepancies or possible conflicts to Architect/Engineer before installing pipe. E.Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If interferences occur, reroute piping to accommodate insulation. F.Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space, removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. G.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. H.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. I.Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. J.Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. K.Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3.3 ft (1 m) of cover. L.Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. M.Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. N.Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Refer to Section 22 05 23. O.Install water piping to ASME B31.9. P.Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Q.Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples. R.T-drill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed. S.All piping in finished areas shall be installed concealed unless specifically noted otherwise. T.Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceilings. U.Install all exposed piping parallel to the closest wall and in a neat, workmanlike manner. V.Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow-off connection on strainers, valve shall be same size as blow-off tapping. Final blow-off shall have a hose connection fitting. W.Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. X.PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Y.Inserts: 1.Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 10/13 Job Number 2210142.00 2.Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3.Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm). 4.Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. Z.Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1.Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2.Support horizontal piping as indicated. 3.Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4.Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. 5.Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6.Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 7.Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8.Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 9.Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22 05 48. 10.Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. AA.Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems: 1.Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete walls at piping entrances into building. 2.Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve inner diameter or penetration diameter. 3.Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration. 4.Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and piping. 5.Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal. 6.Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. BB.When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. 3.04 SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT A.Place cleanouts as follows: 1.Where shown on plans and near bottom of each stack and riser. 2.At every 135 degree change of direction for horizontal lines. 3.Every 100 feet of horizontal run. 4.Extended cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In such locations, use wall type cleanouts. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 11/13 B.Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge vent pipe minimum 14 inches above roof. Join lines together in least practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. C.Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast iron pipe. Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling. D.Install vertical waste pipe to comply with standard installation practices for suds control. E.Reducing size of pipe in the direction of flow is prohibited. F.Install drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1.Building soil and waste drain: 2 percent downward in the direction of flow unless indicated otherwise on the plans. G.Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 3.05 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPE A.Provide stainless steel inserts at compression stop valves. B.All couplings, elbows, tees, reducing tees adapters and any other connecting devices shall be of the same manufacturer as the PEX piping. C.Kinked tubing shall be reformed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation or cut out and replaced. D.90 degree direction turns and wall penetrations shall be provided with a bend support or elbow fitting. E.Copper sweated and threaded connections are to be made prior to PEX connections. F.Transition PEX to copper at fire walls. Provide fire stop sealants at fire rated walls. G.PEX tubing shall be fully seated against shoulder of fitting. H.Horizontal piping shall be supported every 32". I.Vertical piping shall be supported every 4'. J.Allow 1/8" to 3/16" of slack per foot of run for expansion and contraction. K.PEX tubing shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not rigidly attach to structure. L.Provide sleeves where PEX piping passes through masonry walls. M.Protect tubing from nail/screw damage with suitable steel plate protectors. N.The minimum bend radius of PEX tubing is six times its diameter. Smaller radius turns shall be provided with an elbow. O.Provide insulators where PEX piping passes through metal studs. P.Supply stops shall be provided with a pipe bracket support from adjacent structure, a pipe clamp, tube talon, and a plastic or metal bend support. (Sioux Chief Universal Slider Bracket or approved equal). Q.Insulation does not have to be continuous at hanging brackets and clamps. R.Plastic speed clips may be used for connection to structure. Speed clips shall be listed for use on PEX piping. 3.06 APPLICATION A.Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B.Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 12/13 Job Number 2210142.00 3.07 TOLERANCES A.Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) slope. B.Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at low points. 3.08 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TESTS A.Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 100 psi hydrostatic test held for 2 hours without reduction of pressure (a pressure fluctuation of +/- 1 psi is acceptable). If any leaks occur or piping or valves are found to be defective, same shall be removed and new material installed, and the test made on that section again until all material is found to be satisfactory. Such test shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative. B.Provide written test documentation in the operation and maintenance manual. 3.09 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A.Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B.Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C.Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D.Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E.Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F.If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G.Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H.Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. I.Provide test results in the operation and maintenance manual. 3.10 SCHEDULES A.Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1.Metal Piping: a.Pipe Size: 1/2 inches (15 mm) to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm): 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft (2 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches (9 mm) b.Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm): 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm) c.Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) to 3 inches (75 mm): 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm) d.Pipe Size: 4 inches (100 mm) to 6 inches (150 mm): 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch (15 mm) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 - 13/13 e.Pipe Size: 8 inches (200 mm) to 12 inches (300 mm): 1)Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft (4.25 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 7/8 inch (22 mm) f.Pipe Size: 14 inches and Over (350 mm and Over): 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 20 ft (6 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 1 inch (25 mm) 2.Plastic Piping: a.All Sizes: 1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 ft (1.8 m) 2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm) END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 1/4 SECTION 22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermometers B. Pressure Gauges C. Unions D. Flexible Connectors E. Cleanouts F. Refrigerator valve and recessed box G. Water hammer arrestors 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2016 B.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017 C.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016 D.PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.02 THERMOMETERS A. Adjustable angle type, 304 stainless steel stem, 5" reading dial type, true anti-parallax-dial black numerals, markings in degrees F., stainless steel, double-strength glass viewing window. Provide sockets with extension necks where installed on insulated piping B. Thermometer Temperature Ranges: 1. Domestic Cold Water, range of 0 - 100 degrees F with 1 degree F increments. 2. Domestic Hot Water, range of 30 - 180 degrees F with 2 degrees F increments. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 2/4 Job Number 2210142.00 C. Manufacturers: 1. Ashcroft 2. March 3. Weiss 4. Tel-Tru 5. Winters 6. Taylor 2.03 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Glycerin filled type, 2.5” reading dial with aluminum face and black numerals, markings in English units, 304 stainless steel case and acrylic lens. Provide each gauge with snubber and needle valve. Provide sockets with extension necks where installed on insulated piping. B. Pressure gauge ranges: 1. Domestic Hot Water, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter- graduations. 2. Domestic Cold Water, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter- graduations. 3. Compressed Air, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter-graduations. C. Manufacturers: 1. Ashcroft 2. Marsh 3. Weiss 4. Tel-Tru 5. Winters 6. Taylor 2.04 UNIONS A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing, rated at 300 psi at 225 deg. F., conforming to NSF 61 Type and size to match piping. 1. Manufacturers: a. Walter Vallett Company V-line b. Clear Flow B. Unions on Copper Pipe: 1. In 2" Pipe and Smaller: Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union. 2. In 2.5" Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions. 3. Manufacturers: a. Watts b. Nibco c. Mueller 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 3/4 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Water Pump Flexible Connectors: Flexible bronze braid, bronze hose, and copper ends rated to a working pressure of 470 psi at 70°F for a 1” flexible connector. 1. Manufacturers: a. Metraflex b. Minnesota Flex c. Resistoflex 2.06 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company 2. Josam Company 3. Zurn Industries, LLC B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.07 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX A. Box Manufacturers: 1. Guy Gray 2. Oatey Supply Chain Services, Inc 2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company 2. Sioux Chief; [650 Series] 3. Wade; [WP5-100] 4. Zurn Industries, LLC; 1250 XL B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F (minus 73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure. 2. Piston-type with sufficient volume of air to dissipate the calculated kinetic energy generated in the piping system. 3. Arrestors shall be effective when installed at any angle 4. Provide isolation valve for service 5. Maximum working temperature of 250 degrees F 6. Maximum working pressure 350 PSIG 7. Performance per ANSI/ASSE 1010-2004 Standard 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06 - 4/4 Job Number 2210142.00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Thermometers: Install thermometers and thermal wells in piping at locations indicated, and so as to be easily read. C. Pressure Gauges: Install pressure gauges at each side of pressure reducing valves; and as indicated. D. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves, coils, regulators, reducers, all equipment, and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or maintenance; and as indicated. E. Install (1) piston type water hammer arrester at each quick acting valve for branch supply lines up to 20’ in length serving plumbing fixture groups. Install water hammer arrester between last two fixtures, for branch supply lines exceeding 20’ in length, serving plumbing fixture groups install water hammer arrester between middle two fixtures and last two fixtures. Size per manufacturer’s instructions. F. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold-water supply piping to on fast acting valves such as water closet flush valves, washer machines, etc. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 1/2 SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters: 1. Commercial electric 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions B.UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Water Heaters: NSF approved 2. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 3. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith Water Products Co 2. Rheem 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 2/2 Job Number 2210142.00 3. State 4. Lochinvar 5. Bradford White 6. PVI 7. Heat Transer Products 8. EEMAX B. Commercial Electric Tankless: 1. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage. 2. Performance: a. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig (1000 kPa) 3. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. 4. Accessories a. Water Connections: Brass. b. Dip Tube: Brass c. Drain valve d. Anode: Magnesium e. Integrated Mixing Valve 5. Tankless water heater shall have a UL rated cover. 6. Controls: Electronic low-water (probe-type) cut-off and high temperature limit thermostat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Domestic water heaters. 1. On all water heaters, provide and install seismic bracing per S.M.A.C.N.A. zone 3. 2. Provide and install brass fittings between water heater and piping connections. Dielectric fitting connections are not acceptable. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1/3 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sinks B. Hot Water Dispenser 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010 B.ASTM D3222 - Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials; 2005 (Reapproved 2015) C.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017 D.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SINKS A. Sink Manufacturers: 1. Just 2. Elkay B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage, 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm) thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) crumb cup and tailpiece. 2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 2/3 Job Number 2210142.00 C. Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage, 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm) thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) crumb cup and tailpiece. 2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering. 2.03 HOT WATER DISPENSER A. Hot water dispenser shall be U.L. listed, 750 watts, 6.5 amps, 115 volts, factory mounted 3 wire cord and 3 prong plug, adjustable thermostat with range of 140°F to 200°F. ½ gallon storage capacity with faucet having chrome plated finish. Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for proper installation. Provide shut-off valve in supply line to unit, install in back left or back right corner of sink. B. Manufacturers: 1. In-sink-erator (ISE) 2. Other manufacturers will be allowed by prior approval only. To request approval, the manufacturer must provide an equipment layout showing how the proposed equipment will fit in the space and meet all access requirements. This manufacturer must include in the cost of the proposed equipment, at bid time, the difference in piping, electrical, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with a removable trap to be easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound. Point edges. E. All exposed metal shall be chrome-plated brass. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. B. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project. C. Remove all manufacturers’ labels tags, and protective plastic. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 3/3 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on the architectural elevation drawings END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES 23 05 13 - 1/2 SECTION 23 05 13 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Includes, but not limited to, motors 1/12 HP or larger used in Division 23 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions, Division 1 B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements 1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. All variable drives B. Total harmonic voltage distortion calculation 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Check out sheet for each variable drive showing all programmed parameters. Date of check out, and name and company address of employee responsible for checkout. B. Programming manual explaining how to access and change all programmable points C. International wiring diagram for each different unit D. Parts diagram with replacement parts listed E. Trouble shooting guide PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Motors located indoors shall be open frame, drip-proof type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors located outdoors exposed to weather shall have corrosion resistant finish and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors used in fans serving dishwashing hoods shall be TEFC type. B. All motors shall be UL listed. C. All motors used with variable frequency drives shall be premium efficiency inverter ready and shall be capable of running at least 85 Hz. D. All motors 1 HP and larger shall be energy efficient type and shall meet the 2015 Washington State Energy Code requirements. E. All fan motors 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM) or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent when rated in accordance with DOE 10 C.F.R. 431. These motor speeds shall be adjustable. F. Motors shall not be smaller than indicated on drawings; however, motors shall be of adequate size to drive the respective equipment when handling the quantities specified without exceeding the nameplate full load current at any conditions encountered in actual operation. If it becomes evident that a motor furnished is too small to meet these requirements as a result of the Contractor using substituted equipment or having revised the system arrangement, the Contractor shall replace it with a motor of adequate size at no additional cost to the Owner. This Contractor shall also arrange with the Electrical Contractor to increase the size of the wiring, motor starter and other accessories as required to serve the larger motor at no additional cost to the Owner. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 13 - 2/2 G. ECM (Electrically Commutated Motors) shall conform to the motor requirements listed above. In addition, the Contractor purchasing the HVAC equipment that includes the ECM is responsible for ensuring the ECM motor control speed control is set to match the required component operation. The ECM motor control speed control may be preset by the HVAC equipment manufacturer. The Contractor purchasing the HVAC equipment shall provide documentation showing the appropriate ECM motor control board jumper pins, dip switches and/or multi-pin plugs settings for correct HVAC equipment component operation. H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Westinghouse 3. Reliance 4. Allis-Chalmers 5. Gould 6. Century 7. Wagner 8. Baldor 9. U.S. Motors Marathon PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1/3 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Includes: 1. Duct Hangers and Supports 2. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions, Division 1 B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements C. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Control 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC) and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Hangers B. Struts C. Anchors D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut, Caddy, Tolco, PHD B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Caddy 2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not exceed the following: Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load 3/8 Inch 610 Pounds 1/2 Inch 1130 Pounds 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 29 - 2/3 B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the following: Strap Size Maximum Load 1” x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds 1” x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds 1” x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds 1” x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type: MSS Type Elcen Figure No.Grinnel Figure No. 21 33, 34 131 22 67 66 23 29A 87 28 95 292, 228 30 95 229 D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl "Saber-Tooth". E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36. F. Wood: Shall be fire treated. 2.03 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. B. Vertical Duct Supports at Floor: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) galvanized steel angle and to support ducts, as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-6. For ducts over 30 inches wide, provide riser reinforcing with hanger rods between the riser support and riser reinforcing. C. Vertical Duct Supports at Wall: 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) strap or 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) angle bracket and as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-7. D. Hanger Attachments to Structure: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard Figures 4-1, 4-2, 4-3 to suit building construction and as allowed on structural drawings. Where C-clamps are provided, retainer clips shall be used. Friction beam clamps shall not be used. E. Hanger Attachments to Ducts: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-4. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and mechanical equipment. B. Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for items hung from walls. C. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide anchors and supports for all ductwork. B. Rectangular Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct. (Hangers maximum allowable loads shall not be as shown in SMACNA Tables but shall be as specified in these specifications.) C. Round Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3/3 D. Maximum Hanger Spacing (provided duct gauge and reinforcement comply with SMACNA Standards for such spacing): Duct Area Maximum Spacing Up to 4 sq. ft. (27” Diameter)8 Feet 4.1 to 10 sq. ft. (28” to 42” Diameter)6 Feet 10.1 sq. ft. and up (43” Diameter and up)4 Feet E. Provide supports at each change in direction of duct. Locate hangers at inside and outside corners of elbows, or at each end of fitting, on each side. F. Provide additional supports at each side concentrated loads (such as modulating dampers, duct heaters, sound attenuators, etc.) G. Provide supports for exterior ductwork per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as detailed on the drawings. 3.03 CEILING AIR TERMINALS/SERVICES A. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners. B. Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds in addition to the above shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling system hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slack. C. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers. D. All air terminals that use side inlet "plenums" or have fire dampers shall be supported directly from the structure with approved hangers (regardless of total weight). 3.04 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment. B. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from structure shall be supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings. C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is transmitted to the building structure. D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 23 05 48. E. Provide curbing as shown on drawings and as required to support all mechanical equipment. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 1/5 SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section includes, but not limited to vibration isolation and seismic restraint installation for all equipment, ductwork, and piping as described here-in. B. Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the International Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings. C. Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED CODE AND STANDARDS A. The latest adopted versions of the following codes and standards apply to this section. 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13) 3. Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems (SMACNA) 4. ASCE 7-10, American Society of Civil Engineers “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures” 5. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria 6. Applicable Manufacturer’s Seismic Design Guides for proprietary listed seismic bracing and mounting hardware 7. Where there is a conflict in requirements between these guidelines and above-mentioned codes the more stringent parameters shall prevail. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions, Division 1 and Division 23 B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Occupancy Category of Structure (I-IV) per IBC or ASCE B. Component Importance Factor (Ip) per ASCE C. Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S1 and (Ss) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings D. Site Class (A – F) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings E. Site Coefficient (Fa) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings F. Site Coefficient (Fv) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings G. Seismic Design Category (A – D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per IBC and Project Structural Drawings H. Seismic Design Category (A – D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per IBC and Project Structural Drawings I. Amplification Factor ap per ASCE J. Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 48 - 2/5 1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Isolation Pads B. Spring Isolators C. Seismic Control: 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation, seismic, and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 3. Seismic and Wind Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraint to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing’s. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. 4. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of components/systems requiring periodic special inspections per IBC. 5. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a “Designated Seismic System” for active mechanical equipment that must remain operable following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be submitted to the AHJ. 6. All brace or restraint components, mounting devices, snubbers and anchors. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEOPRENE ISOLATORS A. Suspension Isolators: Shall be double deflection neoprene type, with isolator encased in open steel bracket and minimum 3/8-inch deflection. Hanger rod shall be isolated from steel bracket with neoprene grommets. Mason Series HD, Amber Booth "BRD" or approved. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 3/5 2.02 SPRING ISOLATORS A. General: The load carried by each isolator shall be carefully calculated and isolators selected so that the static deflection will be the same and the supported equipment will remain level. Isolators shall be so designed that the ends of the springs will remain parallel during and after deflection to operating height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection. Suspension isolator springs shall have a static deflection (as shown on drawings) not less than 1-1/2", except that for units with components rotating at 1000 rpm and less, the static deflection shall be not less than 2 inches. Floor isolator springs shall have deflection of not less than 1 inch. All isolators shall provide at least 96% isolation efficiency. Note: Deflections other than these may be used where circumstances warrant and more optimum isolation results can be achieved. B. Suspension Type Spring Isolators: Shall consist of a rigid steel frame, a stable steel spring in the bottom part of the frame, and double deflection neoprene isolating pad at the top of the frame. Where supporting rods pass through the frame, a clearance of not less than on half rod diameter shall be provided all around the rod. 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mason Series DNHS b. Amber Booth "BSSR" or approved 2.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. All seismic hangers and components shall be domestically made. Products designed domestically and fabricated in a foreign country are prohibited. 2. Products not permitted include: powder actuated anchors, gas actuated anchors, or anchors requiring epoxy. 3. Only Steel or Ductile Iron components shall be provided. No Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum components are allowed. 4. Steel shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be as shown in “SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual” or approved manufacturers seismic design guidelines. B. Seismic Bracing (rigid and cable): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Tolco b. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) c. Mason Industries d. Cooper B-Line e. Kinetics Noise Control f. AFCON g. Gripple h. PHD i. Unistrut j. Anvil or prior approved equal. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 48 - 4/5 C. Seismic Anchorages (for wood, steel and concrete): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Hilti b. ITW Ramset/Red Head c. ITW Buildex d. Mason Industries e. Tolco, AFCON f. Simpson Strong-Tie g. Powers Fasteners, Inc. or prior approved equal. D. Flexible Connectors: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mason Industries b. Metraflex c. Victaulic d. Kinetics Noise e. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) or prior approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Motorized equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from spring vibration isolators either integral or external to the equipment. Floor mounted or suspended isolators. B. Unless otherwise indicated, resilient mounts for motorized equipment shall be of the type and size to provide maximum ten percent transmissibility. Use unhoused, free-standing stable steel springs which are preferred over housed spring assemblies. The horizontal stiffness of the spring shall be approximately equal to its vertical stiffness. The spring deflection shall be selected based on the equipment power range (HP), speed range (RPM), and static deflection of the supporting structural floor. It is a specific recommendation that whenever a steel spring is used, two pads of ribbed waffle- pattern neoprene be used in series with the spring. C. The design of vibration dampening shall consider lateral load as well as vertical load and be suitably snubbed against earthquake forces. D. A list of isolators accompanied by certified transmissibility ratings for the required duty shall be submitted for each item of equipment. E. Unless noted otherwise, all vibration isolating equipment shall be of the same make and shall be submitted as one group. 3.02 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Support and bracing from the structure to pipes, ducts and mechanical equipment shall conform to ASCE and the plumbing & HVAC industry standard SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” or approved manufacturer’s listed seismic assemblies. 3.03 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - PIPING A. When determining horizontal load requirements, consider all pipes full of water and maximum equipment heights unless calculated for other substances and equipment. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 5/5 B. Seismic bracing shall not limit the expansion and contraction of the piping system. When thermal expansion or contraction is involved, longitudinal bracing shall be designed at the anchor point of the piping system. The longitudinal bracing and the connections must be capable of resisting the additional force induced by expansion and contraction. C. Seismic bracing for fire sprinkler system piping and riser components shall be as specified per Division 21. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Installation of seismic restraints shall be as follows: 1. Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up of restrained equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected equipment, leaving equipment free to contact snubbers. 2. All external utility connections to restrained equipment shall be designed to allow differential seismic motion without damage to the equipment or utility connections. 3. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at its operating weight, following manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. After equipment installation is completed, adjust limit stops following manufacturer’s written instructions so they are out of contact during normal operation. 5. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Torque anchor bolts according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions to resist seismic forces. 7. Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. 8. Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to rods. 3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. When required continuous or periodic special inspections of the equipment and systems designated on the list provided by the mechanical contractor shall be performed in accordance with the IBC and ASCE. The owner shall reserve the right to employ an approved special inspector. B. Per the IBC, the registered design professional in responsible charge may designate members of the A&E team to act as special inspectors provided those personnel meet the qualification requirements of the IBC to the satisfaction of the building official. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1/2 SECTION 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 STANDARDS A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Not Applicable 2.02 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS A. Provide engraved stock phenolic plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. 1. Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq in or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units 2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 3. Letter Size: No less than ½" tall. (Use unit# as noted on the equipment schedules) B. Provide for all items on equipment schedules. 2.03 PAINT A. Benjamin Moore Impervo or equivalent B. Use appropriate primer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 53 - 2/2 3.02 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices. Provide signs on suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling. 1. Fans, exhaust, and air handling units 3.03 FIRE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER IDENTIFICATION A. Furnish and install label reading "FIRE DAMPER" or "FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER" on each fire damper duct access door. Provide additional labels at locations where external duct insulation covers the access door. Install on outside of insulation. 3.04 CONCEALED ITEMS A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access, shall have the ceiling marked to indicate such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with ½” tall engraved lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner, and unless directed otherwise, shall be: Item Color Heating System Equipment Component Green Fire Protection System Component Red B. Provide three (3) color legends (hard laminate) listing the above colors. Locate as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1/4 SECTION 23 05 93 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A.Includes, but not limited to, testing, balancing and adjusting of air heating, cooling and exhaust systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTION(S) A.General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this section B.Division 23 shall make changes in pulley, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Air Testing & Balancing Agency at no additional cost to Owner. C.Division 23 shall repair leaks in ductwork at no additional cost to Owner. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS) A.Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with the Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC), National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or National Balancing Council (NBC) standards and procedures. B.Air Testing & Balance Agency shall perform tests specified, compile test data, and submit copies of complete test data to Contractor for forwarding to Architect/Engineer for evaluation and approval. 1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION A.Company information including Washington State Contractors’ license B.Key personnel and resumes C.AABC, NEBB, or NBC certifications D.Provide reference of five (5) completed jobs of similar size and complexity. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A.Final air balance report shall be bound in the O & M Manual or provided under a separate volume. B.Preliminary air balance report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Preliminary report shall note all finished measured data. C.Final Test Data: 1.Provide project name, name and telephone number of balancing firm, GC, MC, Architect, and Engineer in the cover (or first page) of report. 2.Provide a summary of air balance findings regarding airtightness of each ducted systems, deficiencies of equipment to meet design requirements, deficiencies of space pressure relationships, etc. 3.Cover sheet shall have a statement from the site project manager that reads, “The air system testing and balancing report contained here in is true and factual based on actual field measurements and adjustments. I have personally performed or witnessed a minimum of 5% of the airflow tests.” 4.Each page of test report to have a unique page number. 5.Provide fan curve or chart of each fan in system. 6.Provide final approved test report in PDF format on CD. Provide one more CD than hard copies of test report. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 93 - 2/4 7.Obtain and provide a copy of the air barrier test (building tightness) whether or not the Air Balance Contractor produced the test. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS) A.Mechanical Contractor shall procure services of an independent Air Testing & Balance Agency, which specializes in testing, and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, test air-moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems. B.Agency shall be approved in writing by Consultant. C.Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained good working order. D.If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect/Owner/Engineer. 1.07 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING A.Mechanical Contractor shall award test and balance contract to approved agency upon receipt of his contract to proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and comply with completion date. B.Begin air testing and balancing upon completion of air cooling, heating, and exhaust systems including installation of all specialties and devices. C.Mechanical Contractor shall put heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment into full operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing. PART 2 PRODUCT Not applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Procedure: Air Testing & Balancing Agency shall perform following tests and balance system in accordance with following requirements at design conditions of supply and a minimum outside air CFM (not 100% return or 100% economizer). 1.Test, adjust, and record fan rpm to design requirements. 2.Test and record motor amperes at design conditions. 3.Make pitot tube traverse of main supply duct and obtain design cfm at fans. (systems of 1000 CFM or greater) 4.Test and record system static pressures: suction, discharge, and clean filters (if applicable; for systems of 2000 CFM or greater) 5.Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm air. 6.Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm outside air. 7.Test, adjust, and record each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. 8.On a floor plan, identify each diffuser, grille, and register to location and area using a designation symbol unique to that page. 9.Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and testing equipment. Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations. 10.In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required cfm and test cfm after adjustments. 11.In cooperation with Division 23, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, or noted. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3/4 12.Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts. 13.Identify at each volume damper with permanent mark, the position of actuator handle once final balance has been achieved. 14.Measure and record all pressure differential relationships as identified by the controls diagrams (i.e. building pressure, etc). These measurements are to be taken when all HVAC is running after full balance has been completed. Note the measured reference points to determine the pressure differential. 15.For any spaces with exhaust and supply to them where design airflows cannot be obtained, the systems shall be adjusted to produce a negative pressure to the adjacent space (i.e. workrooms, restrooms, etc.) 16.When reconciling supply, return, outside, and exhaust air quantities, priority shall be placed on outside air quantities (typically, return air quantities noted on plans are for duct sizing only). 17.Where duct pressure sensors are noted in controls diagrams (i.e. variable volume systems) adjust system to its minimum pressure point that still achieves full airflow to all terminals. Record this setpoint in test report and provide data to controls contractor. 18.For variable volume systems, adjust sheave package to produce maximum airflow (or diversity as applicable) at 60 Hz with simulated filter loading. If maximum airflow cannot be obtained at 60 Hz, increase frequency until maximum airflow is obtained as allowed by the equipment manufacturer and maximum motor amperes. Record final values. 19.Verify that all gravity backdraft dampers are moving freely, open in proper direction, and are unbound. 20.After balancing system, measure terminal CFM when system is in 100% economizer. If supply is greater than design, coordinate with controls contractor or MC to provide damper stops to provide design CFM during 100% economizer. 21.On All Motors With Variable Drives: Set maximum amperage safety to protect motor from over loading. B.Final Inspection & Adjustments: 1.Balancing agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report. a.Architect may choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building. b.Rebalancing shall be done in presence of Architect and subject to his approval. c.Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. 2.System shall be completely balanced and all reports submitted to Architect prior to prefinal inspection. 3.Where equipment supplied to job site provides over 5% more air than schedule requirements, rooms supplied by that equipment shall have their supply air quantities increased by the ratio of actual total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by schedule. 3.02 BALANCING FIRMS (APPROVED) A.Hardin and Sons B.United Test and Balance C.Airtest Company, Inc D.American Air Balance Company 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING Job Number 2210142.00 23 05 93 - 4/4 E.Advanced Mechanical Services, Inc END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION 23 07 13 - 1/3 SECTION 23 07 13 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This section describes the insulation requirement to meet or exceed the 2012 Washington State Energy Code. Lining installation is per 23 31 13. 1.02 RELATED SECTION(S) A. General Conditions, Division 1 B. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Conditions C. Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Wrap Insulation 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Not Applicable 2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Manville Corporation Owens Corning, Knauf Insulation, Manson Insulation, or approved equal. B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket (Wrap Insulation): Manville, Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2; flexible blanket. 1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: 0.27 at 75°F (0.040 at 24°C) installed 2. Density and R-value: a. R-3.3: 1.0” inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket b. R-5.3: 2.0” inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket c. R-7: 3.0 inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket 3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward cinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigi 1. ‘K’ (‘ksi’) Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION Job Number 2210142.00 23 07 13 - 2/3 4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12” on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape, or glass fabric and vapor retarder mastic. 5. Density and R-value: a. R-4.5: 1.0” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft b. R-6.8: 1.5” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft c. R-9.1: 2.0” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft D. Duct Insulation Protection: 1. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch (.045 mm) thick sheet, smooth/embossed finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch (50 mm) lamps. 2. Manville Insulkote ET, a non-water-vapor retarder, non-burning, weatherproof coating for use over insulation where "breathing" is required. 3. Manville Zeston 2000 jacketing, UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured and sealed with Manville Perma-Weld Adhesive. 4. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. (220 g/sq. m.), plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire-retardant lagging adhesive. 5. Self-Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish. Jacketing material is to have a maximum flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/20 per UL 723, 1 0.0000 water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E-96, mold inhibitors incorporated, and be UV stable. 2.03 DUCTWORK LINING A. See Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with SMACNA standards before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material. C. External Ductwork Insulation: 1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive. 2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor retardant jacket. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except where prohibited by code. 4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center. The protruding ends of the fasteners should be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with the same tape as specified above. 5. For ductwork exposed to physical abuse in unfinished and exposed spaces, finish with duct insulation protection. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION 23 07 13 - 3/3 D. For installation of lining insulation, see Section 23 31 13. 3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide wrap insulation and duct liner for the duct systems indicated per the following table (R-value indicates the thickness to be provided as defined in Section 23 07 13 for wrap insulation and Section 23 31 13 for liner): DUCT TYPE AND LOCATION LINER WRAP Within Conditioned Space: - Supply Air R - 3.3 Not Required - Return Air R - 3.3 Not Required - Primary Air Not Required R – 3.31 - Transfer Air R-3.3 Not Required - Exhaust Air R-3.3 Not Required2 Table Footnotes: 1 Where duct is exposed to view, provide wrap with paintable duct insulation protection 2 Building level insulation is required from backdraft/motorized damper to louver or roof hood. See plans for additional details. Coordinate with GC for insulation. B. For purposes of the Insulation Schedule above, the following defines the duct systems: 1. Supply Air: Air that has passed through mechanical conditioning device, such as a furnace, coil, evaporative section, heat recovery device, etc. that is distributed to the conditioned space 2. Return Air: Air from the conditioned space to an air handler 3. Primary Air: See Section 23 31 13 – Steel Ductwork 4. Transfer Air: Air from one conditioned space to another conditioned space 5. Exhaust air: Air from a space moved by a fan to directly outside. Also, air downstream of a heat recovery device to directly outside END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS 23 09 00 - 1/8 SECTION 23 09 00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities Construction. B.The general Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and Division 1- General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A.Scope of Work: Under the base bids, the controls as specified under Section 23 09 00 will be added to the project scope of work as a separate bid and pricing package. The following Controls manufacturers are approved for use on this project. No substitutions of manufacturers other than those listed will be considered. Input and output devices are not restricted to these manufacturers. Systems approved for bidding are: 1.Approved Manufacturers: a.Delta Control by ESC 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Controls Contractor. B.The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades. Reference the Division 23 Sections for details. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A.Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values. B.Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level each separated by a defined deadband. Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs are examples. C.Controls Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the Controls work. D.Control Sequence: A pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives. E.Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the controls software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like. F.Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the controls network. G.PC: Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer. PC “clones” assembled by a third-party Subcontractor are not acceptable. PC must also have documentation verifying that it has been tested and is completely compatible with all installed software and communicates with any peripherals such as modems, NEC cards, printers, hubs, zip drives, etc. that may be attached. H.Operator Workstation: Software and PC combination that serves as the graphic and/or text interface to EMCS 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00 23 09 00 - 2/8 I.Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the controls wiring and terminations. J.Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite and mount. K.Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the controls industry for real-time, integrated controls configurations. L.The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division: ADC Analog to Digital Converter AI Analog Input ANSI American National Standards Institute AO Analog Output ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AWG American Wire Gauge CFM Cubic Feet Per Minute DAC Digital to Analog Converter DDC Direct Digital Control DI (Binary) Digital Input DO (Binary) Digital Output EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMI Electromagnetic Interference EMCS Energy Management Control System FAS Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System HOA Hand-Off-Auto ID Identification IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers I/O Input/Output LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode MCC Motor Control Center NC Normally Closed NIC Not In Contract NO Normally Open OWS Operator Workstation OAH Outdoor Air Humidity OAT Outdoor Air Temperature PC Personal Computer RAM Random Access Memory RF Radio Frequency RFI Radio Frequency Interference RH Relative Humidity ROM Read Only Memory SPDT Single Pole Double Throw SPST Single Pole Single Throw TBA To Be Advised VAC Volts, Alternating Current VAV Variable Air Volume VDC Volts, Direct Current 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS 23 09 00 - 3/8 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.General: 1.The Controls Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 100-mile radius of the job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day-a-week basis. This branch facility shall provide the work for this project. This support facility shall have spare parts and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment required to install, commission and service the additional controls. 2.As evidence and assurance of the Contractor’s ability to support the Owner's system with service and parts, the Contractor must have been in business for at least the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed three projects comparable to the value of this contract in the preceding five years B.Quality Management Program: 1.Provide a competent and experienced Controls Project Manager employed by the Controls Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Controls Contractor employees in order to provide professional management service for the work. The Project Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the Controls Contractor 1.06 REFERENCES A.All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable: 1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards 2.National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code 3.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels 4.UL 916 Energy Management 5.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 6.NFPA 90A - Standard for The Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 7.NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment 8.Factory Mutual (FM) 9.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 10.National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 11.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 12.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 13.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 14.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 15.American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) 16.Electronics Industries Association (EIA) 17.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 18.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 19.Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices 20.Americans Disability Act (ADA) B.In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00 23 09 00 - 4/8 C.All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A.Control Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: 1.The Controls Contractor shall submit a complete controls package divided in two sections. The first section shall be delivered within 30 days after the contract has been awarded and the second section shall be delivered within 60 days after the contract has been awarded. 2.Allow at least 15 working days for the review of each package by the Engineer. 3.Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the Controls Contractor where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner. B.Submittal Section 1: 1.Product data sheets for all products including software. C.Submittal Section 2: 1.Controller wiring diagrams and sequences. Control drawings shall be created on AUTOCAD software, version 14 or newer. 2.Detailed Bill of Material, identifying part number, quantity, description, and optional features. 3.Details of all interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1.Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the following for the controls provided: a.Table of contents b.As-built Control Drawings using AutoCAD Version 14 or newer. Drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal. c.Manufacturer’s product data sheets for all products including software d.System Operator’s manuals. e.Wiring termination diagrams (use AutoCAD version 14 or newer) f.Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades g.Point to point checkout sheets with dates and checkout signatures h.Repair contact name and phone number 1.09 WARRANTY A.Standard Material and Labor Warranty: 1.Provide a one-year labor warranty on the Controls. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS 23 09 00 - 5/8 2.The controls components shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. If within one (1) year from the date of awarding of the Certificate of Occupancy any controls equipment is found to be defective, it will be replaced, repaired or adjusted by the Controls Contractor free of charge. The Controls Contractor is not responsible for the removal or reinstallation of any components that were originally installed by others, such as valves, dampers, wells, air flow stations, etc. 3.Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be done during Controls Contractor’s normal business hours unless there is an emergency. 4.Maintain an on-site record of all work done, all items removed from site, all items returned to site, all new replacement items installed and all remedial programming and database entry work undertaken including software revisions installed. Maintain a record of all re-calibrations required as a result of Warranty service. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Not Applicable 2.02 CONTROLS DESCRIPTION A.The controls work shall be an addition to the existing EMCS. It shall have controls and sensors that shall perform all the functions listed in the drawings. The new additional controls shall be added via graphics and/or text test screens to all operator workstations currently communicating with the existing EMCS. All controllers and workstations connected to or communicating with the new additional controls shall be updated as necessary to continue connection and/or communication. The points list is as follows: two (2) pump start stops, and two (2) pump statuses. Controls contractor is responsible for all programming and scheduling changes that need to occur though-out the existing EMCS to accommodate the new additional controls. B.The work of the single Controls Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents as are listed in Part 1 of this Section. C.The controls work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, etc. as Specified in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned controls. D.Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software and configurations to be provided for this Project. E.Manage and coordinate the controls work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades. 2.03 NODES A.HVAC Node: 1.HVAC Node shall provide direct digital control of HVAC systems. 2.A dedicated HVAC Node shall be configured and provided for the new additional controls. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00 23 09 00 - 6/8 3.The HVAC Node shall retain its function and setpoint information in the event of a power failure and shall return to normal operation upon restoration of power. PART 3 PERFORMANCE/EXECUTION 3.01 NSTALLATION PRACTICES A.Controls Wiring: 1.All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Controls, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Controls Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section. 2.All Controls wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with Controls manufacturer recommendations. 3.The sizing type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the Controls Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the Controls Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components. 4.Wire/conduit ratios shall follow the same wire/conduit ratios included in Division 26. 5.Class 2 Wiring: a.All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit or be plenum rated and shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements. b.Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Inaccessible locations such as “hard lid” ceilings require conduit. c.Wire supports and be installed per local wiring code requirements. As a default, wire shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. d.Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Engineer. e.All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached. f.Provide firestopping for all penetrations used by dedicated Controls conduits and raceways using approved fire resistive sealant. All other project firestopping to be by other trade. g.All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls or other structure, shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway. h.Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square. i.No penetrations in structural elements shall be made before receipt of written approval from the Structural Engineer. 6.Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring. 7.Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide necessary instruments and equipment to demonstrate that: a.All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits and grounds. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS 23 09 00 - 7/8 b.All circuits are free from unspecified grounds; that resistance to ground of all circuits is no less than 50 megaohms. c.All circuits are free from induced voltages 8.Provide complete testing for all cables used under this Contract. Provide all equipment, tools, and personnel as necessary to conduct these tests. 9.Provide for complete grounding of all signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops. B.Controls Line Voltage Power Source: 1.120-volt AC circuits used for the controls shall be taken from panelboards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26. Coordinate circuit installation with Division 26. Division 26 shall be responsible for the installation of 120 VAC controls circuits. 2.Circuits used for the controls shall be dedicated and shall not be used for any other purposes. 3.Terminal unit controllers may use 120-volt AC power from motor power circuits. C.Controls Identification Standards: 1.Node Identification: All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the outside of the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. 2.Cable and/or conduit shall be labeled at suitable intervals with the controlled unit’s name. Labeling shall be sufficient to trace cable from device to unit. 3.Specify a different wire color for analog, digital, power and communication wiring. Include wiring color on control drawings legends. 4.Raceway Identification: All the covers to junction and pull boxes of the control’s raceways shall be labeled. 5.Wire Identification: All low and line voltage control wiring shall be identified by a number, as referenced to the associated shop drawing and as-built drawing, at each end of the conductor or cable. Identification number shall be permanently secured to the conductor or cable and shall be typed. D.Node Installation: 1.The controls panels and cabinets shall be mounted at shoulder height wherever possible. All panels shall be accessible. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and Electrical and Mechanical Contractors. E.Input Devices: 1.All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation and shall be of the type and accuracy suitable for this specific application. 2.Locate components in accessible local control panels wherever possible. 3.The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc. F.HVAC Output Devices: 1.All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation and shall be suitable in type and accuracy for this specific application. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers, etc. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00 23 09 00 - 8/8 3.02 TRAINING A.The Controls Contractor shall provide the following training services: 1.Provide one half day of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as-built drawings and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations. Training may be split into smaller sessions on different days if the Owner prefers. 2.Supply a list of available factory training classes and contact information. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A.Acceptance Verification Document is defined as a series of check sheets that include all controls and functions. Each point entry shall be signed and dated verifying that each point and function has been fully calibrated and tested. B.Conduct functional performance tests to demonstrate that controls systems maintain setpoints and operates through the full range of operations. The commissioning agent will provide functional tests that the Controls Contractor shall review and provide comments on the tests for incorporation into the final test documents. C.Provide all necessary specialist labor, materials and tools to demonstrate to the Engineer that the controls have been commissioned and are operating in compliance with the contract. Prepare a list of noted deficiencies signed by both the Engineer and the Controls Contractor. D.Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 21 00 - 1/2 SECTION 23 21 00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Includes sleeving and sealing of piping and ductwork 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions, Division 1 B. Section 23 31 13 – Steel Ductwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops B. UL 1479: Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submittal requirements for this Section 1. Seals 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Products shall comply with Section 20 00 00, paragraph 2.01, Approved Manufacturers. B. Fire Seals: 3M, Dow Corning, General Electric, Rectorseal Metacaulk 2.02 DUCT SLEEVES A. Size: Inside dimension of sleeves shall be at least ½" larger than the outside dimensions of the duct or duct covering on all sides. B. Ends: Sleeve ends shall be cut flush with finished surface. C. Material - Non-structural: Sleeves shall be fabricated from 20-gauge galvanized steel, shall be continuous around the interior without holes or openings, and shall match the configuration of the item being sleeved. D. Material - Structural: Sleeves through structural elements shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe (round openings) and welded steel supporting elements (sizes/arrangement as shown on drawings) for other openings. 2.03 SEALS A. Seals in Interior Fire Rated Assemblies: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and shall be UL classified per UL 1479 as a through-penetration fire stop device. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00 23 21 00 - 2/2 B. Seals in Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors: 1. Ducts: Silicone type sealant, designed for use with duct material involved as weatherproof sealant. C. Seals in Other Areas: Packed fiberglass or wool insulation, where no weatherproofing or adhesive properties are required; otherwise, sealants shall be silicone type, as specified in applicable Division 7 Specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCT SLEEVES A. Provide duct sleeves for all round ducts less than 15 inches in diameter where the duct passes through any floors, walls, ceilings, partitions, or roofs and similar elements. B. Provide duct sleeves for all square and rectangular ducts having their largest dimension 14 inches and less where the duct passes through any floors, walls, ceilings, partitions, roofs, and similar elements. C. Round ducts larger than 15 inches in diameter, and square of rectangular ducts larger than 14 inches in any dimension, shall have framed openings where the duct passes through any element. Such framed openings shall be of the same type as the structural materials used in the wall and shall comply with materials specified for this project. Sleeves shall be provided in addition to the framed opening where any void space(s) occurs through the penetration (as through CMU walls, double walls, etc.). D. Set sleeves plumb or level, in proper position and location, tightly fitted into the work. E. Fill openings around outside of duct sleeve with same material as surrounding construction, or with material of equivalent fire and smoke rating. F. Sleeves are not required for penetrations through existing single solid elements, having no voids, at the location where the duct passes through the element (e.g., precast concrete panels with pre-framed openings, core drilled/saw cut solid concrete, etc.). Where a sleeve is required, such sleeve shall continue all the way through any solid items within that element however. G. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for use with insulated pipes. H. Sleeves for fire dampers shall be as specified for fire dampers and be in compliance with the damper UL listing. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALS A. Provide seals around all piping and ducts passing through walls, floors, roofs, foundations, footings, grade beams, partitions, and similar elements. B. Seals shall be of material and workmanship to maintain the fire and smoke rating of element being penetrated. Seals ability to maintain the rating of the element being penetrated shall be listed in UL Laboratories Building Materials Directory or otherwise confirmed by an approved listing agency. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to submit shop drawings and technical data showing seals and systems proposed, and corresponding agency approval. The Contractor shall also be responsible to submit any data as required by local agencies to satisfy them that the Contractor's proposed fire seals are satisfactory. C. Seals shall be watertight where the penetration may be exposed to water or moisture. D. Duct penetrations through roof or exterior wall assemblies shall be provided with flashings for a weathertight assembly in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Such openings shall be sealed to be weatherproof. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK 23 31 13 - 1/8 SECTION 23 31 13 STEEL DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A.Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing above-ground ductwork and related items specified below and shown on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A.General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section B.Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Conditions C.Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment D.Section 23 07 13 - Equipment/Ductwork Insulation E.Section 23 33 00 - HVAC Specialties 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A.Duct liner B.Access doors C.Volume dampers D.Duct Sealers E.Duct Closure Collars F.Turning vanes 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable 1.05 DEFINITIONS A.Duct Sizes: All duct dimensions shown are inside clear dimensions. Where inside duct lining is specified or indicated, duct dimensions are to the inside face of lining. B.Low Pressure System: Velocities less than 2,000 fpm and static pressure in duct 2 inches w.g. or less C.Medium Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct up through 6 inches w.g D.High Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct over 6 inches w.g. and up to 10 inches w.g E.Primary Duct System: Any duct between an air handler and a terminal (capable of heating and/or cooling) in a variable air volume or induction terminal system. F.Gauges: Steel sheet and wire are U.S. Standard Gauge; aluminum sheet is Brown and Sharpe Gauge 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00 23 31 13 - 2/8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Not Applicable 2.02 DUCTS A.Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal, except as indicated. Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with G 60 coating. B.Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible, provide turning vanes. C.Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30° divergence and 45° convergence. D.Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches (200 mm) and smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. 2.03 DUCT JOINTS A.General: Duct with sides or diameter up to and including 36 inches shall be as scheduled below. Max. Side Inches Required Minimum Metal Gauges Steel, U.S. Standard Gauge Type of Transverse Joint Connections Bracing Required Under 13"26 S-drive, pocket or bar slips on 7 - 10" centers None 13" to 24"24 S-drive, pocket or bar slips on 7-10" centers None 25" to 30"24 S-drive, 1" pocket or 1" bar slips on 7'-10" centers 1"x1"x1/8" angles 4' from joints 31" to 36"22 Drive 1"pocket or 1"bar slips on 7'-10" centers 1"x1"x1/8" angles 4' from joints B.Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches, transverse duct joint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, or WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G" Type connection). C.Ducts 48 inches and larger, Ductmates/35, Nexus, or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "J" Type connection). D.Proprietary duct connections may be used on other sizes, Ductmate, WDCI, or equal. 2.04 ROUND DUCT A.Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with G 60 coating. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK 23 31 13 - 3/8 B.Gauge Selection Table: Maximum 2" w.g. Static Positive Maximum 2" w.g. Static Negative Duct Diameter in Inches Spiral Seam Gauge Longitudinal Seam Gauge Spiral Seam Gauge Longitudinal Seam Gauge 3 thru 8 9 thru 14 15 thru 26 27 thru 36 37 thru 50 51 thru 60 61 thru 84 28 28 26 24 22 20 18 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 24 24 22 20 18 16 14 C.Provide insulation where required by the Insulation Schedule in Section 23 07 13 - Equipment/Ductwork Insulation. 2.05 SPIRAL DUCT A.The outer pressure sheet shall be manufactured from galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-67 in the following minimum gauges: Nominal Size Range Solid Spiral Wound Duct Outer Pressure Shell Solid Welded Fitting Outer Pressure Shell 3"-12"26 Ga.20 Ga. 13"-24"24 Ga.20 Ga. 25"-34"22 Ga.20 Ga. 35"-48"20 Ga.18 Ga. 50"-58"18 Ga.16 Ga. 2.06 DUCT LINER A.Densities and R-value: 1.R-3.3: 1.0 inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner 2.R-5.3: 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner 3.R-7: 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct line B.Duct Liner: 1.'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F (0.036 at 24°C) 2.Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting" 3.Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min (25.4 m/sec) 4.Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type 5.Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened 6.Approved Manufacturers: a.Manville Permacote Linacoustic (HP) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00 23 31 13 - 4/8 C.Spiral Duct Liner : 1.For ductwork requiring 1-inch (25 mm) Spiracoustic Plus System Lining: a.The installed 1-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 4.3 (.76) at 75°F (24°C) mean temperature, and Noise Reduction Coefficients (NRC) per ASTM C 423, Type "A" mounting. b.Metal duct with inside diameters from 8 inches to 18 inches (203 to 457 mm) shall be lined with 1-inch Preformed Round Liner. 1)Approved Manufacturers: a)Permacote Spiracoustic Liner c.Metal duct with inside diameters from 18 inches to 32 inches (457 to 813 mm) shall be lined with 1-inch Round Liner Board. 1)Approved Manufacturers a)Spiracoustic Plus “SD” Liner d.Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 34 inches (364 mm) shall be lined with 1-inch Round Liner Board. 1)Approved Manufacturers a)Spiracoustic Plus “LD” Liner 2.For ductwork requiring 1 1/2-inch (38 mm) Lining: a.The installed 1 1/2-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 6.3 (1.11) at 75°F (24°C) mean temperature, and a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.95 per ASTM C 423, Type "A" mounting. b.Metal duct with inside diameters from 9 inches to 18 inches (229 to 457 mm) shall be lined with 1 1/2-inch Preformed Round Liner. 1)Approved Manufacturers: a)Permacote Spiracoustic Liner c.Metal duct with inside diameters from 22 inches to 38 inches (559 to 965 mm), shall be lined with 1 1/2-inch Round Liner Board. 1)Approved Manufacturers: a)Spiracoustic Plus “SD” Liner d.Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 40 inches (1.02 m), shall be lined with 1 1/2-inch Spiracoustic Plus LD Round Liner Board. 2.07 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS A.At each backdraft damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built 1" insulated access door with hinges and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers. Construction shall be galvanized sheet metal, 22 ga. minimum frame and 24 ga. minimum door. Minimum door shall be 12x12. If duct is too small for 12" door, then maximum door size shall be installed in duct. B.Access doors for fire damper shall have a minimum clear opening of 12"x12" or as specified on Drawings to easily service fire damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire dampers. C.Approved Manufacturers: 1.Nailor - Hart Industries Inc 2.Cesco - Advanced Air 3.AirBalance Fire/Seal 4.Louvers & Dampers 5.Kees Inc 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK 23 31 13 - 5/8 6.Ductmate Industries Inc "Sandwich" Access Door 7.National Controlled Air Inc. 8.Greenheck 9.Elmdor 2.08 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.Provide flexible equipment connections between ductwork and equipment. See Section 23 33 00 - HVAC Specialties. 2.09 VOLUME DAMPERS A.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B.Fabricate splitter dampers of same material and gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two gages heavier for larger sizes, secured with continuous hinge or rod, operated with minimum 1/4- inch (6 mm) diameter rod. C.Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm). D.Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch (300 x 825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E.Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter and smaller, provide end bearings. F.Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where width exceeds 30 inches (750 mm), provide regulator at both ends. 2.10 DUCT HANGERS A.See Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment. 2.11 DUCT SEALANT AND ADHESIVES A.Duct Sealant technical makeup shall be water based, solvent-free and of the synthetic latex family. Sealants shall be UL 181 Listed, meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes and be rated to ± 15 inches water gauge. Sealants shall have flame spread of 0 and smoke development of 0 when tested in accordance to ASTM E-84. They shall be formulated to withstand working temperatures of -25°F to +200°F. All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under ASTM C-732 (Artificial Weathering) and pass ASTM C-734 (Low Temperature Flexibility after Artificial Weathering). All sealants shall be of an elastomeric nature, have a minimum weight of 12 pounds and a minimum solids content by weight of 66% ± 2%. Sealants shall be resistant to cracking, peeling, mold and mildew. Sealants shall also have excellent water and UV resistance. Sealants shall meet FDA, USDA and EPA standards as well as meet NFPA 90A and 90B requirements. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1010 or DP 1020 duct sealant or equal. B.Solvent based duct sealant VOC shall be less than or equal to 50 g/l and be UL 723 Classified with a flame spread of 0 and a smoke development of 0. Sealant shall have passed 1000 hours of QUV accelerated outdoor aging testing. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090 duct sealant or equal. 1.All traverse joints, longitudinal seams and penetrations in duct systems shall be sealed with duct sealant of the type specified. Spiral lockseams are not longitudinal seams and do not require duct sealant. All sealant shall be applied per the manufactures’ recommendations. Joints that are not fully welded shall be sealed. For spiral and flat oval duct slip connections; coat both the female and male ends. The slip connections should then be brushed over with an additional coat 2 to 3 inches wide 20 to 40 mils thick. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00 23 31 13 - 6/8 2.All conditioned air supply ducts, return ducts and fresh air intakes shall have all joints and seams sealed or welded, except spiral seams round and flat oval ducts, which are exempt. 3.Seal sealants and joint sealants shall not be used as a substitute for good workmanship. No ductwork will be covered or installed until inspected and pressure tested if necessary. C.Gaskets for TDC, TDF and applied flange connections shall meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes. The gasket shall meet UL 723, ASTME E-84, NFPA 90A and 90B requirements as well as FDA, USDA and EPA standards. The tape shall be 5/8 inches by 3/16 inches and applied according to the manufactures’ directions. Expanded or extruded foam gaskets are not acceptable. Gasket shall be Design Polymerics DP 1040 Butyl Gasket Tape or equal. D.Exterior Ductwork: Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090, or equal. 2.12 DUCT CLOSURE COLLARS A.General: Closure collars shall provide closure of opening between duct and opening in element penetrated and shall abut tight up to and overlap duct and shall consist of rolled angle material (for round ducts) and welded framed angles (for rectangular/round ducts). B.Size: Closure collars shall be sized to match duct/opening applied to and shall have minimum 2-inch overlap on duct side and 2-inch overlap at opening/ penetrated element side but shall completely cover opening in element penetrated with minimum 1-inch overlap to undisturbed element (i.e., wall, floor, etc.). C.Material: Closure collars shall be fabricated of 20-gauge galvanized steel for ducts 15 inches diameter and less and shall be fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel duct for all larger ducts and all square and rectangular ducts. 2.13 TURNING VANES A.Turning vanes may be either Contractor or factory fabricated. Factory fabricated vanes shall be Barber Colman "Airturns" or approved. B.Vanes and runners shall be fabricated of minimum 24 gauge galvanized. C.Turning vanes shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. For duct widths less than 19 inches, vanes may be single wall construction; for widths greater than 19 inches, vanes shall be double wall "airfoil" type. D.Turning vanes shall be equally spaced, parallel to each other, and securely attached to runners. E.For elbows where the inlet and outlet dimensions are not the same, modify vane shape or angle to provide optimum turning. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.Ducts: 1.Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed. 2.Duct panels through 48-inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or beaded. 3.Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center. 4.Securely anchor ducts to building structure with screws. 5.Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation. 6.Round, horizontal ducts shall be hung with bands, which extend the entire perimeter of the duct. 7.Ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK 23 31 13 - 7/8 8.Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members. 9.Make duct take-offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings. 10.Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside duct liner. Dimension shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed. 11.Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof. 12.Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints airtight using specified duct sealer. 13.Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts two layers of Hardcast tape installed with Hardcast HC-20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations. 14.Ducts installed on mechanical space floor or walkway where ducts may be subject to abuse shall have Ductmate/35 or (heavy) SMACNA "J" type connection on all joints. 15.All exposed ducts shall be spiral. 16.Provide duct transitions to equipment openings. B.Duct Liner: 1.Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of a UL listed adhesive. 2.Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or manufacturer. Pin length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer. 3.All exposed edges of the fibrous type liner must be factory or field coated. For systems operating at 4000 fpm or higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges. 4.Repair fibrous type liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive. 5.Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 6.Provide duct liner for all return air ducts unless specifically excluded in Section 23 07 13. 7.Provide liner for all supply duct unless specifically excluded from Section 23 07 13. 8.Provide ductliner for first 10’ in and out of all exhaust fans (excluding dishwasher, kitchen fume, and particulate fans). C.Turning Vanes: 1.Install turning vanes in all square duct turns, and at locations shown on drawings. 2.Securely attach turning vane runners to ductwork. D.Flexible Connections: See Section 23 33 00 - HVAC Specialties. E.Balancing Dampers: 1.Provide each take-off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch. 2.Anchor dampers securely to duct. 3.Install dampers in main ducts within insulation. 4.Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal. F.Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers: Install and anchor securely. G.Adjustable Lock Splitter Dampers: 1.Dampers in equipment rooms shall be complete with locking quadrant. 2.Other dampers shall have concealed ceiling damper regulator with plate. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00 23 31 13 - 8/8 H.Painting of Ductwork: Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black. I.Ductwork Leakage Criteria: 1.All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements as defined on page 1-6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition. 2.Constant Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork a.Allowable Leakage – per SMACNA 3.Constant Volume Systems/Return Ductwork a.Return Ductwork – per SMACNA 4.Variable Air Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork a.Fan to VAV Boxes -- 1% of design cfm b.VAV Boxes to Registers -- 2% of design cfm 5.Variable Air Volume Systems/Return Ductwork a.Return Ductwork -- 2% of design cfm J.Ductwork Leakage Testing: 1.Duct leakage testing is required for all duct systems constructed to a pressure class of 3” water column or greater per the 2015 Washington State Energy Code, Section C403.2.8.3.3. 2.Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, insulation, etc. 3.All leak testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or representative of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by the Engineer or his/her representative, shall be considered invalid and will be redone. 4.Ductwork shall be tested in accordance with the requirements outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and shown to have a (CL) less than or equal to 4.0. 5.Duct leakage, in excess of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, shall be repaired and have the test re-performed until the leakage rate is within acceptable levels. 6.Submit leakage test report identifying on a plan all the ducts tested and tested leakage rate. K.Duct Cleanliness Criteria: Unless otherwise specified, the delivery, storage, and installation of all un-lined ductwork shall comply with the intermediate duct cleanliness level of SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines. All lined and acoustic duct shall comply with the advanced level. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES 23 33 00 - 1/4 SECTION 23 33 00 HVAC SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified material as described in Contract Documents. B. Filters used in air handling units and heat pumps. C. Flexible ductwork from supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers where indicated on drawings. D. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft dampers 2. Filters and filter housing 3. Flexible connections 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions B. Division 01 C. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements D. Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Backdraft dampers B. Filters C. Flexible ductwork D. Flexible equipment connections 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Backdraft dampers B. Filters (Summarized list including equipment tag and size and quantity of filter per unit.) 1. Provide dates or projected dates of extra filter replacement. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Bear the AMCA seal and UL label, NSF approved. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Not Applicable 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 HVAC SPECIALTIES Job Number 2210142.00 23 33 00 - 2/4 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS (COUNTER BALANCED) A. General: 0.125 inches extruded aluminum frame, 0.07 inches aluminum blades with extruded vinyl edges, synthetic bearings, counterbalance, adjustable zinc plated bar on blades. B. Backdraft dampers are to be factory set to open at 0.01" w.c. of building pressure and shall have a maximum static pressure drop of 0.05" w.c. at 700 fpm per AMCA Standard 500. Backdraft dampers shall have a leakage rate at no more than 20 CFM/sq. ft. at 1" w.c. of static pressure with a dimension of 24" or greater and 40 CFM/sq. ft. at 1” w.c. of static pressure with dimension smaller than 24” per AMCA Standard 500D. C. Approved Manufacturer: 1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck 2.03 FILTERS A. 2" MERV 8: 1. General: 30% efficient filters as specified herein shall be medium efficiency, pleated panel type, disposable filters; Farr 30/30 or approved and shall have an average efficiency of 25-30% atmospheric and 90-92% arrestance by ASHRAE Standard 52-76 unless instructed otherwise. 2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm. 3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 2000 CFM shall not exceed 0.31" w.g. 4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g. 5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings. 6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches. 7. Approved Manufacturers: a. Farr Co b. Airguard c. Purolator d. Eco-Air B. 2" or 4" MERV 13 Low Static: 1. General: 80% efficient filters as specified herein shall be high efficiency, pleated panel type, disposable filters; Filtration Group MERV 13 Green Pleat or approved and shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 52.2 2007. 2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm. 3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 500 fpm shall not exceed 0.38" w.g. and 24"x24"x4" shall not exceed 0.23" w.g. 4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g. 5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings. 6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES 23 33 00 - 3/4 7. Approved Manufacturers: a. Filtration Group C. 2" or 4" MERV 13: 1. General: 80% efficient filters as specified herein shall be high efficiency, pleated panel type, disposable filters and shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when evaluated under the guidelines of current ASHRAE Standard 52.2. 2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm. 3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 500 CFM shall not exceed 0.41" w.g. and 24"x24"x4" shall not exceed 0.35" w.g. 4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g. 5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings. 6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches. 7. Approved Manufacturers: a. Farr b. Airguard c. Purolator d. Eco-Air 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Formable, flexible, circular duct shall have a fiberglass scrim (or equivalent) and retain its cross-section, shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict air flow after bending. B. Normal 1-1/2 inches thick, 3/4 lb/cu ft density fiberglass insulation with airtight, see-through polyethylene or polyester core, sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible assembly. C. Assembly including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class 1 requirements of NFPA 90A and be UL 181 rated, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold 2. Flexible Air Movers Inc 3. J.P. Lamborn 4. General Flex Corp 5. Young & Co. Mfg 165 6. Thermaflex 'GKM' 7. Cleavaflex 2.05 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: 30 oz. closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fire retardant, waterproof, airtight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 250°F. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 HVAC SPECIALTIES Job Number 2210142.00 23 33 00 - 4/4 B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ventglas by Ventfabrics 2. DuroDyne MFN PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Backdraft Dampers: Provide access doors to backdraft dampers. B. Filters and Filter Housing: 1. Contractor to install temporary filters to provide temporary sealing of all duct systems during the construction period to prevent the entry of dirt, dust and debris into the duct systems. These systems that are operated during the construction period shall have temporary filters installed over all inlets and filters installed in the air handling equipment. Filters installed in equipment shall be same type as final filters required for the units. Temporary air inlet type filters shall be taped over all inlets to completely filter all air drawn into the systems. 2. Contractor to provide and install four (4) complete sets of all filters as scheduled below: a. At equipment start-up b. Prior to balancing system c. Three (3) months after building occupancy d. During the one-year warranty to be scheduled with Owner 3. Construct and install filter housings to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide sheet metal blanks, felt, rubber, and/or neoprene seals as necessary. 4. Furnish Owner with schedule of filter sizes for each air handler. C. Flexible Equipment Connections: 1. Provide insulated flexible equipment connections between ducts and vibrating equipment. Fans which are internally isolated with spring isolators do not require flexible connections, unless indicated on the plans. 2. Install flexible connections with sufficient slack to permit 2 inches of horizontal or vertical movement of ducts or equipment at connection point without stretching the flexible material. 3. Where installed exposed to weather, provide a galvanized "hat" channel protecting top and vertical stretches of flexible connector from sunlight and weather. D. Flexible Ductwork: 1. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using ten-foot maximum lengths. 2. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches with duct sealer and securing duct in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2-inch-wide metal cinch bands and sheet metal screws. Tape exterior of flex to duct ahead of damper. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS 23 36 00 - 1/2 SECTION 23 36 00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: Furnish and install specified material as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Fan terminal boxes B. VAV Shut-off boxes C. Sound Data (discharge, intake, and radiated) 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Submittal Data B. Unit Operation and Maintenance Manual PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Trane B. Titus C. Nailor D. Price E. ENVIRO-TEC (ETI) 2.02 FAN TERMINAL VAV BOX A. Fan Terminal Box Unit: 1. Horizontal constant fan series. 2. Standard UL approved unit consists of: Casing, fan, motor and drive, coils, single point electrical connection, control power transformer, fan relay, control box, filter section, and electrical components B. Casing: 1. Single wall constructed of 22-gauge minimum galvanized steel. Provide with flange at outlet and inlets for duct connections. 2. Insulated with 1", 1.55 lb./cu. ft. density glass fiber, coated to retard erosion, meets NFPA 90A and UL 181. 3. Entire bottom panel to be removable for service of components. C. Fan, Motor and Drive: 1. Forward curved, centrifugal type, aluminum wheel with factory-built housing and inlet cones, direct drive. 2. Fans are statically and dynamically balanced. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS Job Number 2210142.00 23 36 00 - 2/2 3. Motors to be permanently lubricated, permanent split capacitor type with thermal overload protection. 4. Motors rated for 100,000-hour life 5. Motors to be factory run tested in unit 6. ECM motor with factory mounted controller to change fan motor speed. Adjustment knob located external to control panel. 7. Fan Control Relay - 24 VAC coil, rated as required for fan motor, suitable for connection to terminal unit controller. D. Damper Assemblies of 16-gauge, galvanized steel shall be multiple opposed blade construction arranged to close at 45 degrees from full open to minimize air turbulence. Damper blades shall be fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the fully closed position, air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalog rating a 3” w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with factory mounted DDC controls including actuators, which shall be fully coordinated with Controls Contractor prior to equipment ordering. Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the flow pick up and the controller. 2.03 SHUT-OFF VAV BOX A. Casing: 1. Unit casing shall be 22-gauge, galvanized steel with round or flat oval inlets (flanged). 2. Units shall be internally lined with 1” dual density fiberglass insulation. Edges shall be sealed against airflow erosion. Units shall meet NFPA 90A and UL 181 standards. B. Inlet Damper Assemblies shall be of galvanized steel construction with a fully closed leakage rate no greater than 2% at 3.0” wg. Damper blades shall be fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the fully closed position, air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalog rating a 3” w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with factory mounted DDC controls including actuators, which shall be fully coordinated with Controls Contractor prior to equipment ordering. Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the flow pick up and the controller. 2.04 ELECTRIC COILS A. Provide electric coils sized and staged per equipment schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Physical size and noise criteria will be strictly enforced. Approved manufacturers are listed for quality only, not for noise and size. It is up to the equipment supplier to provide equal VAV boxes to those listed on the schedule. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 AIR TERMINALS 23 37 00 - 1/2 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR TERMINALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete, all air terminals described in Contract Documents 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section B. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Condition 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. Grilles, registers, and diffusers 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not Applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (GRD) A. Shall be as scheduled on drawings. B. Provide the various grilles, registers and diffusers shown on the plans and of the various types herein before specified. All terminals with prime-coat finish shall be installed before the walls and ceiling is painted, in order that they may be finish painted by the General Contractor. Those with factory finish or aluminum construction shall be installed after the walls and ceilings are painted. All air terminals located in shower, toilet rooms, locker and dressing rooms shall be of aluminum construction w/baked off-white finish. All other Air Terminals shall be of a standard steel construction; wall-mounted terminals shall be prime coat finish; ceiling diffusers, exhaust and return air terminals shall have factory- applied baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect. C. Approved Manufacturers: (subject to submittal approval): 1. Anemostat 2. Nailor 3. Kees 4. Krueger 5. Price 6. Titus 7. Tuttle & Bailey 8. Shoemaker (except 700MA) 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS A. Bird Screen: 1/2-inch mesh, constructed of either 0.051-inch aluminum wire or 19-gauge galvanized steel wire B. Insect Screen: 14 x 18, 0.009” galvanized steel mesh 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 AIR TERMINALS Job Number 2210142.00 23 37 00 - 2/2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The interior of duct connection including opposed blade damper and all visible duct interiors at connection shall be painted matte black. B. Each air terminal shall be installed with a spun rubber gasket between the flange and the frame or wall. C. Each air terminal with flexible duct connection shall have a square-to-round transition adapter box. D. Anchor securely into openings. E. All air terminals that supply, return, and/or exhaust air, which are not required to have an OBD, shall be provided with a volume damper. F. Provide round neck to flex duct reducers as required. G. Provide bird screened openings (1/2" mesh) on all duct openings where indicated and where openings do not have grilles or registers. H. All outlet and inlets exposed to the weather shall be adequately flashed and installed in a manner to assure complete weatherproofness. I. Provide blank-off panels on louver portion not connected to a duct. Blank-off panels to be painted flat black. J. Provide insect screen where indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 23 90 00 - 1/1 SECTION 23 90 00 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Limited To: Demolition and maintaining existing systems B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 20 00 00 apply to this Section. 1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION Not applicable PART 2 PRODUCTS Not applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing Mechanical equipment including, but not limited to piping, fixtures, HVAC equipment, ductwork in areas shown on the drawings and indicated thereon. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of all Mechanical equipment that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or required. C. Any existing equipment to which modifications are made under this contract shall be painted and labeled in accordance with specifications for new materials. D. All Mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of and shall be transported, stored, or disposed as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 1/13 SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A.Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for all work in Division 26 and 27. See Division 1 for sequence of work. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A.It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and successful operation all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown in the plans. The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all electrical systems shown on the plans or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other divisions of this specification (or by the Owner) shall be connected under this division. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. B.By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the Contract Documents, existing site and building conditions, and has determined that these documents do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this Contract. 1.03 SCOPE OF BASIC BID A.Included in Division 26 and 27 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all electrical installations except as specifically excluded. In general, this includes all labor, equipment, tools, etc., to complete the electrical work. 1.04 RELATED WORK A.Temporary Power and Lighting – Division 1 B.Mechanical Control Wiring – See Division 23 C.Cutting and Patching - See Division 1 D.Trenching, backfill and asphalt work – See Division 2 1.05 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A.The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of the following: ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code ---State Electrical Code NESC National Electrical Safety Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association U.L.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers ---Federal, State and Local Building Codes 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 2/13 ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories B.If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification, the codes are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to governing codes. Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans and specifications which may be in excess of, but not in conflict with, requirements of the Governing Codes. 1.06 PERMITS & FEES A.The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. B.The Contractor shall consult with and follow the requirements of the local fire, power, telephone, and television utilities serving the area and shall coordinate his work with them. C.Utility connection and hook-up charges for power, telephone and television shall be paid by the Owner directly to the utility. The Electrical Contractor is required to provide any and all coordination necessary to support the utility connection, file for application of service (or assist the Owner in filing for application of service) and coordinate dates for service with the utilities. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A.When "Provide" is used, it shall be interpreted as "furnishing and installing complete in operating condition". B.When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as "all Contract Drawings for all Disciplines". C.When "Contractors" is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor. 1.08 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A.The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. The equipment layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, does not indicate all fittings, hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation. B.Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications, or anything covered in the specifications but not shown on the drawings, shall be as if covered in both. In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the Engineer will select the method to be used. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all measurements before proceeding with the work. C.Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact location of outlets. Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are subject to revision as may be necessary or desirable at the time of installation. Precise location in every case shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. D.The contractor shall review the manufacturer provided installation instructions for each piece of equipment prior to rough-in. Any conflict between the drawings, specifications and installation instructions shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention immediately. The contractor will not be paid for any reinstallation required due to failing to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations or requirements unless specifically directed by the engineer, in writing, after the conflict has been identified. 1.09 PROTECTION A.The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect same, and replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance. See Division 1 for detailed requirements. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 3/13 1.10 HOUSEKEEPING A.All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat, cold, and the weather. B.All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation. C.All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed, and at completion of job. 1.11 TEMPORARY USE A.Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the supervision of the Electrical Contractor. B.Temporary power and lighting for use during construction shall be provided per the requirements of the Division 1 specifications. 1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A.The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as-built set of prints, on which all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible manner with red colored pencil. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders, and Contractor revisions. The Contractor is responsible to revise panel schedules and load calculations as required. B.Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1", giving the number of conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included. C.The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, lighting fixtures, lighting controls, etc. D.Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and one set of neatly marked up as-built drawings to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner. E.Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in AutoCAD R-2013 format and full-size pdf to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner. F.See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems. 1.13 WARRANTY A.Provide a written warranty that the Division 26 and 27 work is free from mechanical and electrical defects. Contractor shall replace and repair, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any parts of the installation which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final acceptance or date of substantial completion, provided that such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship, or failure to follow the specifications and drawings. B.See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems. 1.14 INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A.Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23. B.A preliminary, complete copy, except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Five (5) bound, corrected copies shall be delivered to the Owner 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods as specified under Section 1.16 "Instruction Periods" after review of the preliminary copy. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the completed form. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 4/13 C.Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, replacement parts lists, and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed under the project. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation. Manuals shall contain original brochures supplied by manufacturers. Xerox copies of originals will not be accepted. D.Each type of device provided shall be identified in the O & M Manual using the same identification as shown on the drawings and specifications. The information included must be the exact equipment installed not the complete "line" of the Manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier is not acceptable. The following information shall be provided for each device: 1.Manufacturer's name, address and phone number 2.Local supplier's name, address and phone number 3.Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturer's part numbers 4.Installation instructions 5.Recommended maintenance items including maintenance procedure and recommended interval of maintenance listed in hours of operation, calendar unity or other similar time unit E.The O & M Manual shall be assembled as detailed in Section 01 70 00. As a minimum, the following sections shall be broken out: F.The O & M Manual shall be assembled in a loose leaf, 3-ring, hard cover binder and electronically on compact disc. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Division 26 and 27 Contractor, and year of completion. The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, and year of completion. As a minimum, the following selection shall be broken out: 1.Light Fixtures 2.Fire Alarm System 3.Intrusion Alarm 4.Access Control System 5.Audio/Visual Presentation Systems 6.Sound Systems 7.Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 8.Data Network 9.Uninterruptible Power Supply System 10.Electrical System Protective Device Study 11.Ground Fault Testing Results G.Wiring Diagrams for each system shall be complete for the specific system installed under the Contract. "Typical" Line Diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 5/13 1.15 WORK NOT INCLUDED A.Indicated motors, controls, and equipment as described in other divisions shall be furnished by other trades, but shall be moved, set and wired to electrical controls and power supply by the Electrical Contractor. B.Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these specifications. Any details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to that portion which is a part of this Contract. 1.16 INSTRUCTION PERIODS A.Upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the authority(s) having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers’ representatives when so specified. B.Scheduled Instruction periods shall be: 1.Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 1/2 day 2.Fire Alarm System 1/2 day 3.Security System 1/2 day 4.Access Control System 1/2 day 5.Data Network 1/2 day 6.Daylighting Control Systems 1/2 day C.Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid. 1.17 COMPLETION OF WORK A.Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00 for project closeout. B.Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a completion letter stating that he has fulfilled all the requirements of his Contract for Division 26 and 27 work as set forth in the drawings and specifications and that all items in pre-final inspection lists submitted by the Engineer have been satisfactorily completed. C.Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division 26 and 27 work and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate. D.Prior to or at the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall, as outlined in detail in the specifications, complete the delivery of all the following items: 1.Completion Letter 2.Certificate of Final Inspection. Electrical Inspector Fire Department COMPLETION OF WORK - 26 00 00 – 1.17 3.Warranty to Owner (with copy for Engineer) SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS – 26 00 00 – 1.13 4.Marked Set, Electronic Media Set on Solid- State Drive-in AutoCAD R-2013 Format, and full-size PDF of As-Built Electrical Drawings GENERAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 26 00 00 – 1.12 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 6/13 5.Certificate of Completion and Document Requirements for Protective Device Study ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY – 26 05 73 6.Motor Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(D) 7.Phase Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(E) 8.OHMIC Test Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(B) 9.Ground Fault Settings 10.Panelboard and Special Equipment Shop Drawings and Final Approved List of Materials Installed. MATERIALS, GENERAL – 26 00 00 – 2.03 11.Certificate of Feeders Torque Results WIRES AND CABLES – 26 05 19 12.* Receipt from person to whom delivered the following spare glasses, plastic diffusers, lamps, and ballast fuses. LIGHTING FIXTURES – 26 50 00 13.* Receipt from person to whom delivered the following: Spare Elements for Fire Detectors, Fuses for Switches, Spare Keys for Panelboards, receptacles switches, plugs, etc. LOW VOLTAGE – 27 00 00 FIRE ALARM – 28 31 00 FUSES – 26 28 13 SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES – 26 27 26 14.Wiring diagrams, Maintenance Manuals, Operation Instructions, and Brochures (5 sets minimum) GENERAL, INSTRUCTIONS & MANUALS – 26 00 00 – 1.14 *Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner. 1.18 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A.This Contractor shall submit to the Architect as described in Section 01 60 00. When shop drawings are submitted electronically, they shall be submitted as described in Paragraph B below. B.The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than 30 days after the award of the Contract, a minimum of seven (7) copies, each bound under separate cover, with index, detailed shop drawings, to include: 1.Manufacturer's Catalog Data 2.Complete Physical and Technical Data 3.Wiring Diagrams 4.Detailed Reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate specification section and applicable item numbers within that section 5.Other Descriptive Data as required by the Architect/ Engineer C.The Contractor shall submit to the Architect electronic shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic Shop Drawings that are submitted without following the format as outlined below will be returned for corrections without any further review. 1.A separate PDF file shall be submitted for each Division including All submittal items for that Division as outlined below: a.Division 26 – Electrical b.Division 27 – Telecommunications 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 7/13 2.The contractor shall provide either a digital or hardware method of transporting the electronic submittal to the Architect. Files larger than 10Megabytes shall not be sent via email and shall be transferred via an FTP or similar file transfer protocol, PC compatible CD or PC compatible Thumb Drive. Divisions shall not be broken up into separate files for transfer via email. 3.Each Specification PDF shall be submitted with the following format and salient attributes: a.Cover page including: 1)Project Title as indicated on the plans 2)Project Location including Address, City, State, Country 3)Prime Contractor name, phone number, and email address 4)Sub-Contractor name, phone number, and email address 5)Specification Division Number and Title b.Index Page outlining each specification section included in the submittal. This list shall be linked to a corresponding Specification Section Divider for each section. This link shall enable the reviewer to jump to a specification section by clicking the item in the list. c.Specification Section Divider: Shop Drawings shall be divided by specification section and each section shall begin with a Divider Page outlining the Specification Number, Title, and a list of Submittal Items for the section. In the upper right-hand corner of the divider page, a Link shall be provided returning the reviewer to the Index Page. d.Each Submittal Item listed on the Specification Section Divider shall be linked to the specific item being submitted. Each Submittal Item shall be hi-lighted Yellow with a Note Reference to the specific paragraph giving the submittal requirements. e.Each page of the submittal shall be numbered in the Bottom Right corner of the page. Page numbering shall be Roman Numerals for all pages before the First Specification Section. Each Specification Section page shall be numbered with the Specification Section number, a dash, and the page number in the Specification Section. f.Specification items shall be specifically hi-lighted as they apply to the project rather than hi- lighting an entire product family. Items that do not apply to this project shall be crossed out with a Red X. g.The PDF file shall not be protected to prevent printing, selecting of text within the document, or extracting of pages from the document. D.Shop drawings shall be submitted complete, at one time and each item indexed with dividers and separated per specification section and shall be, but not limited to the items of equipment listed below: 1.Motor starters and controls designating where items are intended to be used and equipment being controlled. 2.Disconnect Switches 3.Fuses and spare fuse cabinet 4.Electrical System Protective Device Study 5.Lighting Fixtures (Complete) 6.Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 7.Wiring Devices 8.Back Boxes 9.Coverplates 10.Raceways and Connectors 11.Fire Wall Penetration Seals 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 8/13 12.Copper Wire 13.*Fire Alarm System 14.*Security System 15.*CCTV 16.*Access Control System 17.*Telecommunication System 18.*Audio/Visual Presentation Systems 19.*Data Network Systems 20.**All Specialty Systems not listed above** 21.Any other items requested by Engineer *See Section 27 00 00 for further requirements. E.Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment, lighting fixtures, or materials as not in accordance with the specifications, Contractor shall submit a new list of items he proposes to furnish and install in place of those items rejected. If the Contractor fails to submit this new list within the above specified time, or if any items on this second list are rejected as not being in accordance with these specifications, the Engineer may select the items which the Contractor shall furnish and install without change in Contract price or time of completion. F.The acceptance of a manufacturer’s name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer’s review. G.Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™ Revision 2013 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for development of shop drawings and/or “As-Builts” with a signed waiver of responsibility. 1.19 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Provide Schedule of Values per Division 1 and related project requirements. B.Division 26 and 27 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for the following categories (as a minimum): 1.Electrical Mobilization 2.Electrical Submittals 3.Electrical General Project Management, General Design, General Coordination 4.Branch Circuit Rough-in – Materials and Labor 5.Branch Circuit Trim – Materials and Labor 6.Disconnects and Starters – Materials and Labor 7.Light Fixtures – Materials and Labor 8.Fire Alarm System 9.Security System 10.Data System 11.Systems Equipment – Labor 12.Cable Tray – Materials and Labor 13.Commissioning 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 9/13 14.Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training C.The dollar value for “Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training” shall in no case be less than 2% of the total dollar value of the Division 26 and 27 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). The dollar value for “Commissioning” shall in no case be less than 3.0% of the total dollar value of the Division 26 and 27 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). D.The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final completion (i.e. “Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training”), as specified above and in Division 1, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely tested and adjusted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPETITIVE PRODUCTS A.Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an accepted Bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing in accordance with Section 01 60 00. B.Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an accepted bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing and with descriptive data verifying equal quality and performance at least ten (10) working days prior to the bid date for approval. 2.02 MANUFACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS A.Any manufacturer/equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified item must be submitted for acceptance in accordance with Section 01 60 00, in writing, with detailed information to include: 1.Manufacturer's Catalog Data 2.Complete Physical and Technical Data 3.Wiring Diagrams 4.Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate Specification Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that Section 5.Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and specified items 6.Detailed reference to specified items (written or highlighted) noting equal quality and performance of proposed substitute equipment 7.Other descriptive data, as required by the Engineer B.If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be included in a subsequent Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturer’s name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C.Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 10/13 2.03 MATERIALS A.All materials must be of the quality herein specified. All materials shall be new, of the best quality and free from defects. They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. B.Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished shall be standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design. C.All materials shall be U.L. or E.T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used. D.Equipment in compliance with U.L. standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory the unit shall be field evaluated per the Washington State Administrative Code (WAC) and the electrical inspector’s requirements. 2.04 COMPLETE SYSTEM A.All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide a complete and operable system. 2.05 NAMEPLATES A.Provide nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through black surface material to white sublayer (attach with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures). EXCEPTION (1): Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red background. Exception (2): Series rated systems shall be yellow background with white letters. 1.Switch and Receptacle Labels: Refer to Section 26 27 26. 2.Motor Starter and Disconnect Labels: Refer to Section 26 28 16. 3.Special Equipment/Outlet Labels: Refer to Appropriate Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and ducts, to provide proper headroom in all cases. Check drawings to determine heights of all suspended ceilings and size of pipe shafts where raceway and wire-ways shall run. Coordinate installation of Division 26 and 27 wiring and equipment with Division 23 and other trades. Where insufficient room for proper installation appears, obtain clarification from Engineer before any installation is begun. B.Cutting and Patching: 1.Obtain permission from the Architect and/or Owner’s Representative prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space limitations prevent the use of such drills. 2.All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 11/13 3.02 COORDINATION A.The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 26 and 27. The work shall coordinate with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work in the building and shall examine all Drawings, including the several Divisions of Mechanical, Structural, Civil and Architectural, for Construction Details and necessary coordination. Specific locations of construction features and equipment shall be obtained from the Contract Documents, field measurements, and/or from the trade providing the material or equipment. No extra costs will be allowed for failure to obtain this information. B.All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and correction. Special attention is called to the following items: 1.Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike" side of the door. 2.Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 3.Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 4.Type and height of ceiling. 5.All device measurements referenced on drawings or specifications are to be centered of device unless noted otherwise. C.The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination or interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to, removing, replacing, relocating, cutting, patching, and finishing. D.The Contractor shall review the installation manual for each device to be installed. If a conflict appears to occur between the manufacturer’s recommended installation practices and the plans or specifications, notify the Engineer immediately. Final determination shall be by the Engineer. The Contractor will not be paid for reinstallation due to failure to comply with manufacturer instructions or design documents. E.Device and fixture locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge if so desired by the Engineer, before installation. 3.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A.It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 26 and 27 work. To further expedite this process, where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. All Electrical RFIs shall be written on the form provided at the back of this section. 3.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING A.All equipment, whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to protect it from water, dust and dirt. B.After installing, all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished, cleaned of all dirt, rust, cement, plaster, grease and paint. C.All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two (2) or more coats of a finish enamel and scratched surfaces be refinished to look like new. Markings, identification and nameplates shall be replaced. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 00 - 12/13 3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes, to clearly indicate its use, area served, circuit identification, voltage, and any other useful data. B.Each auxiliary system, including communications, shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function. 3.06 DEVIATION A.Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shall not be made unless Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and approved by the Engineer. If any equipment is furnished under this or other divisions with current, voltage or phase ratings that differ from those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately and shall not connect said equipment until instructed as to required changes by the Architect. No extension of time will be granted as a result of such changes. 3.07 EXCAVATIONS A.All excavations are to be so conducted so that no walls or footings shall be disturbed in any way. B.Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed. 3.08 WIRING METHODS A.All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings where concealed in walls, in inaccessible ceiling space, or where exposed in finished or unfinished areas. B.All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings. C.All branch circuit wiring shall be installed in raceway with junction boxes and fittings. D.Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or behind walls. E.All emergency systems outlet and junction boxes shall have a red plastic tag inside marked critical or life safety as applicable. F.Multiple feeder runs shall be rod hung, using a strut type channel with individual one-hole clamps, back plates and machine screws. G.Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled per code. H.See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems. 3.09 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS A.Must be made such as to retain that rating. 3.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Provide hangers, brackets, and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support equipment. B.Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 26 and 27 equipment unless permitted by Architect/Engineer. 3.11 CHASES AND OPENINGS A.Provide to the masonry and concrete trades all templates and details of chases, openings in floors and walls as required for Division 26 and 27 equipment installation. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 26 00 00 - 13/13 3.12 PAINTING A.Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification, except items furnished under Division 26 and 27 that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation, shall be refinished by the Division 26 and 27 Contractor. 3.13 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION A.Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be employed under the supervision of a competent foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and workmanship like appearance. B.All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the Engineer. 3.14 MISCELLANEOUS A.Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and electrical equipment, as required by the International Building Code. B.Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable to accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide a minimum of 36” length of flexible conduit to span separation. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS 26 00 05 - 1/2 SECTION 26 00 05 ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Portions of the existing electrical lighting, power and signal systems are to be removed as detailed on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS A. Existing materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner. 2.02 EXISTING MATERIALS RE-INSTALLED A. Existing materials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus may be re-installed as a part of the new system subject to approval of condition suitability by the Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e. installation, warranty, testing, etc.) shall apply as if the materials were new, supplied by the Contractor. 2.03 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE RE-INSTALLED A. In coordination with the Architect/Engineer, these materials shall be made available for his inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to him. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind and quality. B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, removal of PCB type ballasts and fluorescent lamps which shall be disposed of in accordance with EPA requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by other divisions of this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work. B. Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits, wiring, and power restored back to original condition. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 26 00 05 - 2/2 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling systems, other electrical equipment free standing (or surface mounted), raceway (exposed) and conductors no longer in service as a result of this Contract shall be removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and filled with grout. 3.03 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS A. Provide surface mounting for devices on existing walls. Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates. 3.04 EXISTING PANELBOARD A. Any modifications made to existing panels must be incorporated into the existing circuit index on the panel. If more than three circuits are modified a new typewritten index incorporating the changes to the existing index shall be installed in the existing panel. B. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room numbers used in the building as verified with the Owner. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 WIRES AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1/3 SECTION 26 05 19 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wire, cable, and terminations complete. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE (COPPER, 600-VOLT) A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW wire may be utilized at Contractors option, subject to code requirements. Wire and cables shall be brought to project in original containers bearing the underwriters label. Provide Type AVA wire where conductors are subject to temperature above 167 Degrees F. 2.02 SPLICES A. Above Grade: Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist-on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller). Bolt on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes. 2.03 TERMINATIONS A. Compression set, bolted or screw terminal. B. Conductors #12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator when termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet. 2.04 PLASTIC CABLE TIES A. Nylon or Equivalent, locking type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise. 3.02 WIRE SIZE A. No. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits. B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger (600) volts. 3.03 TESTS 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 WIRES AND CABLES Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 19 - 2/3 A. In addition to the factory testing of all equipment and cable, the Contractor shall test all wiring connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are connected. Tests shall be made with a 500V minimum DC "Megger" type tester. If tests indicate faulty insulation (less that 2 megohms), such defects shall be corrected and tested again. Contractor shall provide all apparatus to make tests and shall bear all expenses of required testing. Routine operation tests shall be made on all pieces of equipment to demonstrate that working parts are in operating condition. Results of all tests shall be recorded and submitted to the Architect. The Contractor shall immediately replace all parts, which fail to pass the test. B. Measure the OHMIC value of the Electric Service Entrance metallic "System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod Fall-In-Potential" method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately for further instructions. Provide OHMIC test results to Engineer. C. All circuits both in and out of the building shall test out free of grounds, short circuits and other defects. D. Check and record catalog number and ampere size of controller overload heaters installed, nameplate full-load amperes, and actual operating amperes of each motor. IMPORTANT: Submit recorded data in triplicate to the Engineer. Check proper load balance on the electrical system, direction of rotation, lubrication, and overload protection of all motors before placing in operation. E. The final test of all equipment shall be made on dates designated by the Architect/Engineer and all readings shall be made in his presence. F. Feeders shall be checked to ensure all phases are energized before connecting to their respective motors. Each motor shall rotate in the proper direction for its respective load. Prior to rotation test, all bearings shall be inspected for proper lubrication. G. Minimum megger test for equipment shall be as follows: Equipment Maximum Minimum Test Voltage Rating Resistance 1,000-Volts or less 2 Megohms 3.04 CONDUCTOR SIZES, REFERENCED ON PLANS A. Copper, type THW or RHW unless noted 3.05 PULLING A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No. 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered soap stone or approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used. 3.06 STRIPPING INSULATION A. Do not ring the cable, always pare or pencil. 3.07 TAPING A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape 3.08 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS A. Conductors in panels, switchboards, and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a manner to "Fan" into terminals with regular spacing. 3.09 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 WIRES AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3/3 3.10 RACEWAY SIZES REFERENCED ON DRAWINGS A. Raceways are sized for copper, type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways per code unless specifically noted to be larger on the drawings. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1/1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. A grounding system shall be provided for neutral ground and equipment ground as required by code. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Copper, code size, with physical protection where subject to damage. Bare or green insulated 2.02 GROUND RODS A. 3/4" x 8'-0" copper clad steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein. 3.02 GROUND RODS A. Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the ground conductor to each rod. 3.03 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE A. As required by code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage or is used outside of building, protect with conduit 3.04 CONNECTION TO THE GROUND BUS A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to raceway systems, switchboard/panelboard frames, service neutral, separately derived systems, electrically operated equipment and devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment. 3.05 METHOD OF CONNECTION A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding. Grounding lugs, where provided as standard Manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used. 3.06 FLEXIBLE RACEWAY A. Shall not be used for grounding. Install separate ground conductor in all flexible raceway. 3.07 PVC RACEWAY A. Install separate ground conductor in all PVC raceway as required per code. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 26 05 32 - 1/3 SECTION 26 05 32 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices, permit the pulling of conductors and for wire splices and branches. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR WIRING A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four-inch size minimum. Large pull boxes shall be fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover. B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to accommodate standard devices and device plate. C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be the type specifically designed for that purpose. D. Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction. E. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2-inch-deep (without fixture stud), 2-1/8 inches deep (with fixture stud). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ANCHORING A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes must be so attached so that they will not "Rock" or "Shift" when devices are operated. 3.02 FLUSH MOUNTING A. Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling. 3.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A. General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades. Study all Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural Drawings, door swings, installation details, layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment. B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or where outlets are centered between such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center. C. Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting, receptacle, power signal and thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 32 - 2/3 D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor. *Switches 4 Feet, Set Vertically, to Top of Box *Receptacles, Telecommunications 18 Inches, Set Vertically to Centerline Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect Heights may vary. See Drawings for additional information E. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in the same panel location. F. Installed in Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to back. All boxes shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with flex conduit with a 90° loop. Where stud space separation is not possible, utilize sound attenuating mastic around each box. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty Pads MPP+ (2.54 mm minimum) or similar. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK A. Provide as shown and/or specified. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to ensure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the Architect. Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixture. 3.05 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications, or by others. Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An outlet box is required if the equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. 3.06 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes not covered by equipment. 3.07 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, and to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed only at locations approved by the Architect. B. In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently from ceiling suspension system. C. The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The Contractor is permitted to provide boxes deemed necessary when installed in accordance with these Specifications. 3.08 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER A. Conceal the Electrical Outlet behind the unit housing as provided for by the Manufacturer. 3.09 BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES A. Boxes containing emergency and normal devices are permitted only with steel barriers Manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments. B. Device boxes containing multiple devices and wiring rated over 150 volts to ground and over 300 Volts between conductors are permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 26 05 32 - 3/3 3.10 COLOR CODING A. All junction boxes installed in accessible spaces and exposed in unfinished areas shall be color coded using spray paint or tape on the box and cover as applicable in the following manner: 277/480-Volt ........................................... Sand 120/208-Volt ........................................... Gray Emergency Power .................................... Orange Fire Alarm ................................................ Red Intrusion Alarm ........................................ Yellow B. The colors shall match the colors used on the Raceway - See Section 26 05 33. 3.11 NAMEPLATES A. For all line voltage junction boxes, provide engraved nameplate indicating circuit numbering of all wiring in junction box. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 RACEWAY 26 05 33 - 1/3 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Provide Raceway System complete. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS) A.General: Hot dipped galvanized B.Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw type fittings not approved. 2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A.General: Hot Dipped galvanized. B.Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw type fittings not approved. 2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A.General: Hot dipped galvanized. B.Fittings: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless-steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are acceptable for dry locations. Indenter, drive-on and pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC, LFMC) A.Dry Locations: 1.General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations only 2.Fittings: Malleable iron or steel, Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type or equal B.Damp and Wet Locations: 1.Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit. 2.Fittings: Thomas and Betts "liquid tight" or equal 2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A.Formed steel or aluminum type. Standard factory finish. Where color choice is available, consult Architect/Engineer for selection prior to ordering. 2.06 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) A.Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride type unless otherwise noted. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 RACEWAY Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 33 - 2/3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer. B.Cut Raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors. C.Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, not permitted. D.Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires. E.All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shall be factory radius bends. For all other Raceway, use factory radius bends of 1-1/4" and larger diameter. F.Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by Architect/Engineer. All sleeves shall be provided for Raceway installation. G.Provide 2 - 3/4" C.O. stub into accessible ceiling space from all recessed panelboards or systems terminal boxes. 3.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A.All Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject to damage. 3.03 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT A.Intermediate metal conduit is permitted as a substitute for galvanized rigid steel conduit except where GRS is required by code. 3.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A.Install for wiring in masonry, frame construction, furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where construction involves masonry work, surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in complete construction. 3.05 INSERTS, SHIELDS AND SLEEVES A.Furnish and set in place, in advance of pouring slabs and walls, all inserts and sleeves needed to execute Division 26 equipment installation. B.Where supports in slabs are required after wall has been poured, use a drilled-in threaded insert, installed as recommended by Manufacturer. C.Sleeves shall be provided for all wall penetrations. 3.06 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR A.Install at such depth that the exposed Raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible. B.PVC Raceway shall not be stubbed through floors. 3.07 SEALING OF RACEWAY PENETRATIONS A.Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved by Engineer. For concrete construction above ground level, cast Raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. B.Exterior Surfaces Below Grade: Cast Raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly (such as O.Z. type "FSK") cast in place. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 RACEWAY 26 05 33 - 3/3 C.Roofs: Provide mopped, lead, roof jack where Raceway penetrates roof membrane. D.Fire Rated Floors, Walls, Ceiling/Roofs: Concrete or masonry, seal around Raceway penetration with Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam or approved equal. Plaster or gypsum wallboard, seal around Raceway penetration with plaster, fire tape per local Fire Marshal's requirements. 3.08 SEALING OF RACEWAYS A.Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs, floors or through outside walls of the building, above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building using duct sealing mastic, non-hardening compound type, specially designed for such service to maintain the integrity of the seal of the wall, floor or roof. Pack around the wires in the Raceways. 3.09 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A.In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may, at his option, attach 1/2" or 3/4" EMT Raceways to the ceiling suspension system where such system is structurally suitable on independent wire secured at both ends; in which case, provide clips manufactured for the purpose. B.When more than two Raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel support system (such as Unistrut). 3.10 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A.Install parallel to building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by Manufacturer. Mount so Raceway is in the least obvious location. Shall be used in lieu of conduit in finished areas. 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A.Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration with 90 degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay-in fluorescent fixtures above T-Bar ceilings. For fixture installations, one end of flex must terminate in rough-in junction box. Flex conduit shall not be installed over 6' long or used to connect from fixture to fixture. Use liquid tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and equipment in damp locations. Provide ground wire. 3.12 COLOR CODING A.General: Provide color bands of tape or paint one inch (25 mm) wide for Raceways up to two inches (51 mm) in diameter and one-half the Raceway diameter for larger Raceways, applied at panel and pullbox locations within each room, and 50 ft. (15.25 m) on centers within an area. B.Color Banding: 120/208 Volt .................................. Gray 277/480 Volt ................................. Sand Emergency Power .........................Orange Fire Alarm ...................................... Red Intrusion Alarm ............................. Yellow Low Voltage Switching .................. Black C.The colors shall match the colors used on the boxes - See Section 26 05 32. 3.13 PULL CORDS A.Nylon type shall be included in all installed empty Raceway. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 - 1/3 SECTION 26 05 34 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide Metal Clad (Type MC) Cable for power, control and lighting systems. B. Provide wiring connections and terminations. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. UL 1569. Products shall be tested, approved and labeled/listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.04 USES PERMITTED A. MC Cable is permitted to be used for 20amp lighting and power circuits where routing is above grade, concealed and the installation meets the requirements of NEC 330. B. MC Cable shall NOT be used for homerun circuits from the fixture, receptacle, or equipment to the panelboard. Hard conduit must be used from the panelboard to the nearest accessible ceiling space to the panelboard. C. MC Cable shall not be used for HVAC equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABLE ASSEMBLY A. Metal clad cable assemblies shall consist of 2, 3 or 4 current carrying conductors and an equipment ground conductor. B. Conductors: Solid Copper conductor, No. 12 AWG minimum or No. 10 AWG maximum. Installation methods shall be as specified under Part 3 - Execution. C. Insulation: Conductor insulation shall be rated 600-volt, Type THHN, 90°C dry. D. Fillers: Fillers shall be non-hygroscopic and non-wicking. E. Binder: Core binder shall be corrugated polyester. F. Sheath: The metal sheath shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. The metal sheath shall be extruded onto the cable or applied longitudinally, then wrapped and welded. The sheath shall then be corrugated for greater flexibility. G. Jacketing: When PVC jacketing is required, the jacket shall be flame-retardant PVC with a temperature range of -40°C to 90°C. H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: The equipment ground wire shall be of the same construction as specified in 2.02.A and 2.02.B and be at a minimum the same size as the current carrying conductors. The insulation color shall be green. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be UL listed and identified for such use with metal clad continuous corrugated sheath cable, with or without PVC jacketing, as is appropriate for the installation. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 34 - 2/3 B. Connectors shall be of steel or malleable iron and shall be a squeeze type clamp connector with a locknut for non-jacketed metal clad cable. Compression gland type connectors shall be used for jacketed metal clad cable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION – POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS WIRING A. All wiring shall be installed in compliance with the latest version of the National Electrical Code and all other applicable codes and standards as indicated elsewhere in these specifications. B. Use of metal clad cable shall be permitted only for lighting, equipment and receptacle branch circuits. Metal clad cable shall not be permitted in locations designated to be hazardous Class I, II or III. C. Metal clad cable shall be permitted only for motor circuits where the motor being served is less than ½ HP and rated for 120V, single phase. Metal clad cable is not permitted for HVAC equipment and controls. D. Metal clad cable shall only be installed concealed within walls and above ceiling interstitial spaces. Where there is no ceiling interstitial space, metal clad cable may not be used. E. Bends in corrugated sheath metal clad cable shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than seven (7) times the diameter of the metallic sheath. F. Metal clad cable is not permitted to connect branch circuits to fumehoods, gas storage cabinets, or chemical storage cabinets. G. No metal clad cable shall be installed in ventilation ducts or plenums. H. Conductors in Enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with T&B Ty-Rap, Virginia Plastics, or equal, nylon wire ties in terminal cabinets, gutters and similar locations. 3.02 FITTINGS A. Fittings used for connecting metal clad cable to boxes, light fixtures or other equipment shall be UL listed and identified for such use. B. Cable preparation for installation of fittings shall follow manufacturer’s instructions. The manufacturer’s specialized tools shall be used for preparing cable ends for installation of fittings. C. The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. Fitting securement screws shall be properly torqued. Cable ends shall be fitted with insulating bushings intended for the type of metal clad cable being installed. D. For jacketed metal clad cable, the outer jacket shall be removed to the length specified by the fitting manufacturer’s instructions. Remove oils or solvent by-products from the outer jacket of the cable. The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. The fitting gland nut shall be properly torqued to the manufacturer’s specifications. 3.03 ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. Metal clad cables shall be run parallel with walls or structural elements. Vertical runs shall be plumb; horizontal runs level and parallel with structure, as appropriate. Groups shall be racked together neatly with both straight runs and bends parallel and uniformly spaced. B. Metal clad cables shall be securely fastened in place at intervals of not more than six feet, with suitable clamps or fasteners of approved type, and all vertical conduits shall be properly supported to present a mechanically rigid and secure installation. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 - 3/3 C. Metal clad cable installed parallel to framing members, such as studs, joist, or rafters, shall be supported so that the nearest outside surface of the cable is not less than 1-1/4 inches from the nearest edge of the framing member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, the cable shall be protected by a steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent that is at least 1/16-inch thick. D. Maintain at least 6-inch clearance between metal clad cables and other piping systems. Maintain 12-inch clearance between metal clad cables and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. E. No metal clad cable shall be fastened to other conduits or pipes or installed so as to prevent the ready removal of other pipes or ducts for repairs. F. Individual metal clad cables hung from roof structure or structural ceiling shall be supported by split-ring hangers and wrought-iron hanger rods. Where three (3) or more metal clad cables are suspended from the ceiling in parallel runs, use steel channels, Kindorf, Unistrut or equal, hung from 1/2-inch rods to support the conduits. The conduit on these channels shall be held in place with metal clad cable clamps designed for the particular channel that is used. G. Secure metal clad cable support racks to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place anchors; die-cast, rustproof alloy expansion shields; or cast flush anchors. Wooden plugs, plastic inserts, or gunpowder driven inserts shall not be used as a base to secure conduit supports. H. Metal clad cable shall be supported immediately on each side of a bend and not more that one (1) foot from an enclosure where a run of metal clad cable ends. I. Use of cable tray: 1. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum allowable cable fill area allowed by NEC Tables 392.9, 392.9(E) and 392.9(F). 2. Cables shall be installed in a single layer with a maintained spacing of not less than one cable diameter between cables. 3. Ampacity of cables installed in cable tray shall meet the requirements of NEC 392.11. 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure safety to building occupants and operating personnel and conformity to Code B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all power and control wiring including insulation resistance of all equipment: 1. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground shall be measured. For circuits rated less than 600 volts, the resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms. 2. Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000-volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated 240 volts and below shall be tested with a 500-volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall be applied for thirty (30) seconds. C. The contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test to the Engineer for review and acceptance approval before energizing respective circuits. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH 26 05 39 - 1/2 SECTION 26 05 39 FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide, poke through type, floor outlet devices, for Power and Communications in quantities required at locations as verified by the Architect. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In general, all floor boxes shall be of size and type indicated on drawings herein specified. All floor boxes shall be located as directed by architect or as dimensioned on the architectural drawings. If drawings are not dimensioned, coordinate exact location prior to rough-in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Walker B. O.Z./Gedney C. Hubbell D. Square D 2.02 FIRE RATING A. Poke through assembly shall have a one, two, three or four hour fire resistance rating, as required by Building Construction Code, and be U.L. listed for this rating. Assembly shall, in addition, have available an abandonment device, U.L. listed, at this rating. 2.03 POKE THROUGH ASSEMBLY A. Shall consist of a pedestal floor outlet assembly, raceway through floor and a fire-rated center coupling factory equipped with inorganic chemical panels that will expand on exposure to high heat to form a flame, smoke, toxic fume and waterproof seal within the entire assembly. Shall have a means to level assembly in place. 2.04 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS A. All Service Outlet Fittings shall be of the same Manufacturer. Finish shall be satin aluminum, unless noted otherwise. Fittings shall be secured type to prevent spinning of fittings. B. Telephone Service Fittings: Shall be of a type approved by the local Telephone Company. Bushed-type fittings shall be of the same design as the receptacle service fittings, but with 1-1/4" inside diameter, bushed-opening, faced so that the cable leaves the bushing in a horizontal plane. C. Receptacle Service Fittings: Shall have back-to-back duplex receptacles with configuration and requirements in accordance with Section 26 27 26. Receptacle color: White unless otherwise noted. D. Computer, alarm and other in-house low voltage systems service fittings to be identical to telephone fittings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 39 - 2/2 E. Combination Power and Telephone Fittings: Shall comply with above except with single duplex receptacle. Shall contain separate Raceways for Telephone and Power, or barrier in single Raceway with minimum 3/4" space for telephone cable. 2.05 PLATES A. All sides of all service fittings to have blanking plate, device plate or low potential plate. B. Abandonment plates shall have same fire rating as complete assembly. 2.06 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Branch circuit wiring shall conform to applicable Sections of these Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate with Architect/Engineer for exact location of all devices. Adjust outlet fittings to level with floor and secure. Install per Manufacturer's Instructions; as required to maintain U.L. listing; and per related Sections of these Specifications. B. Coordinate cover orientation with architect prior to installation. 3.02 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS A. Number: Assemblies shall be provided in the quantities indicated by the Contract Documents. Installation of the number of devices shown on the Drawings shall be at locations as shown on the final Drawings and/or as directed by the Architect/Engineer; with no additional cost to the Owner. B. All indicated outlets shall be completely wired and connected; at no additional cost to the Owner; regardless of the selection of location by the Architect/Engineer. Not more than eight 120 volt receptacle outlet fittings shall be connected to a single circuit unless explicitly shown otherwise. 3.03 CORE DRILLING FLOORS A. All necessary Coring of Floor for the installation of service fittings shall be made in a neat workmanlike manner and as recommended by the Manufacturer. Floor Construction or finish damaged by the installation of fittings shall be patched or replaced to original condition or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B. When Core Drilling over an occupied floor make all provisions required to prevent damage to that floor. Repair or replace all items damaged at no cost to Owner. 3.04 ADDITIONAL FITTINGS A. Service Fittings and Plates, which the Architect/Engineer does not direct to be installed, shall be turned over to the Owner for future use. Obtain receipt for these surplus fittings and forward a copy to Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 73 - 1/5 SECTION 26 05 73 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for all work in Division 26. See Division 01 for sequence of work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions B. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards C. Section 26 24 19 – Motor Controllers D. Section 26 28 13 – Fuses E. Section 26 28 16 – Disconnects and Fused Switches 1.03 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the requirements for the contractor to perform electrical system studies based on the selected electrical equipment. B. The required studies include but are not limited to a Coordination Study and an Arc Flash Assessment Study. C. Each of the studies performed shall be based on the actual equipment to be installed. Any revisions of the selected equipment shall result in an updated study with the revised equipment submitted for review and approval prior to ordering equipment. D. If the contractor installs different equipment than was included in the approved electrical system studies, the owner reserves the right to require the contractor to replace the non-approved electrical equipment at no additional cost to the owner. E. The contractor shall provide all studies in agreement with all applicable codes and standards. If a specific code is applicable to the electrical system being modeled, the code shall be referenced and the portion of the electrical system impacted shall be noted. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. During the Shop Drawing process and prior to ordering electrical equipment, the contractor shall submit an Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. The Coordination study shall be submitted with the product data for all devices included in the coordination study and shall be formatted as indicated in Paragraph 2.01. B. After the electrical system has been installed and is ready for energization, the Contractor shall provide an Arc Flash Assessment Study. The Arc Flash Assessment shall be submitted for approval prior to substantial completion. Once the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved, the Contractor shall print and install the approved Arc Flash notification labels on all equipment containing overcurrent protective devices. Labels installed outdoors shall be suitable for outdoor installation. The Arc Flash Assessment Study shall be assembled as outlined in Paragraph 2.02. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. All Studies shall be prepared by a qualified professional electrical engineer. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 73 - 2/5 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. For the purposes of this section, overcurrent device coordination shall be defined in two levels as follows: 1. Coordinated = Full coordination outside of the instantaneous region of the overcurrent devices. 2. Selectively Coordinated = Full coordination including the instantaneous region of the overcurrent devices. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION A. The contractor shall provide to the owner the following information to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Final Arc Flash Assessment Study submitted in accordance with the requirements outlined in Specification 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions. 2. The electronic copy shall also include a sub-folder with the software model used to perform the calculations. The model shall include all files necessary to access and review the model electronically. The Contractor shall include a Text File in the directory labeled “MODEL_INFORMATION.TXT” which includes the following: a. Project Name b. Electrical Contractor Name c. Software used to model the system including version d. Date the model was last updated e. Contact information for the individual/organization who prepared the model. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. The contractor shall submit an Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study during the Shop Drawing submittal phase of the project prior to ordering equipment with overcurrent protective devices. The Coordination study shall be submitted with the product data for all devices included in the coordination study. B. All overcurrent protection devices shall be provided as a coordinated system by the manufacturer. Any cases where the selected manufacturer is unable to coordinate two overcurrent devices in series due to the sizes indicated in the design, the engineer shall be notified and a recommended coordination solution provided by the manufacturer prior to or during the submittal phase. For overcurrent protection devices 400A and larger where the manufacturer is unable to provide a coordinated system, the overcurrent protection devices shall include Long-Time/Short-Time/Instantaneous (LSI) time delay and ampacity settings minimum. C. Unless noted otherwise, when a main service overcurrent device with adjustable Ground Fault trip has been specified, the next level feeder overcurrent devices shall also include adjustable Ground Fault trip. The Coordination Study shall also provide recommended settings for all adjustable Ground Fault trip devices. D. All emergency system overcurrent protection devices shall be selectively coordinated as defined by applicable codes and standards (2020 NEC 700.32 and WAC 296-46B-700). The scope of the selectively coordinated system shall be as defined by applicable local, state, and federal codes. E. For modifications/additions to existing electrical systems, at a minimum the Coordination Study shall include: 1. All new electrical equipment containing overcurrent devices 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 73 - 3/5 2. The existing overcurrent protective devices immediately downstream of the new electrical equipment 3. All existing overcurrent protective devices upstream of the new electrical equipment to the main electrical utility service entrance. F. The Protective Device Coordination Study shall present the following information in an organized report: 1. Coordination Study Title Page shall include: a. Project Name b. Electrical Contractor name c. Date Study was performed d. Study Type (ie Overcurrent Device Coordination Study) e. Name/Company/Contact information for organization performing the study f. Analysis software used to perform the study including version 2. Coordination Study Executive Summary shall include a brief project description, an overall description of the electrical system, and a listing of any items that may need resolution. If specific Code requirements exist for any portion of the electrical system, they shall be noted in addition to how the requirement was implemented. 3. Coordination Study Analysis shall include a detailed outline of the overcurrent device coordination analysis. Time Current Curves shall be provided for each unique coordination path in the electrical system from the Main service protective device to the largest branch circuit breaker. Each Time Current Curve shall be uniquely labeled. The report shall include a list of the overcurrent devices included in each Time Current Curve and a description of any potential un-coordinated devices with the potential impact on the electrical system due to the lack of coordination. 4. Conclusion shall include a summary of overall protective device coordination for the electrical system being modeled. The Conclusion shall also include a table listing all devices with adjustable settings and the recommended settings based on the coordination study. Any uncoordinated electrical devices that include recommended revisions shall be listed with the proposed system revision. 5. As an Appendix, the Coordination Study shall include a one-line diagram of the modeled system with each bus and overcurrent device identified. The naming of the devices in the one-line diagram shall exactly match the device names in the report and time-current curves. 2.02 ARC FLASH ASSESSMENT STUDY A. After the electrical system has been installed and is ready for energization, the Contractor shall provide an Arc Flash Assessment Study. The Arc Flash Assessment Study shall be submitted for approval prior to substantial completion. Once the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved, the Contractor shall print and install the approved Arc Flash notification labels on all equipment containing overcurrent protective devices. B. The Arc Flash Assessment Study shall include the following at a minimum: 1. Study Title Page shall include the following information a. Project Name b. Date Study was performed c. Name/Company/Contact information for organization performing the study d. Analysis software used to perform the study including version 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES Job Number 2210142.00 26 05 73 - 4/5 2. An Index shall be provided listing each Section included in the Arc Flash Assessment Report. 3. Study Executive Summary shall a brief overview of each section of the Study including any recommended revisions to the electrical system based on the results of the Study. The overview shall include at a minimum, any pieces of equipment with a calculated fault current that exceeds the equipment rating, a listing of any overcurrent devices with revised settings, a brief listing of un-coordinated equipment that necessitate revisions, and a listing of each piece of equipment with a Dangerous level of Arc Flash energy. C. Each of the following sections and appendices shall include a dedicated Cover Page outlining the contents of the Section. D. Section #1 Fault Analysis shall include an updated Fault Current Analysis of the entire electrical system. The Fault Analysis shall include as a minimum the following information: 1. The available fault current at the Utility for the fault analysis shall be based on the actual Utility fault current and not an assumption. For electrical distribution systems that are primary metered, the study shall include the primary electrical system back to the point of service including but not limited to actual cable lengths/sizes/types and any overcurrent protective devices. The study shall include correspondence from the utility showing the available fault current at the utility service point in the appendices. 2. Updated cable size/type/length shall be included in the report based on the installed conditions. 3. Updated transformer information based on the installed transformer nameplates 4. Current limiting fuses shall be indicated where applicable based on the actual equipment installed. 5. Large motors (>50hp) shall be included in the analysis. Smaller motors shall be grouped together at each panel/switchboard. 6. A Table shall be provided with a comparison of calculated fault current to equipment fault rating for each piece of equipment containing overcurrent protective devices. The calculated fault current shall be adjusted as necessary based on the calculated X/R ratio. 7. Any equipment that is found to have a rating less than the calculated/adjusted fault current shall be specifically indicated along with recommended corrective action. 8. The Fault Analysis shall include the system model one-line diagram with the following information indicated: a. Utility connection point with available fault current and X/R ratio b. Cables with conductor size, length, parallel count, raceway type c. Transformers with impedance, kva, X/R ratio d. Large motors (>50hp). Smaller motors shall be grouped together at each panel/switchboard. e. Electrical equipment with overcurrent protective devices showing calculated fault current E. Section #2 Protective Device Coordination Study shall include an updated Coordination Study for the entire distribution system as outlined in Paragraph 2.01. The updated coordination study shall optimize settings to provide coordination while reducing the Arc Flash energy present. F. Section #3 Arc Flash Assessment shall include a description of the method used to calculate the Arc Flash energy present and the assumptions of the study. The following additional items shall be included in the study as a minimum: 1. Table summarizing the Arc flash energy present at each pieces of equipment and the conditions under which the incident energy occurred. The table shall also include the arcing time, fault current, upstream overcurrent device, and any notes for different conditions present. 2. A template Arc Flash label with each piece of information included on the label explained. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 73 - 5/5 3. Sample Arc Flash Labels for each piece of equipment in the model showing the code required information. G. Appendix A shall include that correspondence from the electric utility providing the available fault current used in the analysis. H. Appendix B shall include cut sheets for all electrical equipment included in the Arc Flash Assessment study. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING/VERIFICATION A. The contractor shall provide testing of each piece of electrical equipment with adjustable overcurrent protective devices to verify proper operation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. The test reports shall indicate the following at a minimum: 1. Equipment name 2. Date of the test 3. Name and organization of the individual performing the testing 4. Test results. Any equipment failing the testing shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. 5. As-Left settings. These settings shall be as indicated in the Arc Flash Assessment Study. Any settings that vary from the Study shall be either updated in the Study including a revised submittal package or shall be corrected in the field and an updated test report provided. 3.02 FIELD APPLIED ARC FLASH LABELS A. After the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved and the electrical equipment has been successfully tested, the Contractor shall provide Arc Flash and Shock Hazard warning labels on all electrical devices containing overcurrent protection stating the following information at a minimum: 1. PPE level of protection 2. Incident energy (cal/cm2) at 24” from the equipment unless specified otherwise by the Owner/Engineer 3. Flash hazard boundary 4. Glove class 5. Limited approach distance 6. Restricted approach distance 7. Prohibited approach distance B. Labels shall be permanently affixed to the equipment or wiring method and shall not be hand written. C. The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the installed environment. Labels installed outdoors shall be suitable for outdoor installation with no degradation due to sun light or precipitation. D. The label shall meet ANSI Z535 guidelines and requirements. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 26 09 23 - 1/10 SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 INTRODUCTION . The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the general conditions of the specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all the trades covered in the other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operative system. A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all support, labor and material to accommodate commissioning, per Section 01 91 13. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to include low voltage lighting control panels, switch inputs, and wiring. B. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL & ULC Approvals: The control panels shall be tested and listed under the UL 916 Energy Management Equipment standards by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. B. NEC Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes regarding electrical wiring standards. C. NEMA Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA standards regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosures. D. Component Pre-Testing: All control equipment shall undergo strict inspection standards. The equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation. E. System Checkout: A factory-trained technician or factory-authorized personnel or Contractor shall functionally test the control system and verify performance after installation. F. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in control systems. These specifications are based on the nLight Network Control System from Sensor Switch, an Acuity Brands Company. Substitutions of the specified equipment will be considered providing sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment qualification meets the requirements of this specification. G. Similar systems manufactured by Encelium, Hubbell (NX Networked Lighting Controls) and Wattstopper (Digital Lighting Management, DLM) are acceptable. The listing of any manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for devices and systems which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of lighting control system and accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, the low voltage relay panels, power wiring, and switch inputs. 1. Complete layout of every space with the parts identified and wire routing 2. Riser Diagram/System Diagram 3. Switch Input Wiring 4. Example Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00 26 09 23 - 2/10 5. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. B. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS (building automation system) either through IP based intercommunication of system or hardwired auxiliary relay outputs. C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for a complete and functional system in accordance with all applicable local and national codes. 1.06 WARRANTY A. All devices in lighting control system shall have a 5-year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS . System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts: 1. Intelligent lighting control devices 2. Standalone lighting control zones 3. Network backbone for remote or time-based operation. A. Intelligent lighting control devices shall consist of one or more basic lighting control components; occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, relays, dimming outputs, manual switch stations, and manual dimming stations. Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure should be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system. B. System must be able to interface directly with intelligent LED luminaires such that only CAT-5e cabling is required to interconnect luminaires with control components such as sensors and switches. C. Intelligent lighting control devices shall communicate digitally, require <4 mA of current to function (Graphic wall stations excluded), and possess RJ-45 style connectors. D. Lighting control zones shall consist of one or more intelligent lighting control components, be capable of stand-alone operation, and be capable of being connected to a higher-level network backbone. E. Devices within a lighting control zone shall be connected with CAT-5e low voltage cabling in any order. F. Lighting control zone shall be capable of automatically configuring itself for default operation without any start-up labor required. G. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting control in the event of a system communication failure with the backbone network or the management software becoming unavailable. H. Power for devices within a lighting control zone shall come from either resident device already present for switching (relay device) or dimming purposes, or from the network backbone. Standalone “bus power supplies” shall not be required in all cases. I. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices located in the zone itself (i.e. not in a remotely located devices such as panels) to facilitate system robustness and minimize wiring requirements. Specific applications that require centralized or remote switching shall be capable of being accommodated. J. System shall have one primary wall mounted network control “gateway” devices that are capable of accessing and controlling connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet LAN. K. System shall use “bridge” devices that route communication and distribute power for up to 8 directly connected lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 26 09 23 - 3/10 L. System shall have a web-based software management program that enables remote system control, status monitoring, and creation of lighting control profiles. M. Individual lighting zones shall be capable of being segmented into several “local” channels of occupancy, photocell, and switch functionality for more advanced configurations and sequences of operation. N. Devices located in different lighting zones shall be able to communicate occupancy, photocell, and switch information via either the wired backbone. O. System shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of operation. System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule so as to enable customized time-of-day, day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes. 1. Auto-On / Auto-Off (via occupancy sensors): a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected. b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient daylight is detected. c. Pressing a switch will turn lights off. The lights will remain off regardless of occupancy until switch is pressed again, restoring the sensor to Automatic On functionality. 2. Manual-On / Auto-Off (also called Semi-Automatic, Vacancy Sensing or Occupant Sending Device set to Vacancy Mode): a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient daylight is detected. 3. Manual-On to Auto-On/Auto-Off: a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. After initial lights on, zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights on/off according to occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight conditions. c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events 4. Auto-to-Override On: a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected. b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events 5. Manual-to-Override On: a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events 6. Auto On / Predictive Off: a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected. b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient daylight is detected. 1. If switch is pressed, lights turn off and a short “exit timer” begins. After timer expires, sensor scans the room to detect whether occupant is still present. If no occupancy is detected, zone returns to auto-on. If occupancy is detected, lights must be turned on via the switch. P. Control software shall enable logging of system performance data and presenting useful information in a web-based graphical format and downloadable to .CSV files. Q. Control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP. R. Desktop or Laptop Computer shall be furnished by the school district, and software will be loaded, and tested, during system start-up and programming by factory authorized technician. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00 26 09 23 - 4/10 2.02 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS A. Control Module (Gateway): 1. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time-based control of downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet. 2. Devices shall have a user interface that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage, and have a touch screen. a. Control device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices (bridges) or directly to lighting control devices. b. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it. c. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock. d. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection. e. Device shall have a USB port f. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 1500 devices to the management software. g. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned IP address. h. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series: i. GWY2 B. Networked System Occupancy Sensors: 1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the lights. 2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially turn lights on from an off state; thus, preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted. 3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional “dual” technology shall be used. 4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be acceptable. 5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted. 6. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 7. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports or capable of utilizing a splitter. 8. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication (via CAT-5 connections) and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue 9. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button. 10. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling. 11. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100-hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements. 12. Network system shall also have ceiling, fixture, recessed, & corner mounted sensors available. 13. Sensors shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified: nCM PDT 10 (ceiling mounted) or nWV PDT 16 (wall mounted). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 26 09 23 - 5/10 C. Networked System Daylight (Photocell and or Dimming) Sensors: 1. Photocell shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the artificial light from cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid response to passing clouds. 2. Photocell and dimming sensor’s set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through the sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming” procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered. 3. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or lamp outages). 4. Sensor shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified: nCM ADC X (on/off, 0-10 VDC dimming) D. Networked System Power (Relay) Packs: 1. Dimming Power Pack shall incorporate one Class 1 relays, contribute low voltage power to the rest of the system, and provide 0-10 VDC dimming output 2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated, and provide Class 2 power to the system. 3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports. 4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button. 5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded ½ inch chase nipple or be capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safety requirement 6. Auxiliary relay pack shall provide cry contact output for connection to HVAC system. 7. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series: nPP16 D (Power Pack w/ 16A relay, and 0-10VDC dimming output); nAR 40 (Low voltage auxiliary relay pack) E. Networked LED Luminaires: 1. Networked LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device 2. Networked LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other network control devices (sensors, photocells, switches, dimmers) 3. Networked LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked control devices 4. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay 5. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of the LED luminaire (also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and thus saving up to 20% power usage). 6. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its expected life (in hrs.). 7. nLight enabled luminaires will be noted in the fixture schedule. F. Networked System Wall Switches & Dimmers: 1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 2. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports. 4. All devices shall provide toggle switch control. 5. Devices shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray). 6. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback. 7. Devices shall have custom button labeling as indicated on drawings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00 26 09 23 - 6/10 8. Wall switches & dimmers shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified: a. nPOD (single on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback) b. nPOD 2P (dual on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback) c. nPODM (single on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) d. nPODM 2P (dual on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) e. nPODM DX (single on/off, single dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback) f. nPODM 2P DX (dual on/off, dual dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback) g. nPODM 4P (quad on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) h. nPODM 4P DX (quad on/off, quad dimming raise-lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback) G. Networked System Graphic Wall Station: 1. Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable lighting control presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches. 2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched, and dimmers via password protected setup screens. 3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded. 4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box 5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity. 6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication 7. Device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number: 8. nPOD GFX H. Networked System Scene Controllers: 1. Device shall have two to four buttons for selecting programmable lighting control profiles or acting as on/off switches. 2. Device shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 3. Devices shall provide LED user feedback. 4. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 5. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 6. Device shall be capable of reprogramming other devices in its zone so as to implement user selected lighting scene. 7. Device shall be capable of selecting a lighting profile be run by the system’s upstream Gateway so as to implement selected lighting profile across multiple zones (and not just its local zone). 8. Device shall have LEDs indicating current selection. 9. Scene Selector device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number: a. nPODM 2S (2 Scene, push-button) b. nPODM 4S (4 Scene, push-button) c. nPODM 4S DX (4 Scene, push-button, On/Off/Raise/Lower) I. Communication Bridges: 1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box. 2. Device shall have 8 RJ-45 ports. 3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting control zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Control Gateway. 4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection. 5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting control zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power. This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network lighting control system. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 26 09 23 - 7/10 6. Communication Bridge devices shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers: a. NBRG 8 (8 Ports) J. IP & Building Management Interface 1. Shall be native BACnet and listed as a BACnet Building Controller. 2. HTML5 management through ENVYVISION 3. nLight ECLYPSE 2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide an Emergency Lighting Control Unit to allow standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building. Emergency Lighting Control Unit shall be a UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20-amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface 2.04 DMX512 CONTROLLER A. Provide a standalone entry-level controller enabling creation and playback directly at the LCD touchscreen. B. The controller shall feature an astronomical time clock for automating shows and expands the controller’s features by accepting inputs from remote button stations, and button station contact closure inputs. C. Acuity Control - Easyl EZ Pro. 2.05 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time or scheduled via lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a collection of devices function for a defined time period. B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device, zone of devices, or customized group of zones. C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore information regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control profiles. D. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be configurable via a lighting control profile. E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on the software’s host server. F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the following calendar options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and sunrise/sunset +/- timed offsets. G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an astronomical clock. H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired. I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence settings: daily, weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly, and yearly. J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00 26 09 23 - 8/10 2.06 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and configurable remotely from the software B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, current Microphonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s). C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent network device. D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software. E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software. F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password. G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users. H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be encrypted. I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and installation via the internet. J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network) 2.07 BMS COMPATIBILITY A. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a downloadable software plug-in to its management software. No additional hardware shall be required. B. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system to other building management systems. C. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select control commands from BMS system to networked control devices. D. Sensorview software must be running on a computer connected to the nGWY2, with BACnet plug-in enabled for this feature to function. 2.08 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows: 1. Space Control Requirements – Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual- or Partial-ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room and meeting rooms. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches. 2. Daylit Areas – Provide daylight-responsive automatic control in all spaces (conditioned or unconditioned) where daylight contribution is available as defined by relevant local building energy code: a. All luminaires within code-defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. b. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) levels that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant local building energy codes. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 26 09 23 - 9/10 c. Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on drawings. d. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full-on prior to dimming. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING . A factory authorized manufacturer’s representative shall provide the electrical contractor a functional overview of the lighting control system prior to installation. The contractor shall schedule the pre- installation site visit after receipt of approved submittals to review the following: 1. Confirm the location and mounting of all digital devices, with special attention to placement of occupancy and daylighting sensors. 2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination. 3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per design requirements. 4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades. A. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. 1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied. B. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including room by room description including: 1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints. 2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.) C. Post start-up tuning – After 30 days from occupancy contractor shall adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of post start-up activity. 3.02 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT SERVICES A. On this project, a commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all building systems, which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day of technician’s time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to configure each device are readily available. Manufacturer is NOT responsible for helping the commissioning agent inspect the individual devices. It will be the commissioning agent’s responsibility to create and complete any forms required for the commissioning process, although the manufacturer or contractor may offer spreadsheets and/or printouts to assist the agent with this task. B. The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting control hardware to become familiar with the specific products. The agent may also accompany the manufacturer’s technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing, calibration and configuration of the products. However, the contractor and manufacturer shall ensure that interfacing with the agent does not prevent them from completing the requirements outlined in the contract documents. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00 26 09 23 - 10/10 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION A. Installation: The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits and override wiring. B. Documentation: The Contractor shall provide accurate "as-built" drawings to the Owner for correct programming and proper maintenance of the control system. The "as-builts" shall indicate the load controlled by each relay and the relay panel number. C. Operation and Service Manuals: The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals as related to the design of the control system. 3.04 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE A. Factory Support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the Owner. Factory assistance shall consist of solving programming or application questions concerning the control equipment. The factory shall maintain toll-free numbers for technical support for their customers. 3.05 START-UP & SUPPORT FEATURES A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up and verify a complete fully functional system. B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date. C. Upon completion of the system start up, the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system. D. To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically be grouped together into a functional lighting control zone. E. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequate power is applied and before any system software is installed. F. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without requiring any commissioning. G. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names. H. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely and without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date. I. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink it’s LED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel. 3.06 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. The Contractor is responsible for complete installation of the system according to strict factory standards and requirements. The following items shall be included requirements: B. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures. C. An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements. D. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage. E. Contractor shall provide a minimum of three hours training on the operation and use of the control system. Additional support services shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the building Owner or manager. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 24 19 - 1/3 SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section includes all requirements for motor controls to be furnished under the electrical portion of the work on all electrical motor driven equipment. Individually mounted starters shall be provided by Division 26 Contractor. Motor controls shall conform to NEMA Standards for each specific purpose. B. The Division 26 Contractor shall furnish all motor controllers not included with equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. The Division 26 Contractor shall install all motor controllers including all controllers not factory assembled into equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. 1.03 MOTOR VOLTAGE INFORMATION A. Voltages available are 480 Volt, 3 phase or 208 Volt, 3 Phase, and 115 Volt Single Phase. B. Circuits are designed (in general) for motors as follows: 1. Smaller than 1/2 H.P. - 115 Volts, Single Phase 1/2 H.P. and larger - 460 or 200 Volts, 3 Phase C. Verify motor sizes and voltages provided under other divisions and notify General Contractor immediately if any discrepancies are noted. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide motor protection switches of the appropriate NEMA size. For units not using NEMA rating, use equivalent NEMA size. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: Unless noted otherwise, shall be full voltage non-reversing with three overloads sized to suit nameplate amperes of motor served, motor "On" and "Off" pilot lights, "Hands-Off-Auto" switch, and auxiliary contacts for interlocking. B. Combination Motor Starter/Disconnect: Shall be fused switch type with all features of Paragraph A above. In addition, provide disconnect switch auxiliary contacts for disconnection of externally powered control circuits where applicable. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with motor manufacturer's requirements. C. Manual Starters: Shall be toggle switch or push-button type, lockable in the "Off" position, with overload relays, pilot light and enclosure pursuant to Paragraph D below. Manual starters shall only be used where specifically shown or called out on the drawings and only for single phase, fractional horsepower motors. D. Enclosures: All motor controllers shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which the controller is mounted, and shall be weatherproof when exposed to weather. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 MOTOR CONTROLLERS Job Number 2210142.00 26 24 19 - 2/3 E. Overload Devices: Shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type. One overload shall be provided for each phase. Provisions shall be made for resetting the overload devices from outside the starter enclosure. Provide ambient compensated overload devices only when the motor is at a constant temperature and the controller is subject to a separate, varying temperature. Automatic reset overload devices are not permitted. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. Allen Bradley C. General Electric D. Cutler-Hammer E. Siemens 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Pursuant to Section 26 00 00, Paragraph 2.05, provide nameplates permanently attach (with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures) on each controller, nameplates with the following information: Load served, voltage, phase, short circuit rating, panel/circuit number and where applicable fuse size and type. 2.04 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS A. Contractor shall provide relay(s) with sufficient contacts to shutdown all fans over 2000 cfm upon receipt of Fire Alarm. See Section 28 31 00. Coordinate coil voltage with Fire Alarm System Supplier. 2.05 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION A. Provide power factor correction capacitors for all motors 25 horsepower and above. Capacitor size when indicated on the drawings is an approximation only. Final size shall be determined by the Contractor based on the recommendations of the motor manufacturer to bring the power factor to between 0.9 and 0.95. All capacitors are to be fused, with blown fuse indicators mounted on the front of the unit. Provide discharge resistors when required by code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHED AREAS A. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable coverplates. 3.02 HEATERS A. Install heaters co-related with full-load current of motors provided. 3.03 OVERLOADS A. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. 3.04 SUPPORTS A. Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame. 3.05 FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING A. Provide wiring interlock connections for all (over 2000 cfm) fan starter control circuits via Division 23 furnished fan shutdown relay to shutdown fans upon receipt of Fire Alarm. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 24 19 - 3/3 3.06 FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING A. Provide wiring interlock connections for all (over 2000 cfm) fan starter control circuits via a relay to shutdown fans upon receipt of Fire Alarm. 3.07 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON ROOFS A. The Contractor shall coordinate all roofing penetrations with the general contractor and roofing contractor to assure that the roofing warranty is maintained. B. Attachment of conduits to the roof to serve mechanical equipment and devices shall comply with Section 26 05 33. 3.08 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS A. The Division 26 Contractor shall verify that the nameplate ratings of the mechanical equipment, when they arrive on site, are consistent with the ampacity called out on the drawings. The Contractor shall bring any discrepancies to the Engineers attention prior to installation of conduit and wiring. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 26 27 26 - 1/3 SECTION 26 27 26 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wiring devices and plates. B. No push-in terminals allowed. C. All devices shall be white in color, unless otherwise noted. Device plates shall be stainless steel. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell B. Pass & Seymour C. Leviton D. Cooper 2.02 SWITCHES A. "Industrial Specification Grade", quiet type, rated 277-Volt, 20-Amp, unless otherwise noted, with plastic handle. Single-pole, double-pole, 3-way, or locking type as required. Meets Federal Specification WS-896. Provide matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the conditions of installation. Hubbell CSB120, Eaton CSB120, Leviton 1221, and P&S 20AC1. B. Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above. C. LED Dimmer: LED 0-10V dimmer switch shall be compatible with supplied LED board and driver. Dimmer shall have high and low end, field adjustable trim setting, and scene functions as described in the Sequence of Operations noted on the plans. Provide with associated power pack for control. D. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches: Single-pole, double-throw, 3-wire, normally open. Rating same as above. E. Key Operated: Hubbell HBL1221L (or equal) with 1209 Key. Provide 24 spare Keys. F. Motor rated switches: Switches serving as motor disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated with overload relays and meet requirements as stated above. See manual starters in Section 26 24 19, ‘Manual Starters’. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. In All Unfinished Areas & Non-Occupiable Spaces: Provide "Industrial Specification Grade", Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration (20-Amp, 120-Volt) unless shown otherwise. Must have “rivetless ground” contact manufactured as an integral component of the external ground screw terminal. Meets Federal Specification WC-596 Hubbell HBL5362, Cooper 5362, P&S 5362A, and Leviton 5362. B. In All Finished Areas: Provide heavy-duty specification grade; general purpose 20-Amp. 125-Volt, NEMA 5-20R, 2-pole, 3-wire decora plus duplex receptacle, straight blade, commercial grade, self-grounding, back and side wired - Leviton 16352W. C. Self-Testing Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Duplex Receptacles: 20-Amp. 125-Volt ; 2-pole, 3-wire grounding; 10,000-Amps current interrupting; green light indicator when power is ‘on’; red light indicator when device is in the tripped position; Red “EOL” (end of life) indicator with rapid flash when the unit has reached end of life and/or cannot provide GFCI protection. Provide GFCI receptacles where required by Code and as indicated on the plans. Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Job Number 2210142.00 26 27 26 - 2/3 D. Tamper-resistant duplex receptacle with (1) Type-A and one (1) Type-C USB charger: Duplex 20-Amp; 125-Volt; 5.1-Amp, 5-Volt USB charging capability - Leviton T5833.W. E. Tamper resistant, Duplex NEMA 5-20R Configuration: Hubbell BR20WHITR, Leviton 5362-SGW, Cooper TR8300W, or Leviton TDR20-W to match decora style installed in finished spaces per Paragraph B above. F. Weather Resistant (WR) / Ground Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Outdoor Duplex Receptacles: NEMA 5-20R. Hubbell GFWRST20W or equal, for 20-Amp, 125-Volt AC. G. Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles, see drawings for Voltage, amperage, and phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner. 2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Provide occupancy sensor switches for control of lighting as shown on the drawings. Sensors shall be ceiling mounted to provide adequate coverage. Occupancy sensor shall be “Sensor Switch” Model CM-PDT-R, complete with power pack PP-20-20P, Auxiliary Relay SP-20-20P and associated mounting hardware. Sensors shall be wired and installed per Manufacturer’s direction to maintain switching and circuits shown on drawings. Where multiple sensors are located in an individual room, sensors shall be wired parallel with the relays such that either sensor will provide input to turn all lights on and reset time delay. Where occupancy sensors are shown on the drawings to be wall mounted, provide WSD or approved equal. 2.05 DEVICE PLATES A. Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell or Cooper Type 302 stainless steel. Attachment screws shall match finish of plate. Plates for surface mounted boxes shall be of pressed stainless steel with size to fit exactly the box used. 1. Where a duplex receptacle is indicated next to a USB receptacle, provide a dual-gang faceplate and mount both devices in the same backbox under the same faceplate. B. Exterior: Intermatic # WP1010MC, for vertical mount and # WP1010HMC for horizontal mount, or equivalent for receptacles. Metal cover shall be lockable, raintight while-in-use. 2.06 LABELING A. For NEMA 5-20R receptacles, each device shall be identified with a clear label with black typing stating the panel & circuit number. B. For receptacles other than NEMA 5-20R, the cover plate shall have Ampere rating, Voltage, and phase engraved on a phenolic label and attached to the cover plate. 2.07 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY (WHEN SHOWN) A. Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on Plans and outlet spacing as indicated. All assemblies shall contain ground wire. Wiremold or equal. 2.08 SPARE DEVICES A. Provide the following spare devices: Device Quantity Single-pole switch 3 Low voltage dimmer switch 2 Duplex receptacle (each type used) 5 GFCI receptacle 2 20A, single-phase equipment connection 1 20A, three-phase equipment connection 1 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 26 27 26 - 3/3 B. Each spare device shall include 100-feet of conduit, wire, faceplate, and labor; all as required for a complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner’s representative at the site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOUNTING A. Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate. B. Occupancy sensors that are ceiling mounted shall be located a minimum of 4’-0” away from a mechanical equipment diffuser. 3.02 ORIENTATION Unless noted otherwise: A. Set switches vertically with handle operating vertically, up position "ON" at +48" above finished floor when measured to top of box. B. Set receptacles vertically with ground slot down at +18" above finished floor. C. Set exterior receptacles horizontally at +18" above finished grade. 3.03 DEVICE PLATES A. Shall be stainless steel for each new wiring device and for each telephone and signal equipment outlet, except where equipment mounted thereon covers the outlet box completely. B. Provide new stainless steel covers on existing outlet boxes being reused. 3.04 DIMMER SWITCHES A. Provide a separate neutral for each phase. 3.05 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws connecting frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding. B. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuits supplying isolated ground and ground-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacles. 3.06 HANDICAPPED ACCESS A. Comply with requirements of Washington State Handicapped Access Code. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 FUSES 26 28 13 - 1/2 SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all fuses as required. Provide three (3) spare of each size and type required. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the jobsite or from water that may contact the fuse before the equipment is installed. Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightening, and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding conductors. All fuses shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAINS, FEEDERS, AND BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284°F. melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 to maintain the Engineered protection of the system components. B. Motor Circuits: All individual motor circuits with full load amperes ratings (FLA) of 480 amperes or less shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP-C Low-Peak Time-Delay Fuses of the ratings shown on the drawings. All other motors, (such as 1.0 service factor motors) shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts) installed in ratings of approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 Dual Element Time Delay or Class L. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bussman B. Littlefuse 2.03 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Provide a spare fuse cabinet for the above-required spare fuses. 2.04 NAMEPLATE A. Provide Nameplate "Spare Fuse Cabinet.” PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FUSES A. Install in all fusible devices provided under this Contract. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 FUSES Job Number 2210142.00 26 28 13 - 2/2 3.02 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Locate in 4th floor electrical room. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES 26 28 16 - 1/2 SECTION 26 28 16 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provided all disconnects, fused and unfused, required by code for equipment furnished under this and other divisions of these specifications and as shown on the drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric B. Square-D C. Siemens D. Cutler-Hammer 2.02 DISCONNECTS A. Switch shall be heavy-duty type, shall be quick-break and shall be horsepower rated. Switch shall have blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall be single throw unless noted. B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Door interlock shall include a defeating scheme, shall be padlockable in the "Off" position. C. Enclosure shall be suitable for environment in which mounted. All exterior enclosures shall have a minimum raintight rating. 2.03 FUSED SWITCHES (OR FUSED DISCONNECTS) A. Shall be as above with addition of fuse space and clips to accept only fuses as noted in Section 26 28 13. B. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer's requirements of protected equipment. 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates on all enclosures and include the following information: Load served, voltage, phase, panel and circuit number. Construct and attach in accordance with Section 26 00 00, Paragraph 2.05. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORTS A. Secure solidly to wall or approved mounting frame. Disconnects supported only by Raceway are not acceptable. 3.02 SPLICES A. Wiring space within enclosure shall not be used as a junction box. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES Job Number 2210142.00 26 28 16 - 2/2 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All material installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and the provisions of applicable codes. B. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 26 43 00 - 1/9 SECTION 26 43 00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A.This Section describes the materials and installation requirements for Surge Protective Devices (SPD). SPD devices are used for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients, and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching. B.This Specification also describes the mechanical and the electrical requirements for the SPD devices. The SPD shall be suitable for application in both category A, B and C environments as described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41- 2002. C.The SPD shall be of parallel design and provide individual protection components connected Line to Ground and Line to Line for Delta and High Resistance Grounded systems and Line to Ground, Line to Neutral and Neutral to Ground for Wye and Single-Phase distribution systems. D.Systems not providing discreet protection components in the above configuration will be rejected. A schematic diagram showing the configuration and technology of all internally connected components must be provided with submittals. E.The SPD devices will be used both near electrical service entrance locations and at locations distant from service entrance locations (panels, MCCs, equipment disconnects, etc.). For the purposes of this Specification it should not be assumed that on wye-connected systems, a neutral-to-ground bond will not be located electrically close to the suppressor location, thus, discreet neutral-to-ground suppression and filter components are required. F.The Manufacturer/Vendor shall furnish all of the necessary SPD products and related hardware (i.e. flush mounting kits, mounting brackets, etc.) as required for the installation of the Surge Protective Devices (SPD) system suitable for the application. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General Conditions B.Section 26 05 19 - Wire and Cable C.Section 26 05 26 - Grounding D.Section 26 05 32 - Outlet and Pull Boxes E.Section 26 05 33 - Raceways F.Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.The Vendor/Manufacturer shall submit three (3) copies of all related SPD Specifications, product data, electrical and mechanical shop drawings, installation requirements/instructions, maintenance manuals (if applicable), and performance/warranty information requested in this document for the actual proposed SPD device(s) to the Project Engineer. All information shall be submitted in a PDF indexed by response and test. The Project Engineer reserves the right to select or reject any vendor response or product. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00 26 43 00 - 2/9 B.In order for the SPD device to be considered for this project, all responses to information requested in this Specification must be provided in writing and must reference each Specification section and sub-section. Written submittal responses shall be signed by the Manufacturer’s VP of Engineering. Attach information as necessary to provide compliance with specification response requirements. If a manufacturer can not fully comply with a section of the Specification, this must be stated in the response and the reason for non-compliance shall be provided. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND PERFORMANCE A.Each complete suppression unit shall be UL1449 4th Edition Listed as a Surge Protective Device. UL 1449 test data for proposed SPD devices, including UL let through voltage classification, shall be provided with submittal. Units shall bear suppressed voltage rating issued by UL. B.The Engineer reserves the right to have an employee or a representative designated by the Firm witness any testing required by this document. Vendor/Manufacturer shall provide written notice of intent to test and shall coordinate testing with the Engineer, should the Engineer desire to witness tests. C.Performance & Durability Testing: Units shall be tested by an independent test agency in accordance with test procedures outlined in ANSI/IEEE C62.45, NEMA LS1 & UL1449. The following test data shall be provided: 1.Provide Maximum Surge Current (Single Pulse Rated, 8/20µS, by mode, Amperes) as per NEMA LS1-1992 – 2.2.9 with submittals document. Maximum surge current rating shall not be less than 120kA (60kA per mode including N-G) for branch panel models in low exposure areas, high exposure areas and for IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - Category B Switchboard and Motor Control Center Locations. Maximum surge current rating (per phase in applicable modes other than Neutral to Ground) shall not be less than 240kA (120kA per mode including N-G) for IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - Category C Locations, including all Electrical Equipment located at Service Entrance location. Provide proof of completion of such tests and test data with submittal data. Provide surge current ratings for each applicable protection mode (L-L, L-N, L-G & N-G) with submittals. 2.Provide durability test data utilizing the ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category C3, 20kV/10kA, 1.2 x 50 S - 8x20S combination waveform. Provide test data with submittals. Let through voltages shall be provided for all applicable protection modes (L-N, L-G & N-G) from zero reference. All SPD devices (including branch panel) shall withstand a minimum of 5,000 hits delivered at a rate of one pulse per minute. Unit shall not fail or suffer let through voltage degradation of more than 7%. Lead length for testing and let through measurements shall be 6”. Provide lead length used for testing with submittals. 3.Provide performance test data utilizing the ANSI/IEEEC62.41.2-2002, Exposure - High, 10kV/10kA, 1.2 x 50µS - 8x20µS combination waveform. Provide test data with submittals. Let through voltages shall be provided for all applicable protection modes (L-N, L-L & L-G) from zero reference. Lead length for testing and let through measurements shall be 6”. Provide lead length used for testing with submittals. 4.Provide let through voltage test data and test waveforms used for (N-G) with the submittals for units intended for grounded Wye systems. 5.Provide let through voltage test data for the ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Category B, 0.5µS-100 kHz 6kV/.5kA ring wave (L-L, L-N & L-G) with the submittals. Let through voltages shall be provided for all applicable protection modes and shall be measured from the zero reference. 6.Provide let through voltage test data for the ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Neutral grounded at service entrance – Far Category, 0.5µS-100 kHz 3kV ring wave (N-G) with the submittals for units intended for grounded systems. 7.If available, test data shall be provided for the ANSI/IEEEC62.41.2-2002 level three category of the 5/50 nS EFT Burst waveform as a part of this submittal package. Let through voltages shall be provided for all applicable protection modes (L-L, L-N, L-G & N-G). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 26 43 00 - 3/9 8.All SPD tests must provide let through voltages using a positive polarity pulse at the 90-degree phase angle location on the sine wave for Category B and C waveforms and 180-degree for Category A waveforms. Let through voltages must be measured from the zero-voltage reference line for the tests. 9.All let through voltage test results must be provided with a minimum of six inches of lead length as measured from the point where the wire would normally exit the SPD enclosure (standard installation) to the point of termination. Wire used for test must be of the type of building wiring material recognized by the latest adopted version of the NEC and must be readily available for wiring commercial buildings, unless permanently attached to and supplied with suppressor. Conductors sizing used for test shall be based on manufacturer's installation instructions for the proposed product. 10.The above test results, including oscillographs, test conditions, identity of the testing lab and the test technicians and engineers shall be provided as part of the submittal package. The manufacturer shall provide the contact phone number for a readily available factory engineer responsible for answering questions about this product and the tests performed. Information shall be provided in a format that is easily to analyze and review. 11.Maximum Let Through Voltages based on above requirements: Peak Voltage Let Through Table Peak Let Through Voltages (measured from zero reference per NEMA LS-1) shall not exceed: Voltage & Configuration Test / Wave L-L L-N L-G N-G Phase Angle 480/277 Wye - Grounded C3 – 20 kV/10ka 2500 1600 1900 1700 90 480/277 Wye - Grounded B3 – 6 kV/3kA 1700 1000 1100 1000 90 480/277 Wye - Grounded A1 – 2kV – 67A 150 150 150 150 180 480/277 Wye - Grounded UL1449 Rev2 Update 1500 800 800 800 ---- 480 Delta C3 – 20 kV/10ka 2400 N/A 2400 N/A 90 480 Delta B3 – 6 kV/3kA 2000 N/A 1900 N/A 90 480 Delta A1 – 2kV – 67A 75 N/A 1200 N/A 180 120/208 Wye C3 – 20 kV/10ka 1400 1100 1300 1150 90 120/208 Wye B3 – 6 kV/3kA 950 550 600 550 90 120/208 Wye A1 – 2kV – 67A 100 75 120 100 180 120/208 Wye UL1449 Rev2 Update 800 400 400 400 ----- 120/240 Split Phase C3 – 20 kV/10ka 1400 1100 1250 1200 90 120/240 Split Phase B3 – 6 kV/3kA 1000 600 600 600 90 120/240 Split Phase A1 – 2kV – 67A 100 75 120 95 180 D.Manufacturers Qualifications: Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of SPD products for category C locations (ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002), and whose products have been providing satisfactory service for not less than five years, shall be considered. A customer reference list, with a minimum of five contact names and current phone numbers shall be provided with the submittals. All manufacturer qualifications shall be provided as part of the submittal. E.The successful manufacturer/vendor shall assign a technical contact person for SPD application, installation and warranty questions. This contact shall be available to provide a response to a technical question within a maximum of two business days. F.The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any or all submittals, to request additional information as deemed necessary or to request submittals for a different unit that may be deemed more appropriate for this installation. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00 26 43 00 - 4/9 G.Engineer reserves the right to have an employee or a representative designated by firm witness any testing required by this document. Vendor/manufacturer shall provide written notice of intent to test and shall coordinate testing with Engineer, should Engineer desire to witness tests. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A.UL compliance and labeling: Listed per UL 1449, 4th Edition. B.SPD and Enclosures proposed and submitted shall be safety agency listed for all intended installations, meeting or exceeding all of the following: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 & 13. C.SPD device shall be designed to allow installation in accordance with latest adopted version of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Codes (NESC) and applicable OSHA 1910 requirements. D.NEMA LS1 (latest revision) E.IEEE Standard C62.41.1, IEEE Standard C62.41.2 & IEEE Standard C62.45 (latest revisions) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.The SPD shall be compatible with the electrical system voltage, current, system configuration and intended applications. B.The SPD maximum continuous operation voltage (MCOV) shall be capable of sustaining 115% of the nominal RMS voltage (with the associated peak voltage of 1.414*RMS) continuously without degradation and heating. C.The SPD shall only use clamping components connected in parallel with the supply to limit the surge voltages. D.Arc Discharge components, such as Gas Tube Arresters shall not be used as the sole protection component in any protection mode. Gas Tube Arresters may be used in conjunction with other components, such as MOVs and SADs to provide protection. Where Gas Tube Arresters are installed, the circuit shall be specifically designed to prevent power follow current. E.Internal Fusing – If provided, shall be component level style: 1.Component Level Fusing: a.Each Metal Oxide Varistor, or other primary suppression component, shall be individually fused for safety and performance to allow the SPD to withstand the full rated single pulse peak surge capacity per mode without the operation or failure of the fuses. Overcurrent fusing that limits the listed peak surge current of the SPD is not acceptable. Replaceable cartridge type per phase or per mode overcurrent fusing is not acceptable. b.For arc quenching capability, minimization of smoke and contaminates in the event of a failure, and to ensure the safest possible design, all surge components, current carrying paths and fusing shall be packed in fuse grade silica sand. c.Fusing shall be present in every mode, including Neutral-to-Ground. d.The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to a 200kA symmetrical fault current with 600VAC applied, providing a listed 200kAIC Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) without additional over- current protection. F.Status Indication & Monitoring: The suppressor shall include individual Phase Status LEDs, a red Service Required LED, an integrated Audible Alarm with silence button and Form C dry contacts (N.O. or N.C.) for remote monitoring capability. The form C contacts must be rated a minimum of 65VDC/150VAC with a load of 30WDC/60VA AC, and must be isolated and insulated from the ground plane and the power system to prevent Surges from reaching the monitoring system. The system shall provide insulation and isolation against any impressed voltages. Contacts shall be designed to change state upon device failure or loss of power. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 26 43 00 - 5/9 G.The protection should be housed in the appropriate NEMA rated, heavy duty powder coated steel enclosure. This enclosure must provide complete protection against personnel hazards and damage to equipment should a failure of the SPD protection device occur. This enclosure shall also be designed to allow connection of the SPD device without sharp bends in the conductors and lead lengths of less than 18" from the SPD Lugs (or enclosure opening for devices with leads attached) to the final point of attachment to the power system for the application (assuming connection point is 12" from the exterior of the enclosure). H.Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive warranty that provides for unlimited full replacement of a suppressor that is damaged or that fails to meet manufacturers published specifications and specifications provided within, without pro-rating value. Warranty shall provide coverage for a minimum period of 20 years for individual units (standard warranty) and. Series SPDs shall be covered for ten (10) years. These Unlimited Replacement Warranties cannot exclude system overvoltages or direct lightning strike events. Warranty shall not require any factory or third-party testing. Warranty shall apply to installed unit(s) for the duration of the warranty period no matter who owns the facility or equipment. All warranty information and copies of warranty documents must be provided with this response. 1.All replacements shall be of same make, model and configuration as original unit unless otherwise requested or approved by customer. 2.The manufacturer/vendor shall provide a warranty replacement unit at the facility within five (5) days of receipt of written notification that the SPD unit has failed, at no cost to the customer. 3.If the manufacturer/vendor requires inspection of the installed unit to validate warranty claim, the manufacturer/vendor must visit the site where the failed SPD device(s) are located within three (3) days of notification. This visit will be performed at no cost to customer. This section does not modify the requirement for the SPD replacement to be within five (5) days of written notification as described in section G, above. 4.The replacement unit shall be sent to the facility without shipping, handling, examination or other fees. I.Complete, comprehensive installation instructions shall be provided for the SPD systems proposed. Installation instructions must provide for compliance with latest adopted NEC requirements and UL listing requirements, while not degrading performance of SPD device as tested. Provide copies of installation instructions for the models proposed with the specification response. Successful vendors/manufacturer shall provide a complete, comprehensive installation checklist. J.If manufacturer claims SPD device to have filtering capabilities, provide complete information on filtering performance of SPD device with specification response. This information must include attenuation across a stated frequency range. If the SPD is a UL 1283 listed device, the manufacturer shall provide all performance specifications for filter attenuation. K.Provide complete enclosure dimensions (H*W*D) and cutsheets indicating dimensions including locations of terminations and wire entry locations with specification response. L.Provide UL Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR). Minimum ratings shall be 200kAIC without additional/external over-current protection. M.Manufacturer shall make available metal flush plates for distribution and branch panel SPDs. The flush plate shall provide for a clean architectural finish and be utilized where the attached panel is mounted flush. N.Manufacturer must have knowledgeable local representation and distribution within 100 miles of the project location and must be willing to provide technical support, warranty claim support, and installation support for the project. O.Successful manufacturer/vendor must be capable of supplying SPD for project within 20 days of receipt of order for orders of 25 units and less for models submitted in response to this specification. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00 26 43 00 - 6/9 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE A.Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser / one-line diagram. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 4th Edition, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. B.For 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression and filter elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. C.Suppressors shall include a passive circuit that allows the suppressor to actively follow the voltage waveform and provide a clamping envelope that follows the sine wave to limit low level IEEE C62.41 A1 ring waves (of either polarity) at all locations on the sine wave. This circuit shall also perform in the Neutral to Ground Mode where a sine wave does not exist. Details of circuit used to provide this function and information detailing and quantifying the performance of this circuit (in all modes with Category A1 ring wave) shall be provided with specification response. All Let Through Voltage (LTV) values shall not exceed those stated in section 1.04.C.11. D.Indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided, consisting of status LEDs for each phase, a Red Service Required LED and an internal Audible Alarm with silence/mute button. Dry contacts (NO/NC) are required for external monitoring. E.SPD shall exhibit fully redundant protection for each phase. F.The surge suppressor shall be of parallel design and shall be capable of being removed and replaced without disrupting electrical service to the facility. G.Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally. H.All surge protective devices shall be of the same manufacturer. I.The minimum single impulse current rating (as per NEMA LS-1) shall not be less than 240,000 amperes per phase (120KA per mode). Provide proof of compliance by supplying certified test results from independent test lab with submittals. J.Maximum size of SPD units for Primary, Service Entrance applications is 15.5”x12.3”x8.25”. 2.03 SECONDARY SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS A.Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser / one-line diagram. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 4thEdition, Standard for Suge Protective Devices. B.For 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression and filter elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. C.Suppressors shall include a passive circuit that allows the suppressor to actively follow the voltage waveform and provide a clamping envelope that follows the sine wave to limit low level IEEE C62.41 A1 ring waves (of either polarity) at all locations on the sine wave. This circuit shall also perform in the Neutral to Ground Mode where a sine wave does not exist. Details of circuit used to provide this function and information detailing and quantifying the performance of this circuit (in all modes with Category A1 ring wave) shall be provided with specification response. All Let Through Voltage (LTV) values shall not exceed those stated in section 1.04.C.11. D.Indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided, consisting of status LEDs for each phase, a Red Service Required LED and an internal Audible Alarm with silence/mute button. Dry contacts (NO/NC) are required for external monitoring. E.SPD shall exhibit fully redundant protection for each phase. F.The surge suppressor shall be of parallel design and shall be capable of being removed and replaced without disrupting electrical service to the facility. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 26 43 00 - 7/9 G.Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally. H.All surge protective devices shall be of the same manufacturer. I.The minimum single impulse current rating (as per NEMA LS-1) shall not be less than 120,000 amperes per phase (60KA per mode). Provide proof of compliance by supplying certified test results from independent test lab with submittals. J.Maximum size of SPD units for Secondary Suppressors for MCC, Distribution & Branch Panel applications is 15.5”x12.3”x8.25”. 2.04 PRIOR APPROVALS A.The following manufacturer(s) have submitted the required information and have been reviewed and approved for this project: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Suppressors shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation instructions and the requirements of: the NEC, the local authority having jurisdiction and the project engineer. B.Size overcurrent protective device and conductors per manufacturer's recommendations and NEC requirements. Total Protection Solutions SPD by Thomas & Betts Power Solutions Voltage Location 480Y277v 3 Phase Bonded Wye 480v 3 Phase Delta 208Y120v 3 Phase Bonded Wye 208v 3 Phase Delta 120/240v Single / Split Phase 120v Fire Alarm, Security, PLC, etc. Main Services ST240-3Y480- FL ST240- 480NN-FL ST240- 3Y208-FL ST240- 240NN-FL ST240-1S240- FL N/A Distribution MCC & Branch Panels LP120-3Y480- FL ST120- 480NN-FL LP120- 3Y208-FL ST120- 240NN-FL LP120-1S240- FL N/A Dedicated Equipment N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A LTE120-30A SPD Applications Notes: 1.Use 60 Amp Circuit Breakers for Service Entrances and 30 Amp Circuit Breakers for Distribution, MCC & Branch Panel applications. 2.Use Delta units for unbonded/ungrounded and high resistance ground Wye applications. Innovative Technology Protector by Eaton/Cutler Hammer Voltage Location 480Y277v 3 Phase Bonded Wye 480v 3 Phase Delta 208Y120v 3 Phase Bonded Wye 208v 3 Phase Delta 120/240v Single / Split Phase 120v Fire alarm Security, PLC, etc. Main Services PTE240- 3Y201-L-SD PTE240- NN400-L-SD PTE240- 3Y101-L-SD PTE240- NN201-L-SD PTE240- 1S101-L-SD N/A Distribution MCC & Branch Panels PTE120- 3Y201-L-SD PTE120- NN400-L-SD PTE120- 3Y101-L-SD PTE120- NN201-L-SD PTE120- 1S101-L-SD N/A Dedicated Equipment N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A LTE120-30A 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00 26 43 00 - 8/9 C.Project Engineer or their appointed representative may perform inspection of the installed suppressors and reserves the right to require corrections to the installation to comply with manufacturer’s installation requirements and project specifications. D.The SPD supplier must provide on-site installation training for the electrical contractor. 3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE A.Install one primary suppressor at each utility service entrance to the facility as indicated on the drawings. B.Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnecting means in accordance with NEC requirements. C.Provide a 60 Amp circuit breaker (with a safety clip to ensure the circuit breaker cannot be inadvertently turned off) in the switchboard as over-current protection for the wire and as a disconnecting means for the SPD (or as specified by the manufacture). D.Use minimum #6 AWG wire for connecting the SPD. E.Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Lead length of connecting conductor shall not exceed two (2) feet without written permission of the specifying Engineer. If length is exceeded, Contractor may be required to relocate SPD at no cost to the Owner. F.Over-length SPD leads (greater than 24”) must be twisted together (1 twist/foot) and securely tie-wrapped once per foot to reduce impedance of the leads. G.SPD leads may not be spliced. H.Suppressor's ground shall be bonded to enclosure frame and the service entrance ground bus, and conduit between the SPD and the switchboard must provide secure electrical/mechanical connections. 3.03 SECONDARY SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS A.Install one secondary suppressor at each MCC, Distribution Panel, Branch Panel & Sub-Panel location as indicated on the drawings. B.Provide a 30 Amp circuit breaker (with a safety clip to ensure the circuit breaker cannot be inadvertently turned off) in the panel being protected as over-current protection for the wire and as a disconnecting means for the SPD (or as specified by the manufacture). C.Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to the panelboard shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Mount the SPD directly adjacent to the circuit breaker closest to the neutral bus, such that the maximum length of connecting wiring is kept as short as possible, not exceed 18 inches for all phase and neutral leads (24” for ground lead on IG panels). If length is exceeded, Contractor may be required to relocate SPD at no cost to the Owner. D.Over-length SPD leads (greater than 18”) must be twisted together (2 twists/foot) and securely tie-wrapped once per foot to reduce impedance of the leads. Quality compression butt-splice connections are required when extending SPD leads (wire nuts are not acceptable). E.Grounding for all non-IG installations: Suppressor's ground lead shall be bonded to the panel enclosure with a small ground lug as close as possible to the SPD mounting point. Conduit between the SPD and the switchboard must provide secure electrical/mechanical connections. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) 26 43 00 - 9/9 F.Multiple “Feed-Through” Panels with shared SPD units must be immediately adjacent to each other (side by side) with short tie cables not to exceed 36”. Sub-panels must be feed from a primary panel with a “lug-out’, lug-in” tie connection, and the tie connection lugs must be at the same end of the primary and sub-fed panel. i.e. bottom to bottom or top to top to ensure short tie “sub-feed” cables. 1.Dual Panel Configurations: One SPD per two panels 2.Three and Four Panel Configurations: One SPD installed on both outside panels of the multi-panel configuration, i.e. Install SPD on first (primary) and another one on the third or fourth sub-fed panel for a total of two SPDs. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1/3 SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational. B. Recessed fixtures installed in fire-resistive ceiling construction shall have the same fire rating as the ceiling or shall be provided with fireproofing boxes having materials of the same fire rating as the ceiling. 1.03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES NUMBERS A. Series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number, size, wattage or the type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully comply with contract documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted) the data shall clearly cross reference (written or highlighted) that the substitute fixture complies with every detail of the specified fixture. Fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PARTS A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300°F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless specified otherwise. 2.02 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS A. Virgin acrylic or polycarbonate plastic (0.125-inch thick overall minimum), UV stabilized or glass. Shall be contained in a captive metal frame that remains attached to the fixture when door is in open position. 2.03 SPECIAL PARTS A. Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the building to suitably mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. B. Low Voltage Transformers: Provide and install where required to power individual or linear runs of low voltage light fixtures. 2.04 LAMPS A. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or as noted. B. Solid-State Lighting: Fixtures shall have a lumen maintenance life expectancy (L70) of > 50,000 hours, a CRI of > 82, and a CCT of 3500K. Each solid-state fixture model shall be tested in accordance with IES LM-79. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LIGHTING Job Number 2210142.00 26 50 00 - 2/3 2.05 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES A. Rigid type, with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end, consisting of iron pipe, with brass or aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick. B. Aircraft cable, stainless steel, sized appropriately by manufacturer for weight and seismic zone. C. Provide a canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box directly without a canopy. 2.06 EXIT SIGNS A. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20-gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with red glass or plastic back of the cutout. Mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull-out type with chain catch. Removable cutout arrows shall indicate direction of travel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL A. Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the drawings. Verify mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL listed for the location, and application in which they are installed. B. Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on or from the ceiling as shown. Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Recessed fixtures installed in seismic areas shall be installed utilizing specially designed seismic clips. D. Suspended fixtures installed in seismic areas shall have 45° swivel hangers and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45° range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45° swing. 3.02 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES A. Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed. Prior to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers, wash, rinse and reinstall. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES A. Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect/Engineer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. Include costs for all equipment and personnel expenses required for adjustment. B. For fixtures with indirect lighting, notify Engineer prior to installation of any circumstance where the fixture lamp source will be within 12” of ceiling. 3.04 LED FIXTURES A. Recessed Troffer Type: For fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide integral tabs, which rotate into position after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity. Provide two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. Circuit connection shall be through use of 60-inch flexible conduit from a rigidly supported junction box. For plaster or GWB ceilings, provide a plaster frame compatible with light fixture. B. Recessed Downlight Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling suspension system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3/3 C. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type: 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, hang from structural members by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 2. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture, provide additional framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported from structure with seismic bracing independent of ceiling. 3. For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire fixture length unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. Provide 3/8-inch thread rod secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel. 4. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. 3.05 LOCATION A. Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no dimensions appear. Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions appear and quarter point mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings. B. Refer to details, mechanical drawings, and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for equipment and ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures prior to installation. If conflicts cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify Architect/Engineer. 3.06 SPARE PARTS A. Drivers/Ballasts: Provide (10) or 10% spare (whichever is less) of each replaceable LED driver or fluorescent/HID ballast. 3.07 SPARE FIXTURES A. Provide the following spare devices: Item Quantity EX1 2 B. Spare fixtures shall include 100 feet of conduit, wire, miscellaneous appurtenances, and all labor, as required for a complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner’s representative at the site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner. C. Self-Luminous Exit Sign: Provide (4) four Self-Luminous Exit Signs Lithonia # DSW1X Green or Red to match EX-1. Install at locations as directed by Architect. 3.08 FIXTURE TENTING A. Contractor shall coordinate ceiling types with architectural drawings and specifications and provide equivalent fire rated enclosures above all light fixtures which penetrate rated ceilings. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 1/25 SECTION 27 00 00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project on an occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime, double-shifting, or special work schedules and coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification Section 01 1100 for additional information. 1.02 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall make all corrections as needed, to the satisfaction of the Architect. B.Provide system documentation and Owner training as specified below. C.An important item of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick-Off Meeting, which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets. 1.The General Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of the meeting. 2.The Owners representative and the Owners IT Department representative will be present for the meeting. 3.The General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and a representative from EACH Section shall attend this coordination meeting. 4.The estimated time is approximate and shall be extended for each Installing Vendor as necessary. 5.EACH Installing Vendor shall submit their list of coordination items through the Construction Channels a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review. a.Review EACH specific Section for the sub-section titled “Coordination” for a minimum list of items to be discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting D.The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for EACH specific Low Voltage Section in all Division 27 and Division 28 sections as a part of this project. E.Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards: 1.International Building Code (latest edition) 2.International Fire Code (latest edition) 3.NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition). 4.Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest edition) 5.TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications F.EACH Installing Vendor for their Section shall possess a current and valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low Voltage License. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 2/25 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Device or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represents the intent of the system. If additional equipment (that may not be shown) is required to make a fully functional system, then provide such equipment as required. B.Each specification section that is governed by these specifications shall be provided, installed, commissioned, and warranted by a local Installing Vendor that meet the following requirements for the equipment manufacturer that is being submitted for: 1.All equipment for EACH Specification Section shall be provided and installed by a single supplier. 2.Have installed a minimum of three (3) Systems within the past five (5) years. 3.Maintain a 24-hour emergency service program using Manufacturer Trained technicians, shall respond to service calls within 24 hours during and after the warranty period. 4.The Installing Vendor shall be Manufacturer Approved to purchase the equipment, have a local office staffed with Manufacturer Certified installers that are capable to maintain, service, and warrant the equipment being installed, who are full-time employees and are capable of programming, testing, inspecting, maintaining, warranting, inventorying parts for the life of the system, and shall be located within a 100-mile radius of the project site. 5.Offices that require staff from another “Branch Office and/or Company Office” outside of this radius, are not acceptable. C.Prior to completion of the installation, the Installing Vendor shall provide: 1.At the Owner’s option, a preventative maintenance agreement shall become effective at the end of the warranty period. 2.A proposal for off-site monitoring services (for systems that are applicable). 1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.In addition to the “Substantial Completion” requirements, when applied to EACH of the specification sections identified in “Scope and Related Documents” listed elsewhere in this specification, this shall be defined as follows; 1.The stage in the progress of the Work, where the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Owner can utilize the Work for its intended use. 2.ALL of the requirements listed in “Testing & Complete System Functionality” shall be met. Once all conditions have been met, this shall be deemed Substantial Completion. These requirements shall be completed on or before the Substantial Completion date listed in the Contract Documents. 1.05 DOCUMENTATION A.Document Format: 1.All documents shall be generated on a PC. Provide these documents electronically, with the As-built Documentation, where applicable. a.Data sheets, installation manuals, technical documents, brochures, and user manuals may be in PDF format. b.Power Point Presentation(s) shall be in MS-Power Point. c.Test Forms and other project specific documents shall be in an editable format, either MS-Word or MS-Excel. d.Drawings and details shall be in AutoCAD™ 2013 or newer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A.Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be provided for EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section Number and shall contain, but not be limited to the items listed below: 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 3/25 B.Submittals – Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. Provide the following: 1.A complete materials list of the quantity of each device, the manufacturer, model number, and description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that will be provided. This list shall precede the data sheets. a.Each System component or device data sheet shall have and indicating arrow next to each component or device that is being submitted. C.Additional Shop Drawing Requirements: 1.For additional shop drawing requirements, refer to EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section Number, in addition to what is listed below. D.Shop Drawings – Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. 1.Shop Drawing Requirements: The installing vendors complete and full-size set of shop drawings shall be issued in the following format: a.They shall be clear and legible. b.The same sheet size as the Contract Drawings (i.e. 30” x 42”). c.A minimum of 1/8” text height shall be used for all text, symbol text, and subscript text. d.Scale of Drawings: 1.Site Plan Drawings shall be the same scale as issued in the Contract Documents. 2.Floor Plan Drawings shall be 1/8” =1’-0”, unless directed to do otherwise. e.The Electrical Legend, Wire Legend, Load and Battery Calculations, Riser Diagram, Sequence of Operation info, Wiring Details, and Mounting Details shall precede the Site Plans and Floor Plans. f.All sheets, including the cover, shall include a Title Block along the edge of each of the drawings, that when the drawings are rolled up, the following information shall be visible: 1.The System specific sheet number. 2.Project Name, specification Section Number and Section Title name. 3.Floor Name, area, and/or section of the building (use the name of the area and/or floor description that is on the Contract Drawings). g.Architectural information on the Contract Drawings, shall be included on the Installing Vendor Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; Match Lines, Grid Lines, Grid Bubbles, Key Plan, and Enlarged Floor Plans. h.Electrical information on the Contract Drawings shall be included on the Installing Vendor Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; all applicable General Notes and applicable Construction Notes for each of the Floor Plans. Where Enlarged Plans are shown on the Contract Drawings, include this in Installing Vendor Shop Drawings to show the room and ALL equipment within the room, to help facilitate and coordinate the installation of the Low Voltage equipment for all systems. 2.Cover Sheet: The first page of the shop drawings shall be a cover sheet to include the following items; a.Owners Project information: 1.Site Information 2.Name of site, address, city, and zip code of where the installation shall take place. b.Installing Vendors Project information: 1.Business name 2.Local office address of the Installing Vendor 3.Primary contact person name, phone number, and email address who is responsible for the long- term management of the Owners System. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 4/25 c.Provide a “Sheet Index”, which assigns a sheet number and unique name for each sheet that is included in the shop drawing submittal package. As part of the sheet index, list every sheet that is part of the system shop drawing package. On the left side of the Sheet Index, provide two columns - “Included” and “Not Included”. Include a check box and provide a check in each box for all sheets that are included or not included, in each submittal. 1.Each sheet shall have a System Specific Sheet Number and shall match the Contract Drawing sheet numbering system. (i.e. E4.02 shall be FA-4.02 [for Fire Alarm], E4.02 shall be LAN-4.02 [for Local Area Network]). 3.Legend Information: From Left to Right, provide the following information for EACH device: a.Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings. b.List the manufacturer’s name. c.List the manufacturer’s model number. 4.Provide a logical description of the device. a.Provide the back-box requirements and related information. At a minimum, this shall include; 1.The height, width, and depth of each required back box for each symbol on the legend. 2.If the device is a back box or comes with a back box (IE: control panel, power supply, enclosure, etc.) then provide the height, width, and depth of the dimensions. 3.Indicate if this device back box is going to be installed flush, semi-flush, or surface mounted. 5.Provide a Wire Legend listing the cable manufacturer, model number, cable rating, size of conductors, quantity of conductors, and color of each conductor. Use the format in the Sample “Wire Legend”, as it applies to each system (see the Sample at the end of this specification). Provide a cable identification naming scheme (as defined within these specifications). a.The Wire Legend shall include the Cable Manufacturer and Model Number for EACH of the following types of cables (as applicable to the project): 1.Conduit/Raceway Cable 2.Open Cabling 3.Wet Rated Cable 4.Aerial Rated Cable 5.EACH cable and EACH cable type shall have a different letter designation. 6.Load and Battery Calculations: For EACH control Panel, Power Supply, and/or Amplifier for EACH System, at a minimum show the following Amp Draw, Circuit, and Battery calculations; a.The total Amp Draw load in stand by or non-active mode. b.The total Amp Draw load with all devices active and in a maximum load condition. c.Provide the spare power information that is available for future additional devices and/or equipment. 1.Include the quantities of spare circuits that are available (where applicable). d.Circuit calculations: 1.The quantity of each device per circuit 2.The Amp Draw per device per circuit (where applicable [this is not applicable to addressable devices that receive their power from an addressable data loop. Simply include the maximum amount of devices than can be placed on each addressable loop and the amount of addressable devices that are included on each addressable loop for this project]). 3.The total Amp Draw load per circuit 4.The cable length distance of each circuit 5.The gauge size of wire used for each circuit 6.The total line loss for each circuit 7.Factor the line loss and Amp Draw to show the actual voltage available at the end of each circuit (after the last device). 8.Include in the design layout, the requirements of “Spare Capacity” in Part 2 of this specification (where applicable). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 5/25 e.Battery Back Up: 1.All Batteries shall be sized to provide at least 20% spare capacity. Include this information in all calculations. 2.For Fire Alarm, include all calculations that are required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. f.Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) (UPS): 1.For systems that include a UPS, provide the maximum load (allowed by the UPS manufacturer) that EACH UPS is capable of providing, and list each item and its maximum load that will be connected to the UPS. Include the total load of all equipment connected to the UPS and list the spare capacity available. 7.Riser Diagram: Provide a System One-Line Riser Diagram that shows the entire system. List the following: a.List the head-end equipment and IP addressed devices. Show the connection to the “Cloud” WAN, where applicable. 1.Show each location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF separately). 2.Show each cable types, sizes, and quantities between the MDF and each designated IDF location. 3.Show EACH device in the MDF and each designated IDF location (Control Panel, CPU, DVR, Server, Power Supply and Terminal Cabinet [where applicable]) for each applicable system, the room name that each major system component is located in and show the connection to the headend equipment. 4.Show all field devices with their respective room names and/or room numbers and connections to their associated equipment. 5.Show all field devices with their respective address point (where applicable). 8.For the Fire Alarm System ONLY, provide a detailed Sequence of Operation matrix that meets or exceeds industry standards, and shows how the System will work. This includes, but is not limited to: a.All Inputs and/or Actions b.All Outputs and/or Controls 9.Provide all Mounting Details and mounting heights for: a.All head-end equipment b.Rack(s) (where applicable) c.Device(s) 10.Detailed Wiring Information: a.Show each individual conductor color for all wiring on the point-to-point wiring diagrams for each device. b.Show complete scale drawings of equipment, devices, wiring diagrams, and terminations of: 1.Each Control Panel, CPU, DVR, etc 2.Power Supply and/or amplifier 3.Rack equipment (where applicable) 4.EACH device type 5.EACH Terminal Cabinet (where applicable) 11.Rack Layout (where applicable) a.Show the intended equipment layout within the Rack(s). b.Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed. c.Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack. 1.If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the rack also. 12.The matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ of each system specification (where applicable). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 6/25 13.On the shop drawings, include a letter signed by the System designer that is responsible for the design depicted in the submittals and on the shop drawings. The letter shall state that the equipment and shop drawings design conform to national, state, local codes as adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction and meet or exceed all of the performance requirements as outlined in the specifications. a.Designers shall provide the following: 1.Provide a “signature” line and signature of the designer. 2.Provide a “printed name” line, below [or to the right] of the signature line and the printed name of the designer. 3.Provide a “date” line, below [or to the right] of the printed name line and date of the design. b.For Fire Alarm Shop Drawings, include the above information and the system shall be designed by one of the following (provide a copy of the supporting documentation): 1.NICET Level III Certified Designer 2.Registered Professional Engineer. 14.Label and Labeling: a.On the drawings, label each Rack, Control Panel, CPU, DVR, Power Supply(s), and Terminal Cabinet(s) in a logical numeric sequence. (i.e. for Fire Alarm Power Supplies, list them as FAPS-1, FAPS-2, etc). b.Cables: Generate an alpha-numeric label for each cable type and cable run. c.For projects with multiple sites, all labeling shall be consistent for all sites. 15.Show floor plan layout of devices and the anticipated routing of cable runs in parallel with all structural framing in a neat and orderly fashion. 16.EACH device at EACH location shall be shown on EACH floor plan. The cabling for EACH device shall be shown from EACH device to the device that it shall be connected to. EACH cable(s) shown on the floor plan shall be identified as described in the “Wire Legend” portion listed within this specification. a.Floor Plans: Show all system related devices and all equipment that the system specific shop drawings will interface to, on each of the floor plans. Provide Cabling for each device and the related wire type (as shown on the “Wire Legend”) shown for each of the device(s). Where multiple devices are on the same circuit or an addressable data cable is used, show all devices and their related cable(s). 17.EOL Supervision: a.Indicate on the floor plan drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistor(s) is located (where applicable). 18.Addressable Device information: a.Show each device address next to each device (where applicable), and clearly displaying this information so that it is not confusing as to which address belongs to which device. For non- addressable devices that will be connected to an addressable module, show the device address next to each device and the addressable module that it will be connected to. b.List the System Address Point(s) using a logical numbering sequence for the devices on a single run. c.Maintain the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed elsewhere in the specifications (where applicable). d.Include the complete Dip Switch and/or Rotary Addressing Scheme (used to set the device address for each addressable point) on the drawings. 19.Illuminated Graphic Map(s) (where applicable) – Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect. Provide the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. These shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings, but not be bound with the Shop Drawings submittal. a.Provide the actual full-size scale drawing and artwork that will be provided to the Owner for a final product. b.The Drawing submittal shall be in color. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 7/25 20.All drawing submittals shall be a complete and full set of the system. If drawings are required to be re- submitted, a full and complete set must be re-submitted. Partial system drawing sets will be rejected and the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall reissue a full set of drawings. Any re-submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense. 21.The Installing Vendor/Contractor is responsible for assuring that the conduit size, wire quantity, wire size, and wire type is suitable for the equipment supplied. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall review the proper installation method(s) for each type of device/equipment with the manufacturer’s representative, and the AHJ, Prior to Rough-In. 22.Provide shop drawings that are usable for trouble-shooting purposes showing equipment/device locations, conduit routing, junction boxes and connection wiring of entire system. E.Contract drawings shall not be used as Shop Drawings. F.The Shop Drawings shall be system specific. For example: only Fire Alarm equipment and connections to other equipment that will be interfaced to the Fire Alarm, shall be shown on the Fire Alarm drawings. G.Floor plans for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™ software. These drawing files will be made available to the Installing Vendor/Contractor for development of Shop Drawings and/or As Builts with a signed waiver of responsibility. 1.07 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS A.If the requirements of this section, related sections or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section, related sections, and the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section, related sections or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not forming to all governing codes and regulations. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS – CIVIL PLANS A.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and shall consult the civil plans to determine site conditions in the various areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Provide all equipment as defined in each specification and on the drawings. B.All equipment, panels, power supplies, and devices shall be manufactured under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label. C.All equipment for each system shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings shall not be acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendor’s responsibility to ensure that these requirements are met and replace any and all equipment up to and including the entire system if these requirements are not met. D.EACH of the specified Low Voltage Systems identified in PART 1 of these specifications including the design, devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings, represent that based on various equipment manufacturers. Any changes resulting from differences between the specified product and other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers, shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor. 1.Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. Any request for substitution shall be submitted by the Installing Vendor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than (10) days prior to the bid due date. Equipment that is approved by the Engineer will be issued by addendum prior to the bid date. E.Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 8/25 2.02 CONDITION OF MATERIAL A.All equipment shall be new, in un-opened boxes, and be the most current model available for each component and/or device that is provided for this project. For products that use firmware, the most current version available shall be downloaded and installed at each component and/or device, prior to any programming being performed. Outdated or used equipment, as determined by the Architect, shall be removed and replaced by the Installing Vendor/Contractor at no cost to the Owner. B.All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. All materials shall be in working order as intended by the manufacturer, at the completion of the project. 2.03 TERMINAL CABINETS, TERMINAL STRIPS, AND ENCLOSURES A.On-Site System Information Binder and Enclosure: EACH Specification Section identified on the first page of this specification shall have an Information Binder that shall be housed in a System Information enclosure. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with the text “(Section Title here) Information”, with each specific system name silk screened onto the enclosure door and shall bear the Underwriters’ Laboratories “UL" label. A “T-Turn” cam lock shall be used to keep the enclosure door closed, and a key shall NOT be required to open the enclosure. Use the following Space Age Electronics model number or approved equal. 1.All Systems (other than Fire Alarm): Model # YD9048DBXAA. Verify with the Architect the color of the enclosure(s) prior to ordering the enclosure. There shall be no additional charge to the Owner, for changes to the color of the enclosure. 2.For the Fire Alarm: Model # YD9049DBXAA shall be Red in color, have a hinged door, and have “Fire Alarm System Documentation” silk screened on the enclosure door. B.Terminal Cabinets (TC): 1.See EACH Specification for Terminal Cabinet requirements (where applicable). C.Terminal Strips: 1.See EACH Specification for Terminal Strip requirements (where applicable). D.Enclosures: 1.Each Systems Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), TC(s), and other metal enclosures shall have the following: a.Use key operated locks to secure the enclosure (keyed so that a single key can lock and unlock all enclosure locks for the entire system) and provide ten (10) keys. b.Use some form of wire management that uses permanently secured fasteners (no double back tape), and uses reusable and adjustable Velcro style cable straps, which shall be installed approximately every four inches within each enclosure. 2.04 LABELS AND LABELING A.The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Vendor. B.Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential manner. C.The Installing Vendor proposed alpha-numeric labeling that is intended to be used to identify all components of the system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer, with the submittal of equipment data sheets. D.All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 9/25 E.Phenolic name plates shall be used for identification of the Racks, Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), Terminal Cabinet(s), and other appurtenances of each system in a logical numeric sequence. Use an alpha-numeric name of each device for each location (created by the Installing Vendor) to identify the equipment on the Shop Drawings. 1.The size of the plate shall be two-inches high by approximately eight-inches wide. Different colors of backgrounds may be used for each System (but Red shall only be used for Fire Alarm). 2.The text color shall be White Letters that are 3/4-inch high and are 1/2-inch in width. F.Labeling of Cables must be provided in the following locations: EACH System Control Panel, Power Supplies, Terminal Cabinets, Terminal Strips, Racks, other system related appurtenances, and all junction boxes. Label all cables as shown on the Installing Vendors Shop Drawings. G.All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, self-laminating labels shall be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end. 1.Temporary Labels: Shall consist of the following: a.Using a fine point permanent style marker, Sharpie® or equivalent, to write directly onto the outer jacket of the cable or use temporary tags. b.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall take all precautions to use care when pulling the cable to insure the integrity of the temporary label. c.Remove all temporary labels and tags, prior to installing the permanent label. 2.Permanent Labels: Labels shall be produced using an electronic labeler. Cabling shall be marked with a permanent, electronic printed label with a self-laminating clear wrapping to cover the printed label and shall be secured to the outer jacket of the cable. 3.Provide Brady Model XSL-116-427 or approved equal. 2.05 SYSTEM CABLES A.All cable(s) shall be new. B.All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not limited to; underground, wet, plenum, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and local AHJ requirements. The Installing Vendor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all national codes, state codes, local codes, AHJ requirements, and each equipment manufacturer’s requirements, for a reliable, fully functional, and warrantable system, as intended. Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s) and/or conductor(s) as recommended by the manufacturer of either the equipment and/or the cables for each installation application: 1.Use the manufacturer recommended cables for EACH application and as required by Code (i.e. Raceway, Open Cabling, Wet and/or Aerial). 2.All cables shall be stranded, unless otherwise noted and/or recommended otherwise in writing by the manufacturer. a.Balanced twisted pair horizontal cabling as part of the permanent link (CAT5e, CAT6, CAT6A) are excluded from this requirement. 3.See PART 3 of this section, and of each System specification for more information. 2.06 PROOF OF DELIVERY FORM A.When providing Equipment to the Owner, the Installing Vendor shall provide the following transmittal document and obtain the necessary signatures. 1.The Installing Vendors Transmittal Document is defined as: a.Company logo b.Name c.Address d.Telephone number e.Delivery date f.Installing Vendors representative name that is making the delivery 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 10/25 g.Quantity of each item h.Manufacturers Name and Model Number i.The exact same description of the device (as used on the shop drawings) j.Provide a “signature” line for the Owners representative. k.Provide a “printed name” line, for the Owners representative. l.Provide a “date” line, below for the Owners representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORK ENVIRONMENT A.General: 1.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall have implemented an OSHA approved safety plan at their place of business and is a daily practice for all staff. a.Avoiding an injury is the primary concern for this project. Use OSHA industry standards to avoid accidents. 2.Coordination with Other Trades: a.It is the responsibility of the Installing Vendor/Contractor to coordinate with all trades for this project. Maintain all requirements for; project schedule deadlines, rough in, installation, programming, training, and ensuring that the Owner receives a fully functional system as defined in this specification. 3.02 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMITS A.No equipment shall be delivered to the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. B.An approved set of shop drawings shall be continuously available at the job site during construction, for review by the Architect. C.Obtain all permits as required, prior to installation of any equipment. They shall be continuously available at the job site during construction, for review by the Architect. 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION – GENERAL A.Open Cable installation methods are acceptable for this project when they are above accessible ceilings or in attic spaces, provided that all requirements identified in this specification are met. B.All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not limited to; underground, wet, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and local AHJ requirements. C.Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s) and/or conductor(s) as recommended by the manufacturer of either equipment and/or cables for each installation application. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all equipment manufacturers’ requirements for a reliable, fully functional, and warrantable system, as intended. D.Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725-16. E.Cable Supports: Clamps, "D-Rings", “J-Hooks”, Hangers, and Velcro tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each type cable. 1.See each specific Section requirements that shall be applied to this project in addition to these requirements. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 11/25 F.Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, all cables cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. The minimum radius bend shall be ten (10) times the cable outer diameter with no tensile load applied, and twenty (20) times the cable outer diameter with a maximum tensile load of 25ft/lbs applied during installation. The Installing Vendor/Contractor is responsible for maintaining the cable manufacturers Bend Radius and Pull Tension at all times. Corrections to cable installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. G.Service Loops and Cable Management: 1.Comb all wires for the duration of the cable run so they are neat, orderly, do not have excessive slack, and are not tangled, prior to any service loop, continuing through any service loop, continuing into EACH Enclosure(s) and/or System Rack(s). a.Provide a 10’-0” service loop of EACH device cable (a minimum of 2’-0” above the accessible ceiling (within 5’-0” of plan view) above EACH device. b.For ceilings that are open to structure, do NOT provide a service loops, except for the following locations: 1.MDF Rooms 2.IDF Rooms 3.Electrical Rooms 4.Storage Rooms 5.Designated system equipment locations that are NOT in view of the public. 6.Prior to rough-in, obtain Architects approval. 2.Cable Management shall be used to bundle all cables of like kind, separated by system type. 3.See Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling, listed elsewhere in this specification for more information. H.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall ensure that communications cable is installed with care, using techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping, cutting, deforming the jacket, or other damage. During inspection, evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared unacceptable. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall replace all unacceptable cabling at no additional expense to the Owner. I.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall order and install the exact cables as specified on the Installing Vendors Shop Drawings. If at any time during the installation and through the warranty period, it is discovered that any cable other than what is called for on the Installing Vendors drawings has been installed, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall remove all effected cables and shall provide and install the correct cable, as required. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall also provide the staff to monitor the building during the cable replacement period until the System is fully operational to the satisfaction of the Architect, without any additional cost to the Owner. J.All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 4’-0” intervals with UL approved devices. At no point shall cables rest on, be tied to or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing, ventilation ductwork, accessible ceiling and/or light fixture hangers, or any other equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or wire hangers (at the structures ceiling) specifically designed to support cables and/or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 12/25 K.All open cabling and/or conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the structure. Open cable installations shall use insulated mounting supports or rings approved for such use. Wiring shall be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or maintenance personnel servicing the equipment. 1.Installing open cabling and/or conduit on an exposed area of wall that could have been installed in a less conspicuous manner, especially where art or murals are to be painted is NOT acceptable. Any installation that does not meet this requirement will be required to be removed, and to patch and paint to match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. Then install the conduit, fasteners, and wire as required by the project, at no additional cost to the Owner in an acceptable manner that meets with the Architects approval. Obtain direction from the Architect prior to rough-in, for areas that need clarification. 2.In some cases, it may be more aesthetically appealing to install conduit down the wall to the floor and either through the floor or along the floor, to be less conspicuous. Contact the Architect for further clarification. L.Conduit type and areas where conduit will be required for this project are: 1.Provide EMT metal raceway in the following areas: a.Always conceal conduits within walls and/or ceiling spaces wherever possible. b.Provide conduit in all areas required by Code. c.Provide conduit from the device to accessible ceiling. d.Areas exposed to view and inaccessible areas. Install conduits to an accessible ceiling space, as defined above. 2.Provide conduit, conduit sleeves, junction boxes, couplers, connectors, cabling and terminations as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for a complete installation. 3.Conduit, conduit sleeves, raceways, floor boxes, device boxes, mud rings, etc., shall be furnished and installed per the Division 26 requirements. Maintain all Conduit Code Fill Requirements and provide no less than an additional 40% spare capacity for future growth. 4.Conduit and Raceway Usage: All communications cable shall be dedicated for communications purposes, and not to be shared with other electrical wiring when required by code. Obtain written approval from EACH of the manufacturers if more than one system type is going to be installed in a single conduit. a.Fire Alarm Cabling shall be in a separate, dedicated raceway (where indicated on the drawings). 5.Pull Cords: Provide Nylon type pull cords in EACH Conduit raceway. M.Cable Lubricants: Lubrications specifically designed for installing cables may be used to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue. 1.Recommended Products: a.Dyna-Blue b.American Polywater N.Horizontal Cabling: 1.Horizontal cable terminations shall be made at the appropriate patch panel and labeled. At each outlet box, a sufficient length of spare cable shall be provided for terminating outlet devices such that the outlet can be easily removed and inspected. In addition, each cable shall be terminated as indicated below: a.Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the TIA/EIA- 568-C document, manufacturer’s recommendations and/or best industry practices. b.Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. c.The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 13/25 O.Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling: 1.Cable shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations. Cables shall NOT be tie-wrapped to existing electrical conduit, existing cables, or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed. 2.Install cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the mounted equipment or block. Lace, Plastic or Velcro tie wrap all similarly routed cables together and attach to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via "square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of equipment and/or other cables. 3.See “Service Loops and Cable Management” listed within this specification for additional information. 3.04 SYSTEMS PLYWOOD BACK BOARD(S) A.Systems plywood back board(s) shall be used to mount enclosures of any kind, to any wall or surface. The systems plywood backboard shall be securely fastened to the walls to accommodate no less than ten times the total weight of the equipment to be mounted. The systems plywood backboard shall be a minimum of 3/4", APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A-C, and fire retardant with a flame spread rating not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E- 84. Provide the systems plywood backboard from the floor up to ceiling height (not exceeding 12’-0”) on all walls shown, unless otherwise noted. The entire backboard shall be painted with three (3) coats of fire-retardant paint (the color shall match the adjacent surface). EACH enclosure, when mounted, shall bear a minimum of 150 pounds weight on the enclosure. B.Mounting of equipment shall be logically placed, and shall be located at the top, bottom, left, or right portion of the systems plywood backboards to accommodate future growth of the system. Under no circumstances will the equipment be allowed to be mounted in the middle of the backboards. 3.05 GROUNDING A.Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26 and as required by Code. B.Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-B. C.Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit from the Main Electrical Room MDB Ground Busbar to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). D.Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit between the MDF Room TMGB and EACH designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on the drawings and terminate on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB). E.Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit between the EACH designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on the drawings and terminate on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB). F.See Section 27 2000 “TMGB and TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbars)” for additional Grounding requirements. 3.06 DEVICE RELOCATIONS A.Device location may be changed prior to installation, within 15’-0” without extra charge, if so desired by the Architect. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 14/25 3.07 INSTALLATION A.Provide all equipment, wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete, fully functioning, operating system in accordance with applicable local, state, national codes, AHJ requirements, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. All circuits not in conduit must be wired with UL listed power limited cable under NEC 725, Class II wiring. Plenum cable shall be utilized in all return air plenum ceilings. 1.Color coded wires shall be used throughout. 2.Wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code Article 725. B.Provide 120vac wiring and connections to the Control Panel(s), EACH Amplifier(s), CPU(s), DVR(s), and Power Supply(s) as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining all of the design requirements described elsewhere within each system specifications. At a minimum, this shall include the following; 1.Multiple Power Supplies and/or the Control Panel(s) may be placed on the same circuit, while maintaining all code mandated load calculations, but shall be on circuit(s) that is dedicated for EACH System. a.Consult with the Architect to verify load calculations meet all code requirements. b.Install 120 VAC wiring and conduit as specified in Division 26. c.Show on the As-Built drawings, the location of each panel board that is being used to power any System equipment and list each panelboard circuit for each system (at the panel board). (i.e. Panelboard “x”, circuit 12=FAPS-3; Circuit 14=IACP.) C.Maintain all fire wall ratings, as required. D.Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. E.EACH manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on-site supervision of the installation for EACH of the systems equipment for the duration of the project. This includes programming, training, and the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed. F.Install wire guards at locations as shown on the drawings and as described elsewhere within these specifications. G.Every attempt shall be made to avoid running telecommunications close to (less than 2’-0") and/or parallel to other communication cables in the building, all lighting, and conduits containing 120vac (or greater). This shall be to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, ventilation-mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical outlets, electrical panels, fire alarm equipment, clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any conduit and/or riser. Route cables in such a manner to allow other cables to enter the conduit and/or riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum distance from these openings. Maintain all recommended distances from other cables, as required by the manufacturer. Install cable to whichever of these two requirements are more stringent. H.Room numbers shown on plans are architectural designs numbers for construction purposes. These numbers are NOT to be used for programming. Final system programming shall reflect the final room numbering plan and actual room signage, unless directed to otherwise in writing or as specified in another specification section. Update the As-Built Drawings to reflect the final room numbering plan and actual room signage. 3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS, AND SETTINGS A.Install all equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 15/25 B.The installation of EACH device, enclosure, and/or control panel shall be installed so that the Maintenance Staff will be able to access, test and/or replace any component of the system. If this installation does not meet this requirement to the satisfaction of the Architect, it will not be accepted. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be required to remove the item, patch and paint the area to the satisfaction of the Architect, and reinstall the device, enclosure, or control panel as required to make the system easily maintainable and acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner. C.Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), and Locations: 1.Mount Control Panel(s), Power Supplies, and Enclosures (provide quantities as required) with approximately two inches of separation between the enclosures. 2.Each enclosure, when mounted, shall meet the following criteria; a.Conduit shall not enter any enclosure or panel, except where conduit entry is approved by the manufacturer. b.Chase nipple the enclosures together. At a minimum, use two (2) 1½” conduits. Size and/or provide additional conduits as required. Provide conduits between enclosures to accommodate an additional 100% conduit fill while maintaining all NEC requirements. Avoid installing chase nipples where batteries are to be installed (contact the manufacturer and/or the Installing Vendor prior to drilling any holes). Any chase nipples installed where batteries are to be located will be rejected, and require the reinstallation as specified, up to and including installing new enclosures. c.The bottom of the chase nipples shall be a minimum of two-inches above the location where any batteries are to be installed. d.EACH enclosure door shall be able to open no less than 105°. e.The top of each enclosure shall be mounted at the same height of 60-inches above the finished floor and shall be level. f.If changes to the above requirements are preferred, contact the Architect for approval prior to rough- in. D.All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (IE: devices shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be able to support the no less than four times the weight of the equipment and/or device. E.Rack Equipment: EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the manufacturer’s recommended mounting hardware. F.See each system specification for additional mounting information. 3.09 FLUSH MOUNT AND SURFACE MOUNT EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE LOCATIONS A.Prior to rough-in, consult the Architect for clarification for Flush Mount and Surface Mount locations. B.Flush mounted equipment and enclosures shall be installed in areas where the rooms are finished such as Administrative Areas, Offices, Work Rooms, Break Room and Corridors. Provide the appropriate finish work around each enclosure as required. This type of equipment includes, but is not limited to the following: 1.Enclosures: Typically, are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc. a.Provide the manufacturers flush mount Trim Rings, Adapters, and/or Brackets for this type of equipment. C.Surface mounted equipment and enclosure shall be installed in areas where the rooms are NOT finished such as Electrical Rooms, MDF/IDF Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, or Utility Rooms. Unless otherwise noted, this equipment shall be installed on the Systems Plywood Back Boards. This type of equipment includes, but is not limited to the following: 1.Enclosures: Typically, are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc 2.Punch Blocks: Typically, are used with Telephone PBX and Intercom equipment 3.Wall Mounted and Floor Mounted Racks 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 16/25 3.10 NUMBERING AND LABELING A.Phenolic Plates: 1.Install phenolic plates at each of the Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), Terminal Cabinet(s), and Rack(s). a.All phenolic plates shall be secured to each enclosure with rivets. b.Install each plate 1” from the top of the enclosure and be centered on the door. Relocate as required to avoid interfering with equipment or components within the enclosure or that may prevent the enclosure door from closing properly. The location of the phenolic plates shall be consistently installed in the same location on each system enclosure, at EACH location. B.Terminal Cabinets: 1.Label each termination point on the inside of EACH enclosure door. All information shall be legible, as defined by the Architect. C.Addressable Devices/Address Point Labels (where applicable): 1.Install the Address Label for each addressable device on or near the device. Verify with the Architect, prior to installation. 2.Clean the surface from dust, grease, or lubricants as recommended by the manufacturer of the label. 3.The addressable label shall be able to be viewed by the general public when standing on the ground. a.Prior to Installation, coordinate with the Owner’s Representative for exact location of how and/or where to mount the address label for EACH device type to fulfill this requirement, prior to installation. 4.Provide the following address label format: a.The background shall be clear (see through). b.The text shall be Black in color, and a minimum of ½” tall. c.Use Brothers or P-Touch models to produce the label. 3.11 WIRING A.For consistency of wiring throughout the entire system equipment, if specific conductor colors are not called out in EACH system specification, then the following colors shall apply: 1.Red is (+) Positive voltage or data bus (+) positive. 2.Black is (-) Negative voltage or data bus (-) negative. 3.White is common. 4.Green is normally open or normally closed. B.Wiring within EACH enclosure shall have the outer jacket of the cable removed to within three-inches of the cable entering the enclosure. Individual conductors from each jacketed cable shall be spirally twisted to keep them together, until they are routed into each appropriate individual terminal. Route all conductors parallel with the walls of the enclosure, make 90° turns within the enclosure, and always keep a two-inch minimum spacing from any circuit board and/or terminals. 1.Labeling of Cables. a.Prior to installing any label, clean each cable with the appropriate cleaner to remove any pulling compound residue, grease, oil, dirt, etc. in order for the label to properly adhere to the cable jacket. b.The Label shall indicate the Device or Outlet and the area or wing of the building that the cable is being routed from. The Label shall also indicate the MDF Room or designated IDF location that the cable is being routed to. c.Each label shall be located on each cable that enters any enclosure or junction box and shall be easily visible and readable. d.The cable numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 17/25 C.End-of-Line (EOL) Resistors: Each device that is capable of being supervised by the Control Panel and/or Power Supply shall be supervised. Install equipment and/or program as required. 1.Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located. 2.Each End-of-Line Resistor shall be installed at the last device on each circuit. Locating the EOL in the Control Panel and/or Power Supply is NOT acceptable. D.The telephone dialer connections and Ethernet WAN connections shall be made by the Installing Vendor. Coordinate with the Owner for scheduling the Owners IT Department to supervise all terminations and connections. E.All wiring routed under slab or underground shall be suitable for wet locations. F.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of EACH enclosure after completion of the installation, and prior to any testing being performed. G.All circuits shall be identified in accordance with table below and all labels shall include wire type, quantity and circuit number. Wire code shall match approved shop drawings wire code. Table Example: C2HX3 C = Signal Circuit Wire 2 = Signal circuit number H = LCD Keypad wire X = Addressable initiating device circuit wire 3 = Addressable initiating device circuit number 3.12 SPLICE CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS A.All references to splices are for cables that are 50 volts or less. B.A continuous cable run without any splices is the preferred method. When a splice is required the following information shall apply. 1.Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations, in a junction box or terminal cabinet suitable for the purpose. The only exception is for field devices that have wire leads (i.e. Pigtail) and require a connection of two wires at the device. a.Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled, as specified. (i.e.: At the splice point, “From FACP in MDF Room XXX” on one cable, and “To the East Wing RCAP” on the other cable). C.All splices shall be performed in one of the following methods: 1.Wire nuts shall NOT be used on this installation, will be deemed unacceptable, and shall be removed and installed as outlined below. 2.In Junction Boxes: a.Either one of the following Splice Methods are acceptable: 1.Use the Tool-less Terminal Strip, Model Number SSU00470 (Black) or SSU00471 (White), and SSU00465 (the Back-Box Bracket) for use with extra deep 4S boxes. This equipment is manufactured by Space Age Electronics. 2.Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors (with Sealant), Manufactured by Dolphin Components Corporation, on all splice connections that are size 18 gauge or less. The rubber coated outer jacket of the inch-long connector shall contain non-curing sealant that fills the crimp cavity when crimped. Strip the color coded outer jacket of each individual conductor that is going to be crimped, approximately 1/8-inch shorter than the length of the crimp connector, so that when the conductors are inserted all of the way in the connector, no bare wires (or any strands of wire) are exposed or visible out of the connector. 3.In Terminal Cabinets: a.In Terminal Cabinet(s) with each conductor to be landed on a separate terminal. b.Indicate on the Shop Drawings and As-Builts, the locations of EACH Terminal Cabinet. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 18/25 c.Maintain the “Spare Capacity” requirements, as specified. 4.At Field Devices (where the device has wire leads and not a terminal strip). a.Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors as described above. 5.Spare or unused conductors shall be: a.Landed on terminal strips b.Shall have the Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of each conductor. 1.Field devices with pigtails shall have a Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of any unused conductor(s). D.All conductors, if spliced, shall be ONLY spliced to the same gauge size and color of conductor. Changing of gauge size or color at any point within any cable run is strictly prohibited, and all cables will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.If the field device has wire leads, then wire as necessary at the device for proper operation. Indicate the color code change on the shop drawings per point wiring diagrams. Update any and all changes to the drawings, for accurate as-builts. 3.13 ON-SITE SYSTEM INFORMATION BINDER ENCLOSURE A.The Installing Vendor shall install the wall mount enclosure that is labeled “(Section Title here) information”. The enclosure shall be located in the administrative area or the MDF room. Verify the exact location with the Architect, prior to installation. B.The enclosure shall have a Site-specific manual, in a “D” style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty chain securely fastened to the inside of the enclosure. C.See “As-Built Documentation” for more information. 3.14 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ONLY) A.The installing vendor shall notify the Architect a minimum of five (5) business days in advance of testing. B.The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met: 1.Fire Alarm System Testing: a.The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to perform all tests. b.Completely fill out the 2007 Edition NFPA Fire Alarm System Record of Completion document. c.Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Record of Completion. d.Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Fire Alarm Permit. e.If the Installing Vendor fails the Fire Marshal Inspection, the following shall occur: 1.The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections as required, to pass the AHJ testing and inspection. Then, notify the AHJ and schedule another test, and continue making corrections until the Fire Alarm System has been accepted by the AHJ. f.The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 20 0000, Schedule of Values. 2.As-builts: a.Refer to the “As-Built Documentation” of this specification for more information. 3.Training: a.Refer to Section 28 3176 for the Training Requirements as described in “Training Materials”. 4.Complete System Functionality: a.After ALL the above conditions have been met, and includes each of the required signatures, this shall then be deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 19/25 5.Warranty: a.The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed. Refer to the “Warranty” of this specification for more information. C.Upon completion of the installation, testing, and Instruction & Training, the Installing Vendor shall provide the following Signed Test Forms, in the as-built documentation as required. 1.The signed original Record of Completion 2.The signed original Fire Alarm Permit 3.15 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS) A.Electronic System Testing: 1.After all equipment specified herein for the system has been completely fabricated and wired and is in operating condition in the Sound System Installing Vendor's shop, performance tests shall be conducted by the Sound System Installing Vendor on the system to determine if the installation and components comply with these specifications. 2.The following test shall be performed and the system shall be made to meet each listed performance criterion: 3.Overall frequency response of the complete electronic system (unequalized) shall be 20 to 20,000 Hz +2 dB. Equalizing circuits shall be temporarily set in the indicated "flat" position. 4.Total harmonic distortion from microphone input to power amplifier output at rated power shall be less than 1% for the frequency range of 20 to 20,000 Hz 5.The overall broadband hum and noise from 20 Hz to 20 kHz using 6 dB/octave filter at 12.47 kHz shall be at least 65 dB below the rated output from system input to output. 6.The total system shall be installed from microphone to loudspeaker in Absolute Polarity. A positive pressure on the microphone shall produce a positive pressure from the loudspeaker. B.Acoustical Testing: 1.After all electronic equipment specified herein is fully installed at the job site and the speakers are fully installed, the system shall be equalized and acoustically tested by the Sound System Installing Vendor utilizing the Real-Time testing technique. Personnel, test equipment, complete report, and signing shall be as described. 2.The speakers shall be oriented and sound levels set to provide an even distribution of the Sound Field frequency response of 250 to 10,000 Hz throughout the seating area. 3.Provide equalization to DSP (when applicable) to attain frequency response that is within +3 dB from 100 to 10,000 Hz with a 6 dB roll off below 80 Hz and above 12,500 Hz, at any seat in the audience covered by the loudspeakers. 4.The system shall deliver a minimum of 85 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking margin to any seat in the audience at distortion level below 1% THD over the specified frequency range. 3.16 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (FOR ALL SYSTEMS THAT IDENTIFY THIS TESTING REQUIREMENT) A.The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met: 1.Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Permit(s) and other required documentation. Provide this documentation with the As-Built documents. 2.The Installing Vendor shall provide a copy of the (Section Number and Section Title here)- Operational Test Form has been performed and submitted to the Architect for review. The purpose of this document is to show that the Installing Vendor has in fact performed a complete test. In some cases, every device may not pass the test. This shall serve as the Installing Vendors own punch list, to make corrections prior to the Acceptance Test. This must be completely filled out and have an original signature of the representative of the Installing Vendor. Allow for a minimum of ten (10) business days for the Architect to review this document. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 20/25 3.After the Architects review of the System Operational Test Form, the Architect will discuss the results of the test with the Installing Vendor. 4.The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Architect to witness Performance Test. Allow for a minimum of ten (10) business days to schedule this testing. 5.System Testing: a.The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to perform all tests. b.The Installing Vendor shall demonstrate the testing of each device, to the Owners Representative and the Architect, and document this information on the (Section Number and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form. c.Upon the completion and passing the Performance Test with 100% positive results, the Acceptance Test form shall be signed by the Installing Vendor, the Owners Representative, and the Architect. 1.If the Installing Vendor fails this test by NOT passing the test with 100% positive results, the following shall occur; 2.The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections to provide 100% positive results. 3.The Installing Vendor shall document the corrective action taken for each item that failed the Test and submit to the Architect for review. Upon approval by the Architect, the Acceptance Test shall be rescheduled. 4.The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 01 29 50, Schedule of Values. 6.As-builts: a.Refer to the “As-Built Documentation” of this specification for more information. 7.Training: a.Refer to EACH specific Section for the Training Requirements as described in “Training Materials and Programming Survey”. 8.Complete System Functionality: a.After ALL the above conditions have been met as deemed by a “Pass” on the Governing Acceptance Form - (Section Name and Section Title here), all training has been completed, and the required signatures have been acquired, this shall then be deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed. 9.Warranty: a.The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was intended. Refer to the “Warranty” of this specification for more information. 3.17 WARRANTY A.See “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, listed elsewhere in these specifications, to establish the requirements and confirm when the actual warranty period shall begin. B.The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid that they will honor and provide EACH of the manufacturers Full Term Warranty period for the provision of replacement equipment for EACH individual device and/or component provided for this project. The completed and fully functional System, including wiring, installation, and all equipment shall be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects. At a minimum, this shall be no less than one (1) year from the date of Complete System Functionality as defined in “Testing & Complete System Functionality” portion of this specification. Warranty service for the on-site replacement of equipment shall be provided by the system supplier's Manufacturer trained representative during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, and respond for service no later than the following business day after the call was received. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 21/25 C.When the manufacturers warranty exceeds one year, the Installing Vendor shall be responsible for replacing the actual component or device for the Full Duration of the manufacturer’s warranty, if the Owner or their representative chooses to take the item to the Installing Vendors place of business. If the Owner chooses to have the Installing Vendor provide on-site service, then the Installing Vendor is entitled to their standard published (or negotiated) labor rates and miscellaneous material items to replace the damaged warranty item. D.The Installing Vendor who is authorized to provide Warranty Service for this project is defined in “Quality Assurance” located in Part 1 of this specification. 3.18 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A.The following documentation must be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect, in order to fulfill the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 26 00 00, Schedule of Values. B.All electronic and hard copy information submitted to the Owner shall immediately become the Owners property to use as best determined by the Owner, without any compensation to any party. C.All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of detailed Operation and Maintenance manuals in a “D” style 3-ring binder. The binder shall be sized to allow for 20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an insert clearly typed with the following label “(Project Name, Section Number, and Section Title here) Operation and Maintenance Manual”. The binder shall have a clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with the title of the spine on the binder, located at the top of the page, and centered. The following information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder; the Project Name and Project Number, Specification Section Number and Section Title, the Owners name, the Site Name and Site Address, the Installing Vendors Name, Address, and Contact Name. These O & M Manuals shall include the following: 1.Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was installed. Provide the following in the order listed below: a.Provide an 8½” x 11” clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each tab section. b.The System Software User Guide c.The Web Server “Web-based” software User Guide d.The System Control Panel LCD Display User Guide e.The Remote LCD Display User Guide (Where Applicable) f.Provide Step-By-Step instructions for typical Basic Operation of EACH System. g.Warranty information. The Installing Vendor shall provide Warranty information in the form of a matrix from left to right, list the following information: h.Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings. i.List the actual manufacturer’s name of each device shown on the Installing Vendors shop drawings. j.List the actual manufacturer’s model number of each device shown on the Installing Vendors shop drawings. k.Provide the description of the device that is used for each symbol on the legend. l.On the matrix, indicate recommended testing frequency for each item. m.State the Manufacturers Full Term of the Warranty for EACH control panel, EACH power supply, and EACH device provided. n.Indicate where the Owner may purchase each of these devices. Provide the Business Name, Address, City, State, Zip Code, Phone Number, and list two (2) contact names. o.A reduced copy (11”x17”) of record drawings. Enlarge all notes, text, and symbols to a legible (as defined by the Architect) reading format. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 22/25 p.Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the “Spare Parts Proof of Delivery” form that was signed by the Owners representative. q.A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here) technical configuration and this document shall be dated. r.A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here) software ‘point status report’ (where applicable) and this document shall be dated. s.Update the matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ for each specification section, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project. This list shall follow the above equipment list. t.The technical date sheet for each Control Panel, Power Supply, Terminal Cabinet, field device and component installed. Use a separate tab for each of these that were supplied and/or installed. u.Include all testing documentation and the procedure to properly test each device. Put this document immediately behind the respective technical data sheet. v.Include the installation manual for each device that was installed. Put this information immediately behind the testing documentation. w.Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the AHJ approved document(s). x.Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the completed documents: y.The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Operational Test Form. z.The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form. aa.The approved Governing Acceptance Form - (Section Number, and Section Title here). bb.If the Governing Acceptance Form has not been approved, accepted, and signed by the Architect, this binder will be rejected. cc.Each binder shall not exceed three-inches in width. Use multiple binders as required. Indicate Volume 1 of X, Volume 2 or X, etc. dd.Provide the above information on six (6) CD’s and label each one (with a PC generated label) “(Owners Name, Project Name, Section Number, Section Title, and the current date goes here) - Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Data Sheets, Documents, and As-Built Shop Drawings”. Organize the manuals, data sheets, documents, and drawings into separate folders. ee.Include on EACH system CD provided, the AutoCAD As-Built Drawings, located elsewhere in these specifications. ff.EACH of the three (3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have one CD securely fastened inside. gg.Provide three (3) CD’s for general As-Built documentation for the project. E.On-Site System Information Binder: The Installing Vendor shall provide Individual Site Manual, in a “D” style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty chain securely fastened to the inside of the “(Section Title here) information” enclosure. See the “On-Site System Information Binder Enclosure” listed elsewhere in these specifications, for the enclosure information and location. The binder shall be sized to allow for 20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an insert clearly typed with the following label “(Section Title here) information”. The binder shall have a clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with the title of the spine on the front sheet, located at the top of the page, and centered. The following information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder; the Project Name and Project Number, Specification Section Number and Section Title, the Owners name, the Site Name and Site Address, the Installing Vendors Name, Address, and Contact Name. Each binder shall include the following: 1.Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was installed. Provide the following: a.Provide an 8½” x 11” clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each tab section. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS 27 00 00 - 23/25 2.The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Owner to obtain the information listed below. A single sheet shall list the following items: a.The Site Name and Site Address. b.State “In case of emergency during regular business hours: (list the appropriate name and telephone number)”. List the Owners Representative who should be contacted during regular business hours. c.State “In case of emergency after regular business hours: list the appropriate name and telephone number)”. List the Owners Representative who should be contacted after regular business hours. d.List the following information (where applicable). State “The monitoring of the (Section Title here) is being monitored by (list the name of the central monitoring station here), Phone Number: (list the central station phone number here) Account # (enter the account number here)”. 3.Provide each of the items identified in the operation and Maintenance Manuals, with the following exceptions. Do NOT provide: a.Spare Parts Proof of Delivery form. b.As-built Operation and Maintenance CD’s of the project. F.As-Built Drawings: The Installing Vendor shall provide three (3) sets of hard copy As-Built drawings. Drawings shall be the same size that were issued for the shop drawings and clearly indicates the following: 1.Update the Shop Drawings: a.To address any changes, including but not limited to the Riser, point-to-point wiring diagrams, and mounting details. b.To accurately reflect the final installation of equipment and devices that were relocated, added or removed. c.Update the matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ of the specification, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project. d.Actual routing of all raceways. e.Actual routing of all Open Cables. f.Actual cable type, color, and numbers. g.Actual splice locations. h.Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, and interface of all components in the system. i.Provide scale drawings of the internal components of the main panel, and each power supply. Show each circuit number coming from the terminals of each Control Panel and/or Power Supply. j.Actual room number and programming addresses (where applicable) for all components in the system. k.Show on the As-Built drawings the location of each panel board that is being used to power any System equipment and list each panel board circuit used (at the device that is connected to that circuit. IE: FACP or FAPS). l.Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located. m.Provide all updated As-Built drawings in AutoCAD™ 2004 format (or newer) and put these electronic files on the Operation and Maintenance Manuals CD, as described elsewhere in these specifications. G.Provide all As-Built Documentation to the Architect prior to any Training and no less than ten (10) business days prior to project completion. H.Any re-submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 24/25 **Sample** WIRE LEGEND CONDUIT/RACEWAY SINGLE CONDUCTOR OPEN CABLE LETTER FUNCTION CONDUCTOR COLOR AWG QTY TYPE CABLE MFR CABLE MFR PART # CONDUCTOR COLOR AWG QTY TYPE CABLE MFG CABLE MFR PART # - BLACK #16 1AADDRESSABLE INITIATING CIRCUIT + RED #16 1 THWN- SOLID #16/2 1 16/2 – FPLP - BLACK #16 2BADDRESSABLE INITIATING CIRCUIT LOOP + RED #16 2 THWN- SOLID #16/2 2 16/2 – FPLP - BLUE #14 1CHORN/STROBE CIRCUIT + WHITE #14 1 THWN- SOLID #14/2 1 FPLP - BLUE #14 2DHORN/STROBE CIRCUIT LOOP + WHITE #14 2 THWN- SOLID #14/2 2 FPLP - BLACK #16 1ECONVENTIONAL INITIATING CIRCUIT + YELLOW #16 1 THWN- SOLID #16/2 1 16/2 – FPLP - BLACK #16 2FCONVENTIONAL INITIATING CIRCUIT LOOP + YELLOW #16 2 THWN- SOLID #16/2 2 16/2 – FPLP - BLACK #14 1G24V DC POWER CIRCUIT + RED #14 1 THWN- SOLID #14/2 1 FPLP H SPEAKER CIRCUIT RED #14/2 1 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN #14/2 1 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN I SPEAKER CIRCUIT LOOP RED #14/2 2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN #14/2 2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 00 00 - 25/25 **Sample** WIRE LEGEND CONDUIT/RACEWAY SINGLE CONDUCTOR OPEN CABLE LETTER FUNCTION CONDUCTOR COLOR AWG QTY TYPE CABLE MFR CABLE MFR PART # CONDUCTOR COLOR AWG QTY TYPE CABLE MFG CABLE MFR PART # BROWN BLUE #16 #16 1 1 #16/2 1 16/2 – FPLP - BLACK #14 1JANNUNCIATOR CIRCUIT + RED #14 1 THWN- SOLID #14/2 1 FPLP K FIREMANS PHONE CIRCUIT RED #18/2 1 18/2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN #18/2 1 18/2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN L FIREMANS PHONE CIRCUIT LOOP RED #18/2 2 18/2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN #18/2 2 18/2 TWISTED SHIELDED FPLP W/ DRAIN - PURPLE #14 1MCONTROL CIRCUIT + ORANGE #14 1 THWN- SOLID #14/2 1 FPLP - PURPLE #14 2NSPARE CONDUCTORS + ORANGE #14 2 THWN- SOLID #14/4 2 FPLP ADD PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES HERE ADD PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES HERE END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 1/9 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project on an occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime, double-shifting, or special work schedules and coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification Section 01 11 00 for additional information. B.WSSP REQUIREMENTS: The work of this section is part of the overall requirements to comply with the required minimum Washington Sustainable School Protocol (WSSP) requirements. Comply with Section 01 81 13 – WSSP Requirements; refer to WSSP Scorecard in Section 01 81 13 for WSSP edition and Credit identification. C.Specification Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions D.Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards: 1.National Electrical Manufacturers Association: a.NEMA FG 1 - Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems b.NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems c.NEMA VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines 2.NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 3.ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises 4.ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 5.TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 1.02 SCOPE A.The installation shall include innerduct, fire rated and non-fire rated penetration assemblies, conduit, cable tray, and wire management. B.The bonding of metallic raceways C.The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. D.The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”. E.Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for Section 27 05 28 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 05 28 - 2/9 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installing Contractor Qualifications: 1.Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor with a minimum of five years’ experience in the installation and maintenance of high-speed data and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of installing, maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this work. 2.License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low Voltage License. 1.04 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS A.If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes and regulations. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS A.The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.Refer to specification 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements. B.The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail Sheets for additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section. 2.02 COORDINATION A.Refer to “Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment” for additional coordination and installation requirements. B.Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements. 2.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A.Refer to “As-Built Drawings” listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment required for this project. 2.04 SEISMIC BRACING A.Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ. B.This includes, but is not limited to: 1.Racks 2.Cable Tray 3.Cable Supports 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 3/9 2.05 INNERDUCTS AND CONDUIT SEALS A.Innerduct (Fabric Mesh): 1.The Installing Contractor shall provide the proper type of fabric mesh innerduct for the application in which it is being used. 2.Provide flexible multi-cell fabric mesh innerduct consisting of White Polyester and Nylon resin polymer. 3.EACH Cell shall contain a factory installed pull tape, which shall be a different color of pull tape for EACH Cell. 4.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BK (Black), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required where shown on plans. a.This shall be the default color for one 3-Cell innerduct. 5.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456RD (Red), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required where shown on plans. a.Where two 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the second color. 6.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BL (Blue), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required where shown on plans. a.Where three 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the third color. B.Inner Duct (Non-Metallic Tubing): 1.Provide 1” corrugated inner duct for EACH fiber optic cable run. 2.Inner duct shall be rated for the application and environment that it is installed in and shall meet all Code and AHJ requirements. 3.Non-Metallic Tubing for Fiber Optic Cables shall be Orange in color. 4.Provide quantities as required where shown on plans. 5.Approved Manufacturer: Pyramid Industries or approved equal. C.Inflation Bags (for 3” Conduits and 4” Conduits): 1.Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install inflation bags in 3” Conduit(s) and 4” Conduit(s) that comes into the building. Provide inflation bags in EACH conduit at the opposite end (in the MDF and designated IDF locations). 2.Provide inflation bags 3.Locate inflation bags in EACH 3” underground conduit and in EACH 4” underground conduit (at each end of the conduit) that is routed between the MDF and EACH designated IDF location. 4.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB3 (for 3” conduits), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. a.Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method at the completion of the project. b.Provide (6) 3” conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the Owner at the completion of the project. 5.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB4 (for 4” conduits), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. a.Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method at the completion of the project. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 05 28 - 4/9 b.Provide (6) 4” conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the Owner at the completion of the project. 6.Inflation Tool. a.Provide (1) new (unopened package) inflation tool to the Owner at the completion of the project. b.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITT, or approved equal. 7.Gas Cartridges. a.Provide (12) new (unopened packages) gas cartridges to the Owner at the completion of the project. D.Duct Seal (for conduits that are 2.5” or less): 1.Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install a water tight seal in EACH Conduit that comes into the building. Provide a water tight seal in EACH conduit at the opposite end (in the MDF and designated IDF locations). 2.In addition to the above locations, provide Duct Seal that includes, but is not limited to other conduits such as: a.Reader Boards b.Portables c.Hand holes for future equipment. 3.Manufactured by Ideal: Model # 31-601, or Manufactured by Gardner Bender: Model # DS-130, or approved equal. 2.06 OPEN CABLING SUPPORT & HARDWARE A.Each Cable Support shall be UL Listed for the Application and meet the TIA requirements for structured cabling systems. B.Provide manufacturer approved mounting brackets and fasteners. C.Do not exceed the cable support manufacturer’s cable fill capacity for each type provided for this project. D.Do not exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for cable suspension in open cabling environments. E.J-Hooks shall have a galvanized finish. 1.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT32HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT48HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 3.Mounting Tree: 4.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CATHPTM, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. F.Adjustable Cable Support: 1.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT425 Series, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 5/9 G.Conduit Waterfalls: 1.Conduit Waterfalls shall be used where conduits empty into cable trays. 2.Manufactured by Panduit: Model # CWF400, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. H.Conduit Bushings: 1.Conduit Bushings shall be used to protect communications cabling where conduits terminate in accessible ceiling space. 2.Bushings shall be non-metallic to reduce cable abrasion. 3.Manufactured by Arlington: Model #EMTXXX, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.07 CABLE TRAY – WIRE BASKET STYLE A.Chatsworth Products (CPI) is the basis of design for all wire-style cable. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected. B.Provide Seismic bracing. C.The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified. D.The Cable Tray shall be 4” high x 18” wide (unless otherwise noted). 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34821-618, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. E.Splice Bar, Splice Bolt/Washer Trapeze Support Bracket, Cable Radius Drop, Ground Clam and other related materials: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34728-501, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34739-501, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. F.Trapeze Support Bracket: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34730-620, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.Unistrut may be used in lieu of the above model number if approved by the AHJ. G.Cable Radius Drop: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34747-701, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. H.Ground Clamp: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34838-001, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.08 CABLE TRAY – LADDER STYLE A.Chatsworth Products (CPI) is the basis of design for all ladder-style cable. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected. B.Provide Seismic bracing where required by the AHJ. C.The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 05 28 - 6/9 D.The Cable Tray shall be 1.5” high x 18” wide (unless otherwise noted) with 9” rung spacing in Steel construction that has been painted by the manufacturer. 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11275-718, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. E.Butt Splice, Junction Splice, Swivel Butt Splice, Swivel Junction Splice, Wall Mount Bracket, Rack Mount Plate, Ground Strap, Cable Runway Dividers and Cable Radius Drop: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16301-701, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. F.Junction Splice: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16302-701, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. G.Swivel Butt Splice: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16487-701, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required, where applicable. H.Swivel Junction Splice: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16488-701, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required, where applicable. I.Wall Mount Bracket: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11746-718, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. J.Ground Strap: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 40164-001, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. K.Cable Runway Dividers: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13392-721, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. L.Cable Radius Drop: 1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12100-718, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12101-702, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.09 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS A.Provide Fire Rated Penetration equipment for EACH wall that is rated for 1-Hour or more. B.Provide penetration equipment for each wall that is not a fire rated wall. C.A firestop system shall be comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure; the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise of an effective block for fire, heat, vapor, and pressurized water stream. D.All penetrations through fire rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating items i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped. E.Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 7/9 F.Indicate on the Shop Drawings EACH location showing the proposed system location for approval, prior to installing the penetration system(s). G.All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local authorities prior to cabling system acceptance. H.For EACH penetration, the following requirements shall apply: 1.Provide pathway assemblies for EACH Low Voltage System Cables for each individual assembly opening. 2.Provide the quantity of pathway assemblies required for the Horizontal cables, while maintaining all code requirements. Additionally, provide (1) pathway assembly opening for EACH System listed on the Electrical Legend. This includes, but is not limited to: Fire Alarm System, Intrusion Alarm System, Intercom System, Access Control System, CCTV System, etc.) and no less than (2) Spare empty assembly openings, which shall remain empty at the completion of the project. 3.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # 33 Series and/or EZ Path Model # 44 Series for fire rated walls. Provide quantities as required for all rated installations. a.For EACH penetration, provide the Stud Wall Attachment (for either series provided), filling the entire stud wall space with cable pathways for all cabling required and future cabling. Maintain all spare capacity requirements. b.For EACH EZ Path Model # 33 Series provided, provide one pair of Radius Control Modules. c.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # RCM33. 4.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ Path Model # NEZP33 Series. Provide quantities as required for all non-rated fire wall installations. 2.10 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information. B.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s). C.Install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation. 3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS A.The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of pairs, and is the material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems. 3.03 GROUNDING AND BONDING A.Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-B, which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray, Rack(s), conduit sleeves, and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB. B.The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However, size each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in TIA-607-B. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00 27 05 28 - 8/9 3.04 HORIZONTAL PATHWAYS A.It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each balanced twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295’ in length from work area outlet to telecommunications room patch panel. B.To ensure this length, all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or the installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from being installed after the structure is complete. C.See section 27 20 00 for horizontal cabling types and additional requirements. 3.05 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS A.Install per manufacturers recommendations. B.Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements. 3.06 PLENUMS A.Provide metallic conduit through building plenum spaces for all cables which do not bear a CMP rated label. 3.07 WARRANTY A.The warranty shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the installing and certified Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related to the warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the manufacturer will assume responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and wire manufacturer at the time of project bid, will be rejected. 3.08 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&M’S) A.Provide all Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O&M’s) documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification. 3.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A.Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification. B.All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). C.Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment. D.The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates: 1.The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of conduit runs, cable tray, and terminal cabinets. 2.Provide (3) sets of complete As-Builts. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.Upon completion of the system installation, the installation representative shall conduct a system test for the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Owner or their appointed representatives. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 9/9 B.Upon completion of the installation, after test and demonstration, the Installing Contractor shall provide to the Architect a signed written statement substantiating the: 1."System has been completely tested, demonstrated to the Owner's representative, and accepted by the appropriate authority." END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 1/17 SECTION 27 20 00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00. C. Specification Section 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all materials for a fully functional extension of the existing data and voice Telecommunications Infrastructure system in accordance with this specification and the contract drawings. The system shall be in full compliance with a “Limited Lifetime Warranty”. The Installing Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete, functional system including all necessary components, whether included in this specification or not. B. The installation shall include Copper Category Rated Cables, interconnect equipment, connectors, jumpers punch blocks, copper patch panels, copper and fiber patch cables, telecommunication outlets, and wire management. C. All cables shall be plenum rated. D. The Installing Contractor is required to coordinate with the Owner so that the telephone system can be patched into the Data and Voice infrastructure by the Installing Contractor. E. All copper Horizontal Cables shall be terminated on patch panels in the Telecommunication Rooms (designated IDF location) and on Telecommunications Outlets. All copper backbone cables shall be terminated on punch blocks at main cross connects and on patch panels at the horizontal cross connect end, unless noted otherwise. F. Upon completion of installation, the Installing Contractor shall test all fiber and copper cables. All cables shall be tested as defined elsewhere within this specification. G. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. H. The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”. I. Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00. J. See “Horizontal Cable” and “Racks” located in this specification for additional work and equipment. This includes, but is not limited to; CAT6 Cabling for ALL Local Area Network (LAN) based Systems as shown on the plans, detail sheets, and riser diagrams. 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 2/17 B. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards: 1. BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual, 6th Edition 2. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition 3. ANSI/TIA 606-A (2002) Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. 4. ANSI/TIA 607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 5. EIA/TIA-455-61 (latest edition). "FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using An OTDR". 6. TIA-526-7. Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP-7. 7. ANSI/TIA 568-C.0. "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises." 8. ANSI/TIA 568-C.1. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements." 9. ANSI/TIA 568-C.2. “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components." 10. ANSI/TIA 568-C.3. “Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard." 11. EIA/TIA 569-B. "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces." 12. IEEE 802.3 (latest edition) "Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection.” 13. International Building Code (latest edition). 14. International Fire Code (latest edition). 15. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition). 16. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest edition). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installing Contractor Qualifications: 1. The Installing Contractor project manager shall hold a valid and current Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certification issued by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). The project manager shall have a minimum of five years’ experience with projects of similar size and scope. 2. The Installing Contractor field staff installers shall hold valid and current Installation certifications issued by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) or hold documented certification of training from the manufacturer of the cabling and equipment that is being installed. The field staff shall have a minimum of five years’ experience with projects of similar size and scope. 3. The Installing Contractor shall be an Authorized Premier Network Installer Certification Only Partner of the Manufacturer of the equipment being installed and shall furnish documentation showing that the Installing Contractor is trained and certified. The Installing Contractor shall be capable of providing the Owner with a documented Limited Lifetime Performance Warranty of the equipment being installed at the time of project bid, to be approved for bidding. 4. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor with a minimum of five years’ experience in the installation and maintenance of high-speed data and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of installing, maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this work. 5. In order to qualify for installation of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Installing Contractor must possess the required license classification, a performance history, experience in the installation and termination of copper and optical fiber cable systems, and proof of time in business. 6. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low Voltage License. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 3/17 1.05 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS If the requirements of this section or the project drawings exceed those of the governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section or the drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes and regulations. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements. B. The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail Sheets for additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section. C. Leviton / Berk-Tek manufactures the products that are used for the basis of design of this specification. 1. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected. a. Include with substitution request, a 3rd party verified testing agency’s report which shall include, but not be limited to, the following TIA-568-C.2 tests: 1. Insertion Loss / Attenuation 2. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk) 3. PSNEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk) 4. ACR (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio) 5. PSACR (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio) 6. ACR-F (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio – Far End) 7. PSACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio – Far End) 8. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling: a. PSANEXT (Power Sum Alien NEXT) b. PSAACRF (Power Sum Alien ACRF) D. All products shall be new, and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging. Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All Telecommunications cable shall bear the manufacturer's label in accordance with NEC 800 based on flammability testing as follows: 1. CMR General Purpose Communications Riser Cable 2. CMP Plenum-rated Communications Cable 3. And other cable ratings to comply with the National Electrical Code requirements for the installation. E. All products shall meet the certification requirements of the warranty. All device products and all cabling products shall be of a single manufacturer. F. Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s) and shown on the drawings. G. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined. 2.02 MATERIALS NOT INCLUDED (PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY OTHERS) A. Telephone switching equipment and related appurtenances. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 4/17 B. Telephones C. Switchers, routers, network hubs, data concentrators and other similar active electronic equipment for data communications D. Computers, printers, facsimile machines, modems and other similar utilization equipment 2.03 COORDINATION A. Refer to “Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment” for additional coordination and installation requirements. B. Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements. 2.04 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. The Installing Contractor shall install the following Owner Furnished equipment: 1. Wireless Access Points (WAP’s). Coordinate with the Owner as required. a. Install each WAP where indicated on the plans. 2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to “As-Built Drawings” listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment required for this project. 2.06 SEISMIC BRACING A. Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ. B. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Cable Supports 2.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or designated IDF location. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables identified on the Legend, unless noted otherwise. B. Horizontal cables are to be terminated on rack-mounted patch panels of the same data speed transfer rating. Horizontal Cabling shall be to Patch Panels within each designated rack. Horizontal Cabling shall be cross-connected to backbone cables. C. Modems, fax machines, wall mount voice outlets for telephone handsets, etc. shall be connected to the data and voice infrastructure via Horizontal Cabling. 2.08 LABELING A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional label type and additional requirements. B. The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Contractor, under the direction of the Owners IT Department at the Pre-Installation project kick-off meeting. C. The Installing Contractor shall label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential manner to the satisfaction of the Owner. D. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, and self-laminating labels shall be used on cable jackets appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable. E. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results. F. Patch panels shall have each port labeled to identify each outlet port. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 5/17 G. Racks shall have phenolic labels installed at the Top and Centered of EACH Rack installed on this project. Phenolic labels shall be size 36 font. H. Cable Identification Labels shall be placed in the following locations: 1. Horizontal Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel and placed within view. 2. Backbone Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables (at both ends of the cable) with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels shall be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and each designated IDF location. a. Where telecommunications outlets are located above accessible ceiling space, provide a label directly on the ceiling tile grid indicating “TELECOM OUTLET ABOVE”. 2.09 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS A. Review the Site Plan(s), Floor Plan(s), Riser Diagram(s), and Detail Sheet(s) for all cable types and quantities required for this project. B. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables identified on the Electrical Legend, unless otherwise noted. C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from EACH Telecommunication Outlet port to the nearest MDF or designated IDF location. D. Telecommunication Outlet: 1. Each Outlet shall accommodate individual modular ports and each modular port shall be individually removed without affecting any other port within the outlet. 2. Coordinate the labeling requirements with the Owner’s IT department. a. Outlet label identification information shall be typed text and indicate patch panel and port for each jack and shall comply with the Owners Labeling Standards. Hand written information will not be acceptable. b. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section 26 27 26. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in Section 26 27 26. c. 1-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L1, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. d. 2-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L2, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. e. 4-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L4, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. f. 6-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L6, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 3. Surface Mount Outlet Locations shall only be installed above accessible ceiling spaces, the MDF Room, and designated IDF locations. They are not to be installed below the ceiling surface or exposed to view, unless approved in writing by the Engineer. a. Provide modular single-port or dual port Surface Mount Outlet where indicated on the Plans. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Wireless Access Points 2. Projector Mounts 3. CCTV Cameras 4. Intrusion Alarm Control Panel 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 6/17 5. Access Control Panel 6. Energy Management Panels b. 1-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-1IP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. c. 2-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-2IP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. E. Modular Inserts: 1. 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C). Individual workstation port and patch panel port modules shall be Category 6 rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be approved by the manufacturer. 2. 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C). Individual Wireless Access port and patch panel port modules shall be Category 6A rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be approved by the manufacturer. 3. EACH workstation port shall be Category 6 rated. 4. Each Wireless Access port shall be Category 6A rated. 5. Cables shall be wired in accordance with TIA/EIA-T568B, unless noted otherwise. 6. Each individual insert shall be fully compatible with the Face Plates provided. a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section 26 27 26 for the workstation modules. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in Section 26 27 26. The Installing Contractor shall match the color of the horizontal cabling as called out in this specification for the patch panel modules. b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 61110-R(X)6 Series for Category 6 applications, or approved equal for all workstation outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color. c. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 6110G-R(X)6 Series for Category 6A applications, or approved equal for all Wireless Access point outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color. 7. Blank inserts. Fill all remaining unused ports with a blank filler insert that is approved by the manufacturer. a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section 26 27 26. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in Section 26 27 26. 8. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41084BGB, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. F. Wall Mount Telephone Outlet: 1. Provide modular single-port stainless steel wall phone outlet with mounting studs. 2. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4108W-1SP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.10 PATCH CABLES – FIBER OPTIC A. Upon completion of the project, the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the following Fiber Optic patch cables for the MDF and EACH designated IDF location to the owner, as identified below: 1. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty. of 4 – 3' (1 meter) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with Duplex LC connectors. a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M01, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 7/17 2. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty. of 4 – 23' (10 meters) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with Duplex LC connectors. a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M10, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings. 2.11 HORIZONTAL CABLE – INSIDE PLANT (ISP) A. See “Testing of Cables” listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be documented and submitted at the completion of this project. B. EACH Cable installed shall be rated for the appropriate application, such as; Riser Rated, Plenum Rated, Wet Rated, etc. C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication Outlet to the nearest MDF or the nearest designated IDF location. D. Analog Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) lines shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following items. These items shall be installed complete without splices between the jack and cable termination point. 1. Fire Alarm System 2. Intrusion Alarm System 3. Elevator (where applicable) 4. Terminate all telephone jacks as described elsewhere in these specifications. a. Cable color codes shall be as follows. 1. All horizontal data cable shall be blue in color 2. All voice cable shall be white in color 3. All CCTV and IP Access Control cable shall be yellow in color 4. All Wireless Access Point cable shall be green in color E. The work station Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted otherwise. 1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark 1000 Series plenum rated cable for Category 6 applications, or approved equal. a. The Wireless Access Point Cable shall be Category 6A rated, 4pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted otherwise 2. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark-10G Series plenum rated cable for Category 6A applications, or approved equal. 2.12 HORIZONTAL CABLE – OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) & WET RATED LOCATIONS A. See “Testing of Cables” listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be documented and submitted at the completion of this project. B. Outside Plant (OSP) cables shall be used where conduits are routed below grade. Such as; slab on grade floor boxes, underground conduits to another building, where required by code, etc. All Outside Plant (OSP) cable extending within the building at a distance greater than 49 feet shall be run in conduit. C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or the nearest designated IDF location. D. The Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted otherwise. 1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark-6 OSP Series, or approved equal. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 8/17 2.13 PATCH PANELS – COPPER A. Existing 96-port and 48-port CAT5e patch panels are to remain unless every cable associated with that panel is removed during demolition. Existing panels and horizontal CAT5e cables upon completion to verify functionality. Contractor is to troubleshoot and re-terminate as required. B. All new patch panels shall be located at the designated IDF location. They shall be rack mounted in Rack 1 or Rack 3 unless specifically otherwise noted. C. Provide a minimum of 25 % spare patch panel jack capacity. D. Patch panels should be fully populated, avoiding blanks and empty ports (with the exception being the last patch panel in the series which may not be fully populated). E. All Category patch panels shall be tested and approved for Category wiring as specified to cable type, per TIA/EIA-568C; shall have rear cable management bar and front labeling. F. Provide separate Patch Panels for the following equipment connection types: 1. Data Cables. 2. Wireless Access Points 3. Analog Voice Cables (existing) 4. Section 28 23 00 CCTV System a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual Patch Panel locations within each Rack. 5. Section 28 13 00 IP Access Control System. a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual Patch Panel locations within each Rack. 6. The panel shall be field-configurable and shall accept a full range of modular connectors. a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4S255-S48, or approved equal for 48 port applications. b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4S255-S24, or approved equal for 24 port applications. 2.14 MULTI-CONDUCTOR BACKBONE CABLE A. Provide multi-pair plenum cables from the MDF Room to each designated IDF location unless noted otherwise. 1. See the riser diagram for more information. 2. Provide (1) 25-pair riser service cables, unless noted otherwise. Provide Plenum Rated Cable or Wet Rated Cable where required by Code. Cable shall be 24 gauge with pair count as indicated, UL listed for the application that which it is installed in. 2.15 PATCH CABLES - COPPER A. The Patch Cables shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP for all Category 6 systems and Category 6A rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP for all Category 6A systems, unless noted otherwise. Provide (1) Patch Cable per telecommunications outlet jack and (1) Patch Cable per telecommunications patch panel port as described below. B. The outer cable jacket shall match the color selection of the Horizontal Cable Color identified in “Horizontal Cable”. 1. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 15’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunication workstation outlet box shown in work areas. (Leviton # 62460-15L), or approved equal. See table below for MDF/IDF patch cord quantities. 2. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 3’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunication jack at Each Wireless Access Point. (Leviton # 6210G-3(X), or approve equal. (X) Indicates color of equipment cord according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in “Horizontal Cable”. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 9/17 3. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 3’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunications jack at systems related equipment such as CCTV, IP access control system. (Leviton # 62462-03(X), or approved equal. (X) Indicates color of equipment cord according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in “Horizontal Cable”. C. Upon completion of the project, the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the following patch cables: The following items shall apply ONLY to the MDF Room and designated IDF locations. Item #Cable Length Color to be determined by horizontal System cabling. Quantity of Patch Cables (provide the following percentage of patch cables based on the Total patch panel Ports provided for this project) Unless noted otherwise. manufactured by Model # X indicates color of patch cable 1 3’ CAT6 20%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6) 62460 series (X) 2 7’ CAT6 50%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6) 62460 series (X) 3 15’ CAT6 30%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6) 62460 series (X) 4 1’ CAT6A 100%Levition (eXtreme CAT6A) 6210G series (X) 2.16 RACKS AND ENCLOSURES A. Rack Mount all equipment that is capable of being Rack Mounted. B. 45RU Two Post Data Racks are existing and contain 25% free rack space for rack mounting new patch panels. Provide additional racks as required only if existing Rack 1 and Rack 3 become full. Rack 2 is designated for the owner’s switches and new horizontal wire managers. C. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected. D. Provide seismic bracing for ALL RACKS AND ENCLOSURES per manufacturer’s recommended instructions/accessories. E. Section 27 20 00 shall provide ALL Racks and related equipment, including but not limited to; Patch Panels, Patch Cords, Wire Management, Power Strip assemblies, etc. for ALL Local Area Network (LAN) bases Systems as shown on the site plans, floor plans, detail sheets, and riser diagrams. F. Racks: 1. Free-Standing 2-Post a. The Rack shall have the following features: 1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards. 2. Rack Height: 45RU 3. Color: Black b. Installation: 1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit. 2. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation method. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 10/17 3. Provide vertical cable management between each rack c. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 55053-703 or approved equal 1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings. 2. Free-Standing 4-Post Rack a. The Rack shall have the following features: 1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards. 2. Rack Height: 45RU. 3. Rack Depth: 29”. 4. Color: Black. b. Installation: 1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit. 2. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation method. c. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 15053-703, or approved equal for Small Server Equipment Frame. d. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 20120-703, or approved equal for Data Equipment Frame. Includes 12-24 threaded rack rails. 1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings G. Enclosures: 1. Free-Standing Data Equipment Enclosure a. The Rack shall have the following features: 1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards 2. Rack Height: 44RU 3. Rack Depth: 36” 4. Color: Black 5. Racks shall be gang-able 6. Front Door: Locking, Vented 7. Rear Door: Locking, Vented 8. Front and Rear rails 9. Vertical wire management (“LACE” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full rack-height) 10. Vertical power distribution (“PD” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full rack-height) b. Installation: 1. Secure EACH Rack to the wall using the manufacturer recommended installation method and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit. c. Manufactured by Middle Atlantic Products: Model # R412-4524B or approved equal. 1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings 2. Wall-Mounted Hinged Enclosure a. The Rack shall have the following features: 1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards. 2. Rack Height: 24RU 3. Color: Black 4. Front Door: Locking, Vented 5. Provide Top Mount Fan Kit Model # DWR-FK32 6. Provide Solid Copper Bussbar Model # BB-12 7. Provide Rear Rail Kit Model # DWR-RR24 8. Vertical wire management (“LACE” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full rack-height) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 11/17 9. Vertical power distribution (“PD” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full rack-height) b. Installation: 1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor/wall using the manufacturer recommended installation method and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit. c. Manufactured by Middle Atlantic: Model # DWR-24-32 or approved equal. 1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings H. Grounding Terminal Block for Rack: For EACH Rack provided for this project, provide one Grounding Terminal Block. I. Cable Management: 1. Vertical Cable Management for open-frame racks: Provide vertical cable management on both sides of each rack. Where two racks are installed side-to-side, provide one section between the Racks for each Rack provided for this project. a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: “30161” series, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. Match existing wire managers as required if different than the above part. 2. Horizontal Cable Management a. .Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 30130-x19 for 2RU applications, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.17 WIRE RINGS A. Cables on backboards shall be supported using open distribution rings. Rings shall be located within 12” of entering or exiting conduit, 6” prior to any radius bends and at least 12” on center. The rings shall have rounded edges and be designed in a “C” configuration. Securely mount distribution rings to the plywood backboard. B. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 12035-001, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. 2.18 CABLE MANAGEMENT TIES A. Wire ties of any type shall NOT be used anywhere in this installation. B. Bundle all Horizontal Cables together with Velcro-type tie wraps. 1. Adjustable Velcro Straps shall be used for all cable bundles. a. Provide Velcro Straps every two-feet (approximately) above accessible ceilings, in Cable Trays (where applicable) and throughout the cable run. b. Provide Velcro Straps every twelve-inches (approximately) within the MDF and each designated IDF location. 2. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 020XX-201, or approved equal. XX indicates actual length. “06” (6-inches long for two-inch diameter cable bundles), “09” (9-inches long for three-inch diameter cable bundles), and “12” (12-inches long for four-inch diameter cable bundles). Provide quantities as required. 2.19 TMGB AND TGB (TELECOMMUNICATION GROUNDING BUSBARS) A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional Grounding requirements. B. Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26, and as required by Code. C. Provide grounding and bonding per ANSI-STD-J-607-A, which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray, Rack(s), conduit sleeves, and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB. 1. The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However, size each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in ANSI-STD-J-607-A. D. TMGB is existing and is located in the electrical room. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 12/17 E. TGB: Provide and install at EACH designated IDF location (1) 2” high x 12” wide Copper Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB). Use standoff brackets to wall mount the copper busbar and insulators. 1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13622-012, or approved equal. F. Lug Style: EACH connection to the TMGB/TGB shall be a Copper 2-Hole Lug Straight Long Barrel Connection. 1. Manufactured by Thomas & Betts: Model # 256 Series, or approved equal. 2.20 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS) 1. A large format UPS is currently installed in the electrical room that feeds the sub-panel powering the designated IDF outlets. 2. The UPS backed 208V 1P outlets at the rear of Rack 2 are dedicated 20A circuits for rack PDUs. 2.21 HORIZONTAL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU) A. Provide two (2) Horizontal PDU in Rack 2 for the owner provided switches. Coordinate with the owner for exact location and requirements. 1. Horizontal PDU manufactured by APC, Model # AP9566. 2.22 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor. B. See 27 05 28 for pathway requirements (cable tray, inner duct, etc.). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information. B. Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s). C. Install all cabling, devices, and/or equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation. 3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS A. The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of pairs, and is the material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems. 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. EACH CABLE RUN SHALL BE CONTINUOUS, WITHOUT ANY SPLICES, from the Telecommunications Outlet to the patch panel(s). Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The Installing Contractor shall ensure that EACH Telecommunications cable is installed with care, using techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping cutting, deforming the jacket, or other damage. During inspection evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared unacceptable. The Installing Contractor shall replace unacceptable cabling at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Conduit and Raceway Usage: All Telecommunications cable shall be installed in grounded metal conduit or raceway dedicated for Telecommunications purposes, when called for on the Project Drawings, and not to be shared with electrical wiring. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 13/17 D. Cable shall not be draped on, tied or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing, ventilation ductwork or any other equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or hangers or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose. E. All wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner and per local code requirements. Route wires parallel or perpendicular to the building structure using the specified cable supports. Wiring shall be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or maintenance personnel servicing the equipment. F. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing Telecommunications cable may be used to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue. G. Backboard and Rack Cable Supports: Clamps, "D-Rings”, Velcro and tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each type cable. 3.04 HORIZONTAL CABLING A. Horizontal Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B requirements and the cable manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Untwisting of pairs at the termination point shall not exceed one-half an inch for Category 6 connecting hardware. 2. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than the manufacturer’s recommendation. 3. The Horizontal Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. B. Every attempt shall be made to avoid running Horizontal Cables close to (less than 24") and parallel to power raceway and wiring, or close to light fixtures. C. When an approved cable support is used to support cable bundles, all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals with UL approved cable support. At no point shall cables rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. Where light support for drop cable legs is required, the Installing Contractor shall install clips to support the cabling. D. The installation of Horizontal Cables around moveable devices, instruments, subpanels, etc. shall be provided with adequate support, length, protection, and flexibility so that the cable is not damaged in the event the equipment is moved. E. Pathways: 1. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each balanced twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295’ in length from work area outlet to telecommunications room patch panel. 2. To ensure this length, all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or the installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from being installed after the structure is complete. 3. See section 27 05 28 for pathway types and additional requirements. 3.05 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD CABLING A. Plywood backboard shall be painted with fire-resistant white paint prior to equipment mounting and cabling. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 14/17 B. Horizontal Cable installation must conform to the Project Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, ventilation mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical outlets, electrical panels, fire alarm equipment, clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum distance from these openings. C. Horizontal Cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations. Horizontal Cables shall not be connected or attached to electrical conduit or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed. D. Lay cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the mounted equipment or block. Velcro wrap all similar cables together and attached by means of clamps screwed to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via "square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of equipment or other cables. E. Horizontal Cables that are not dressed in a neat fashion, or with excessive slack, will not be accepted. 3.06 TELEPHONE RISER BACKBONE CABLE A. Backbone Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations and housed in a splice case enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled. Verify intended splice locations with Engineer prior to installation. B. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal cables. C. Where backbone cables and horizontal cables are installed in a cable tray, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal cables. 3.07 CABLE LABELING A. Alpha-numeric numbering shall be developed by Installing Contractor, under the direction of the Owners IT Department. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion. B. Patch Panel Labeling: Each terminal shall be identified and marked on the patch panel with the outlet port identification. C. Outlet Port Labeling: Outlet labels for each port shall be identified and marked on the Outlet with the outlet port identification. D. Backbone Labels: Labels shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables (at both ends of the cable) with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels shall be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and IDF Rooms. E. Horizontal Cables: Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel. 3.08 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS A. The Telecommunication Rooms (MDF and designated IDF’s) shall house Racks, Patch Panels, Wire Management, UPS’s, Punch Blocks, and required cable routing hardware. Racks shall be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces and on one side. If one mounting rail of the rack is placed against a wall, the mounting rail shall be no closer than 6” to the wall to allow room for vertical management. Where there is more than one rack, the racks shall be ganged with vertical management hardware to provide interlay management. Ganged rack frames will be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 15/17 B. Racks shall be installed in the following manner: 1. EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the manufacturer’s recommended mounting hardware. 2. EACH Rack shall be Grounded/Bonded to the TMGB/TGB with a minimum size of one (1) #6 copper green insulated conductor or larger due to distance requirements based on ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 3. Rack mount screws (#12-24) that are spare shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation. 4. All rack mounted equipment shall be installed in a designated Rack Unit. Equipment shall NOT be installed in between Rack Units; this will NOT be considered acceptable. C. Cable Tray: Configure as shown on the drawings. Provide Cable Tray as specified in 27 0528. Install the Cable Tray using the manufacturer’s recommended mounting hardware, connectors, brackets, and fasteners. 3.09 TESTING OF CABLES A. Notification shall be given a minimum of 14 days prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed by the Owner. 1. An ETL certified, TIA-1152 Level IIIe (ISO/IEC 11801 Level IV) Test Meter shall be used to test all balanced twisted-pair coper cabling. B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results. C. Provide documentation of the following items of EACH Test Meter used: D. Calibration certification from a third party shall be within two-years of testing (at the time that the test is performed). 1. Manufacturer of Test Meter 2. Model Number of Test Meter 3. Serial Number of Test Meter E. Copper Cables – Category 6 and 6A Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test: 1. Wire Map 2. Length 3. Insertion Loss / Attenuation 4. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk) 5. PS-NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk) 6. ACR-F Loss (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end) 7. PS ACR-F Loss (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end) 8. Return Loss 9. Propagation Delay 10. Delay Skew 11. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling: a. PSANEXT (Power Sum Alien NEXT) b. PSAACRF (Power Sum Alien ACRF) F. Copper Cables – Category 3 or 5e Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test: 1. Wire Map 2. Length 3. Insertion Loss / Attenuation 4. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk) 5. PS-NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00 27 20 00 - 16/17 6. ACR-F Loss (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end) 7. PS ACR-F Loss (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end) 8. Return Loss 9. Propagation Delay 10. Delay Skew G. Fiber Optic Cables – Multi-Mode Inside Plant (ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP): Each of the fibers shall be tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards. The Installing Contractor shall test: 1. Polarity Testing 2. Length Measurement 3. OLTS / Link Attenuatio 4. OTDR 5. Two 2-meter patch cords shall be used for the actual test. The two-jumper test shall be used to estimate the actual link loss of the installed cables plus the loss of the connectors. This measurement is consistent with the loss which network equipment will see under normal installation and use. H. Fiber Optic Cables – Multi-Mode Inside Plant (ISP): Each of the fibers shall be tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards. I. Fiber Optic Cables – Single-Mode Inside Plant (ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP). Each of the fibers shall be tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards. J. The source of each error shall be determined, corrected, and the cable re-tested. All defective cables, connectors, connections, and related appurtenances shall be replaced and re-tested at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Submit the Test Reports in PDF format. L. See the O & M Manual / As built Drawings requirements in this specification and also in Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements. M. Acceptance of these test procedures is predicated on the Installing Contractor's use of the recommended products including, but not limited to; the specified cable type, patch panels, outlets, punch blocks, specified equipment identified in Part 2 and the installation standards of this specification. Adherence to these requirements shall be determined upon the completed installation and will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors. 3.10 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS A. Install per manufacturers recommendations. B. Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements. C. See Section 27 05 28 for additional requirements. 3.11 WARRANTY A. Upon final installation, a certificate providing a "Performance and Application Warranty" shall be provided to the owner. This warranty shall be valid for a period of no less than 25 Years. The warranty shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the installing and certified Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related to the warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the manufacturer will assume responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and wire manufacturer at the time of project bid, will be rejected. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE 27 20 00 - 17/17 3.12 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&M’S) A. Provide all Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O&M’s) documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification. B. Provide hard copies of the Test Results of EACH Cable tested. C. Provide the Test Results on CD in PDF format. 3.13 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification. B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results. C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment. D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates: 1. The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of Telecommunication Outlets and their associated Port Address(es), conduit runs, and terminal cabinets. 2. A list of EACH Telecommunication Outlet and the associated Port Address(es) shall clearly be identified according to system labeling scheme. Show all ports and punchdowns. 3. Provide (3) sets of complete As-Builts. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 1/25 SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The pre-approved access control and security vendor for this project is Entrance Controls. 1.All other vendors submit for a prior-approval and be approved by the owner prior to the bid date. B.The project Access Control System is an addition to the owner’s existing system. The Installing Vendor shall provide new equipment at the project site and include the necessary programming for viewing reports, changing card holder information, changing card holder access capabilities, and control functions of the new Access Control System to and from the following locations: 1.Locally at the project site. 2.Remotely at the Owners Administrative Offices. 3.Remotely at the Owners Information Technology Department Offices. C.Furnish and install a complete Access Control System as described herein and as shown on the Plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall include, but not be limited to: Access Control Panels, Access Control Reader Interface(s), Input Board(s), Output Board(s), Power Supplies, Card Readers, Door Position Switches, Request to Exit motion sensors, Electric Locks, Electrified Exit Devices, Panic Buttons, Push Buttons, Intercom Stations, device Input supervision, control Relays, importing of Database(s), Configure, Program, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, wire, connections to devices, and all other necessary material for a completely reliable and fully functional system. D.All cables shall be plenum rated. E.The installing vendor shall coordinate new cards and card readers with the owner’s existing cards and card readers. F.The system shall be of modular design to facilitate both expansion and service, providing an individual system for specific requirements of this project. G.The system shall grant access to card holders with a valid card, monitor the status of open and closed doors, and activate relays. All relay outputs shall be programmable to change state via control-by-event equations, programmable inputs, and timed-events. H.All activity of the Access Control System shall be recorded in an event history log. This history shall be able to be printed in a report format. I.The system shall support industry standards for databases, networks, credential printers, and more, such as Microsoft™ SQL. J.An important aspect of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting, which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets. See “Submittals” and “Coordination” listed elsewhere within this specification. K.Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Conditions. L.The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”. M.Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for Section 28 13 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00 as well as Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 2/25 1.02 SYSTEM OPERATION A.Access Control System: 1.Overview: a.The Access Control System and related components shall control access and prevent un-authorized entrance to selected areas from entrance during secure hours using Cards and Card Readers. b.Integrate with other systems as described within these specifications and as required. c.The system shall integrate various systems and devices, fully, completely, and seamlessly through the use of inputs, outputs, and software interfaces. The system shall serve as the hub for all system functions. The software shall allow System Operators to view specific information and status of devices and equipment. d.The modularity of the system shall allow the Owner to add or remove control functions, adapting to their needs as the system expands and as the operating requirements change. e.The system shall also be configured with remote workstations sharing system monitor and control tasks, if required. From Video to Alarm and printing equipment, industry standard protocols shall be used as the system framework. f.The software shall also combine all application information into a unified database, allowing for more informed operation and automatic system communication transfer between Subsystems, regardless of system drivers and/or protocols. 2.Central Configuration for System Monitoring and Control a.To support alarm management and monitoring, the system shall provide a wide range of display and control features. b.History Log: 1.The History Log shall monitor all incoming events. At a minimum, this shall provide the following information: a.Date/Time b.Device state c.Card Holder Name d.Access denied/granted e.Door/Gate/Device location c.Reports: 1.The System Operator shall be able to search and generate reports from groups or individual persons, doors, locations, inputs, or outputs. The reports shall be captured in a standard document format. The report shall include, but not be limited to the following data: 2.Date/time 3.Group name(s) 4.User name(s) 5.Door(s) 6.Location(s) 7.Input(s) 8.Output(s) d.Display of Events: 1.The system shall support the real-time display of EACH event. e.Schedules and Timers: 1.The system shall provide timer and schedule functions to support: 2.Time based control of programmable relays 3.Time based automatic controls into any subsystem 4.The timer shall support time frames per weekday, public holidays, and individual special days. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 3/25 f.System Operator Generated Alarm: 1.The system shall support a manual alarm trigger by a System Operator to allow alarm operation, for example, lock all doors. B.Workstations and User Interface: 1.Workstations shall be connected by standard IP network. Any computer on the network shall be usable as a workstation. 2.The system shall be expandable to support an unlimited number of integrated workstations. 3.The system shall provide a flexible and simple way to adapt to specific Owner requirements, such as different System Operator groups. C.System Modularity: 1.The system shall have a modular structure that provides specific project solutions. The system shall be expanded at a later date. Common expansion may include the number of System Operators, Subsystem connections, or monitored devices and/or equipment. D.System Operators and Authorization Management: 1.The system shall allow the creation of individual authorizations per System Operator or operator group. This includes: 2.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of locations, such as individual floor, building, or site permissions. 3.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of Subsystems, such as CCTV System, Intrusion Alarm Systems, Fire Alarm System, etc. 4.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of devices, such as cameras, readers, doors, or gates. E.Subsystem and Device Programming: 1.Subsystems and their peripheral devices shall be configurable in the system configuration tool. F.Customizing the System: 1.The system shall be adaptable and configurable to the project requirements, the expertise of the System Operator, and to the configuration of the workstations (resolution and number of monitors). 2.The system shall automatically detect from where a System Operator is logging in, and supplies the correct features, contents, and resolution for EACH appropriate workstation. 3.The system shall provide a toolbox containing all specific controls for display features, such as location tree, alarm queue, toolbar, and customizable action buttons for individual use. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two (2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified Installing Vendor Technicians for the duration of this project. 1.To be deemed a qualified Installing Vendor for this project, a minimum of (2) technicians shall hold the following Manufacturers Certifications PRIOR to issuing submittals for this project: a.The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the technicians Manufacturer Certification(s). B.The Installing Vendor shall provide a Staff Commitment Letter in the Submittal and Shop Drawings submittal package, that states the following: 1.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two (2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified Installing Vendor Technicians for the duration of this project. a.One of the Technicians shall be the designated LEAD TECHNICIAN. 1.This individual shall be responsible for no less than 80% of the technical portion of this project. b.The other Technician shall be the designated BACK-UP TECHNICIAN, who may assist the Lead Technician with the project. 1.This individual shall be responsible for no greater than 20% of the technical portion of this project. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 4/25 c.The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the above designated technicians Manufacturer Certification(s). d.Additional Installing Vendor field technicians may also work on the site, but only while one of the two designated technicians are on-site. 2.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate a Project Manager whose responsibilities will include, but are not limited to: a.The Primary Point of Contact between the Owner and the Installing Vendor. 1.This person can be the Lead Technician. b.Scheduling of technicians to perform the work on the Owners premises. c.Scheduling of any meetings. 1.All meetings shall be on the Owners premises. d.Scheduling and coordination of any deliveries to the Owners premises. C.The system, devices, and equipment, shall be manufactured under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings are not acceptable. The installation of EACH device and/or component shall be in compliance with the UL listing. The system, devices, and equipment shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, where applicable, which includes, but is not limited to: 1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: a.NFPA 70 National Electrical Code b.NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: a.UL 294 Access Control Systems b.UL 1034 Burglary-Resistant Rated c.UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems 3.Meet or exceed Building Codes and Standards: a.Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Requirements b.State 1.WAC 51-20 Washington Barrier Free Regulations c.National 1.National Electrical Code (see NFPA 70) 2.Americans with Disabilities Act d.International 1.International Building Code 2.International Electrical Code (see NFPA 70) 3.International Fire Code D.Approvals: 1.The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: a.UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. b.ULC Underwriters Laboratories Canada. c.Factory Mutual. d.FCC. E.The Installing Vendor shall, at a minimum, provide and/or perform on-site installation assistance to the Contractor throughout the duration of the project, up to and including acceptance of the System as defined in Section 27 00 00 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”. F.Service and Software Modifications: 1.Provide the services of a Manufacturer Certified/Authorized Technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. 2.For non-emergency service, response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. If the call is received by the Installing Vendor before 1:00pm, service shall be provided that day, and if the call is received after that time, then the response shall be the following business day. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 5/25 3.Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the system on- site. Modification includes addition and/or deletion of system devices, changes to system operation, and custom label changes for devices. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements. B.Refer to “As-Built Drawings” for additional requirements. C.Data Sheets Submittals and other documentation. 1.Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting: a.PRIOR to submitting any project Data Sheets, coordinate with the General Contractor as described in Section 27 00 00. 1.Submit the Coordination Questions a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under “Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification. b.The Installing Vendor shall document the Meeting Minutes of the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under “Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification. c.Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under “Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification. 1.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed during this meeting and provide a revised formal Submittal through the normal construction channels. 2.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal. This includes, but is not limited to: a.IP Address Equipment List. 2.Installing Vendor/Manufacturer Agreement. Provide the following documentation of the Manufacturer of the equipment being installed: a.The Installing Vendor shall be an Authorized Partner that is trained and certified by the Manufacturer of the equipment being installed. 3.Installing Vendor Staff Qualifications. Provide copies of the following information (Certification and Training documents): a.Provide a copy of no less than (2) separate technicians (from the Installing Vendors local office) Factory Certifications issued by the manufacturer of the equipment that is being installed. 4.Provide The Installing Vendor Staff Commitment Letter as described in “Quality Assurance” listed elsewhere in this specification. 5.Materials List: a.A complete materials list, which shall include; the quantity of each device, the manufacturer’s name, model number, and a description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that will be provided. This list shall precede the data sheets. b.Equipment Data Sheets. Each System component or device data sheet shall have an indicating arrow next to each component or device that is being submitted. c.Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect. 6.Provide ALL requested submittal documents in “Programming Survey” listed elsewhere in this specification. This includes, but is not limited items listed under “Interview the Owner”: a.Generate the document titled “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet” and submit for review. b.Provide a sample copy of the Step-by-Step Instructions. 7.Submit the “System Device Naming Matrix” listed elsewhere in this specification, with the Data Sheet submittal. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 6/25 8.Load Calculations. a.UPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for the MDF UPS and each designated IDF UPS location. 1.Each device connected to the UPS shall be included in the calculations. b.ACPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for each ACPS location. 1.Each device connected to the ACPS shall be included in the calculations. D.Shop Drawing Submittals shall include the following items: 1.Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect. 2.Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under “Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification. a.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed during this meeting and provide a Revised Submittal through the normal construction channels. 1.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the Revised Submittal. 3.Device Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams: a.Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project. 1.Identify EACH conductor and the equipment type and termination point that it is intended to be connected to. 2.For equipment that is being connected to Integrate to another system, provide a brief description of the functional operation of the two different systems. 4.Device Mounting Details: a.Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project. 1.Identify the back box, conduit rough-in, and manufacturer recommended mounting method. 5.Door Hardware Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams: a.Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor/General Contractor as required to obtain the following information that shall be included on the Shop Drawing submittal: 1.Provide a “typical” Illustration of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware device that the access control system will be connecting to. 2.Provide a “typical” Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware device that the access control system will be connecting to. a.Show a “typical” of EACH connection and termination to the Access Control Reader Interface (ACRI) and/or Access Control Panel. 6.The Riser Diagram shall show the following items: a.Identify EACH Equipment location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF) separately. 1.Identify EACH cable type, size, and quantities between the MDF and EACH designated IDF location. b.Identify EACH Device and the associated room number where it is located in the building. Use the designated door number on the Contract Drawings. 1.Identify the associated cable for EACH device (as described on the wire legend) routed to the Access Control Reader Interface (ACRI) and each cable routed from EACH ACRI to the MDF and EACH designated IDF location. 2.This includes, but is not limited to; Card Reader(s), Door Position Switches, Request to Exits, ACRI(s), ACPS(s), EDPS(s), Server(s), Workstation(s), and other system equipment. 7.Rack and/or Equipment Layout” a.Show the intended equipment layout within EACH of the Rack(s) and/or Cabinets. b.Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack. c.Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed. d.If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the rack also. e.Show the equipment layout as it is intended to be installed. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 7/25 8.An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical, MDF Room and each designated IDF location shall be provided. a.The proposed locations for EACH wall mount device (control panel(s), power supplies, and other equipment), proposed cable routing, wire management, 120vac conduits (including receptacles and junction boxes). b.All equipment shall be shown to scale. c.Provide dimensions of the equipment, the space required between the adjacent item and the overall dimensions of the anticipated wall space. 9.Floor Plans shall show EACH Device type, style, and each individual cable required for EACH Device. 10.Shop Drawings shall be specific to the System that is specified in the Section. a.Do NOT show other low voltage system equipment on the Shop Drawings, except where this system is integrated to other equipment and/or systems. b.Provide EACH device Symbol and related description (as described on the Contract Drawings) on the Legend with the text that states “provided by others”. 1.Intrusion Alarm System as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams. 2.Fire Alarm System integration as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information. B.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional equipment requirements. C.The Access Control System design, devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represent that based on equipment as manufactured by Lenel. Any changes resulting from differences between the specified product and other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers, shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor. 1.Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. D.Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s) and shown on the drawings. E.Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined. 2.02 COORDINATION A.Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements. B.The Installing Vendor shall include in their bid; the time, staff, and materials that are necessary to perform the following services. C.Provide the follow up documentation. Each of the items discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting shall be included in the Data Sheet Submittals and shown on the Shop Drawing Submittals. D.Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. An important aspect of the construction process for this project is the Pre- Construction Kick-Off Meeting. The Installing Vendor shall allow as much time as necessary to accommodate each of the Owner preferences for; equipment layout, programming features, and each item identified within this specification. This meeting shall take place PRIOR to the Submittal of equipment Data Sheets and/or Shop Drawings. 1.The Installing Vendor Technician shall attend this MANDATORY meeting. 2.The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to confirm the date and time of this meeting. 3.See the paragraph titled “Coordination” in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for more information. 4.Coordination Questions shall be submitted a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. This would include, but is not limited to; a.IP Address Equipment List. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 8/25 b.Rack/Equipment layout preferences. c.Automatic (pre-programmed) functions, such as; Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a door-by- door basis. d.The Installing Vendor Other questions that would like clarification of. 5.The Installing Vendor shall bring to the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting 95% design engineered submittal documents, which shall be a complete Preliminary Submittal package. a.These items shall be reviewed during the course of the meeting. The intent is to identify incomplete or inaccurate information that was intended to be submitted. The Drawings, Material Lists, and/or Data Sheets will be marked up during this meeting. b.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections and provide a revised formal Submittal through the normal construction channels. 1.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal. c.Provide a minimum of (3) Full-Size sets of 95% design engineered Shop Drawings. Insure that the drawings show the following items: 1.A legend that identifies; each device, manufacturer, model number, description, rough-in of electrical back boxes and the related conduits. 2.The proposed Rack / Equipment layout(s) for the MDF Room and each designated IDF location that will have Rack mounted equipment provided for this project. 3.An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical Room, MDF Room and each designated IDF location shall be provided. The proposed locations for EACH wall mount device (control panel(s), power supplies, and other equipment), proposed cable routing, wire management, 120vac conduits (including receptacles and junction boxes) shall be shown to scale. Provide dimensions of the equipment, the space required between the adjacent item and the overall dimensions of the anticipated wall space. 4.Proposed route for cable installation (throughout the building). 5.Riser Diagram. Insure the following items are shown: a.The MDF Room b.Each individual designated IDF Room c.Each type shall be shown between the MDF and each designated IDF location. d.Provide a minimum of (3) sets of 95% design engineered Material List. 1.Provide the Data Sheets for each device and component on the Material List. 6.The items discussed at the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting shall include, but not be limited to: a.Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and General Contractor to obtain the Door Hardware Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams, so that this information can be included on the Access Control System Shop Drawing submittal. See “Submittals” for more information. b.Coordination with other Trades c.Cable ID labeling d.Confirmation of the Outlet Connector Type e.Owner furnished equipment to be installed by the Installing Vendor f.Verification and approval by the Owners of the following items: 1.Proposed Rack/Equipment layout 2.Proposed Rack locations and orientation within the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF location. 3.Proposed wall mounted equipment layout(s) for the MDF Room and each designated IDF location. g.Automatic (pre-programmed) functions, such as: 1.Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a door-by-door basis 2.First Man In functional operation h.Integration to other systems. Discuss the intended operation. E.Additional items to be discussed shall include, but not be limited to: 1.General questions about IT Department standards 2.Access to locked doors within the building 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 9/25 3.General coordination with staff F.Follow up documentation of the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. The purpose of this information is to illustrate to the Owners IT Department that the information discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting was understood by the Installing Vendor. Provide the following information: 1.Make corrections to the Shop Drawings as marked up and discussed with the Owner and Engineer. 2.Each of the above items and items discussed during the meeting shall be included in the Data Sheet Submittals and/or Shop Drawing submittals. 2.03 NETWORK RELATED EQUIPMENT A.Switch(es): 1.Utilize the Owners Ethernet Switch(s) at the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF location indicated on the drawings. The Owner shall provide the necessary switches for a functional LAN/WAN. 2.The Access Control System Installing Vendor shall program all other system equipment. B.Data Infrastructure: 1.Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure shall provide EACH of the following items at EACH location required: a.CAT5e/Cat6 Cable Infrastructure b.Patch Panels c.Patch Cords 2.04 SERVER(S) AND WORKSTATION(S) A.Server(s): 1.Additional server(s) are not required for this project. 2.Use the server(s) that will be provided by the Owner. B.Workstation(s): 1.Additional Workstation(s) are NOT required for this project. 2.Use the Workstation(s) that will be provided by the Owner. 2.05 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.The Lenel Access Control System and Lenel On Guard Software are the basis of design. B.Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. Any request for substitution shall be submitted by the contractor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than (10) days prior to the bid due date. Approval by the Engineer will be issued by addendum prior to the bid date. C.Software. 1.The owner is to provide the most current version of software available by the Manufacturer. D.It is the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional with the specified equipment. 1.The database shall be programmed and accessed through the Owners WAN. 2.Import/Download the database to the ACP(s) and ACRI(s), as required. 3.The software shall operate completely separate and independently from other locations. E.General Functional Operation: 1.It will be the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional. a.Provide configuration and functional operation of EACH door as directed by the Owner. 2.Load and configure the software as required. This includes, but is not limited to: a.User Groups b.Time Zones c.Automated functions, such as; Door(s) automatically Lock and Unlock 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 10/25 3.Populate all database fields as directed by the Owner. 4.Coordinate with the Owners IT department as required. F.Emergency Lock Down functionality. 1.Provide manual Emergency Lock Down button(s) (ELD) for system activation. When the ELD is pressed, the following actions shall include, but not be limited to; a.Lock the perimeter doors. 1.Override EACH door that is an automatic timer that is unlocked. Lock each door. b.Close and Lock the interior doors (that are held open by Magnetic Door Holders). c.Send a Text Message to multiple Owner Staff members as directed by the Owner. d.Provide the functionality of the Graphic Maps as described elsewhere in this specification. 2.Provide a manual Reset Key Switch to restore the system to its normal operating condition. G.The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard, without the need for add-on software. Not all of the system features are listed in this specification. This information shall be used as a summary of the requirements. This summary does not lessen the specified system Make, Model Number, and performance requirements in any way. 1.General Requirements: a.All databases will have the ability to ADD, DELETE, REPORT, VIEW and EDIT information. b.Provide storage of all system transactions in a retrievable file. c.Log all events by time and date. d.Provide ability for the Owner to make system configuration changes such as, but not limited to door open time, door contact shunt time, point and reader names, when and where a cardholder is valid, and the ability to add or modify card databases at any time. e.Provide mode of system operation that stores system commands that were not accepted by the hardware. f.All commands and updates to the panels shall be verified and shall automatically retry if communications have failed. g.Provide a system scheduler that shall automatically initiate a preprogrammed command event/action and also synchronize system to intelligent controller time. 2.Cardholder Database: a.Cardholder information shall include unique card number digits and optional Personal Identification Number. b.Allow multiple cards per cardholder. c.Provide special card options that include, but are not limited to: 1.Time zone reference, which defines valid time. 2.Temporary User, which provides a specified activation date and expiration date (spanning years). 3.Provide ability to store digital images of cardholder or other digital images such as property or family members. Up to two (2) such images shall be associated with the cardholder. d.Upon editing card information, the updated information shall be sent automatically to the appropriate access control panel(s) and access control reader interface(s), when hardwired, with no other user intervention. If the scheduler is used, then card updates shall be sent based on scheduling. 3.Access Levels: a.Provide the ability to define specific times of access. b.Provide the ability to define specific readers to specific locations. c.Provide a template of a defined access level detail, where changes can be made to the template and saved as a new access level detail. 4.Alarm Monitoring – Alarms Only View: a.Execute alarm notification in all modes of operation. b.Provide a display of the most current transactions in real time. c.Provide a “Panel Not Responding” alarm if communication to a panel is lost. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 11/25 5.System Operator Database: a.Provide ability for manual System Operator control of system function. The manual functions shall include the ability to Lock, Un-Lock, Activate and Restore the Emergency School Lock-Down System. b.The software shall allow the assignment of System Operator levels to define the system components that each System Operator has access to view, operate, change or delete. c.Define the accounts to which the System Operator has access. d.Provide the ability to log System Operator actions in the history files. 6.Reports: a.Provide reporting capability for printing of selected system transactions from the disk files by specific time and date selection, range from time and date to time and date, or from start time to end time each day of the selected date range. b.Provide feature to generate a history report for a card(s) state. A card state shall be defined as Normal, Trace, Not Found, Anti-Passback Violation, PIN Violation, Time Zone Violation, Site Code Violation, or Expired card. Additional search criteria shall include cardholders that meet up to at least 3-note field restriction and filter the report with defined reader location(s). c.Provide feature to generate a history report for System Operator(s) activities. The report shall include time, date, operator name the device associated with the action and the type of action performed by the operator. d.Provide complete database reporting of all data programmed into the system data files. 7.Time Zones: a.Time zone definitions shall include Starting time, Ending time, Days of the week, and Holiday override. b.Time shall be definable in 24-hour (military) time. c.The maximum time zones that can be defined in a system shall be a maximum of 255 time zones. 8.Lenel: Model # On Guard 2008, Version 7.2 release or greater. 2.06 ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP) A.Provide the most current version of panel and firmware available by the Manufacturer. B.The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard, without the need for add-on software or hardware. Not all of the system features are listed in this specification. This information shall be used as a summary of the requirements. This summary does not lessen the specified system Make, Model Number, and performance requirements in any way. C.The Access Control Panel (ACP) shall include an on-board LAN/WAN communication module and shall link the Access Control System software to all other Subsystems. The system field devices (Access Control Reader Interfaces [ACRI], Readers, Door Position Switches, etc.) shall connect to the ACP and/or ACRI(s). EACH ACP and EACH ACRI shall provide full distributed processing of access control, alarm monitoring operations, emergency school lock- down, and reader led control (to indicate when the door is locked/unlocked). D.Access levels, hardware configurations, and programmed control functions assigned at the administration workstation or database server shall be downloaded to EACH ACP and EACH ACRI, which shall store the information and control functions. E.EACH ACP and EACH ACRI shall be wall mounted and installed in enclosures located as shown on the drawings. F.The Access Control Panel (ACP) shall contain the following features: 1.Communications: The following communication formats shall be supported: a.RS-485 to EACH of the ACRI(s) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 12/25 b.Ethernet at 10/100Mbps (10/100BASE-T, RJ45). 1.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the following for the LAN/WAN Interface: a.Furnish all necessary wiring, RJ45 jacks, modular harness’s, and patch cords as required for connection to the designated LAN/WAN. Provide programming, final testing, and use the communication protocol as necessary so that all information is reported the Server and workstations, as required. b.Coordinate with the Owners IT Department as required, to insure proper communication over the LAN/WAN. 2.All access granted/denied decisions shall be made at the ACP to provide fast response to card reader transactions. 3.Memory for the ACP shall be Flash-based and shall be completely non-volatile. If power to an ACP is lost, upon restoration of power the unit shall retain all information contained in the unit at the time of the power loss including cardholder database, system configuration, event transaction history, etc. 2.Memory: a.Real time program updates, and overall host communications shall utilize flash memory. b.Shall be configured for up to 240,000 cardholders and 50,000 event buffer. 3.Processor: The controller shall contain a 32-bit processor. 4.Light emitting diodes (LED) shall indicate status of components and communication links. 5.Readers: The controller shall support the following: a.Up to eight card formats and facility codes. b.Multiple card technologies c.Biometric interface support d.Integration with other manufacturers’ card readers e.Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers f.Up to eight-digit PIN codes g.Up to two (2) card readers, two (2) door position switches, two (2) Request to Exit devices, two (2) electro-mechanical locking devices, four (4) auxiliary input devices, and two (2) auxiliary relay output devices 6.Electrical Power: a.Primary input power shall be 120vac 7.Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-3300 series Intelligent System Controller, EACH in a Model # LNL-AL600ULX-4CB6 key locking metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in this specification. G.The Star Multiplexer: 1.The Star Multiplexer shall be capable of eight different downstream directions in RS-485 (2-wire) communications (using Belden 9841 or equivalent) or four different downstream directions with RS-485 (4- wire) communications (using Belden 9842 or equivalent). Each Leg of the star, in either configuration, shall support a maximum wire distance of 4000 feet. Each leg shall support up to eight (8) Lenel hardware RS-485 devices in many configurations. 2.Electrical Power: a.Primary input power shall be 120vac 3.Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-8000 series Star Multiplexer, EACH in a Model # LNL-AL600ULX-4CB6 key locking metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in this specification. 2.07 POWER SUPPLIES A.Power Supplies of various types shall be used to provide power to system related equipment, as required, providing a fully functional system. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 13/25 B.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS): 1.For some applications, the ACRI will provide the electric power. For applications that require more power than the ACRI is capable of outputting, use an Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS’s) to power; Electric Locks (EL), Electric Strikes (ES), and Maglocks (MAG) as required. This power supply may also be used to power other system related equipment as required. The power supply shall be U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2 Rated PTC Power Limited outputs and a key locking enclosure. The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails, and have AC fail supervision which is a Form “C” contact closure upon loss of power. a.Connect as required, one (1) ACRI Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided for this system. 2.The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps. 3.At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings and/or as required for a fully functional system. If additional ACPS’s are needed, provide the quantities as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining the design requirements that are defined elsewhere in these specifications. 4.Altronix: Model# AL1024ULXPD16CB. C.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS): 1.See “Field Devices” listed elsewhere in this specification. 2.08 BATTERY BACKUP FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM OPERATION A.Battery back up power shall be an integral part of the Access Control system. B.Provide and install gel-cell, maintenance free batteries, as required. Provide battery back up power for the entire Access Control system to provide a minimum of (1) hour of standby operation. Batteries shall be sized to provide at least 20% spare capacity. 1.Provide quantities as required for maintaining or exceeding the submittal calculation requirements listed elsewhere in Section 27 00 00 “Submittals and Shop Drawings”. C.EACH Power Supply shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails. The power supply/charger shall be an integral portion of the control panel and/or power supply and be capable of charging fully discharged system batteries to 100% in 8 hours. D.All batteries shall be placed inside a key lockable, metal enclosure that is approved by the manufacturer. E.Each battery shall have the date of installation written on the battery with a permanent marker. The date shall be legible and clearly written in 1” numbers and be visible when the enclosure door is open. 2.09 FIELD DEVICES A.Review the Access Control System Riser Diagram for Card Reader related equipment that is NOT shown on the drawings, but shall be provided and installed for this project. B.Prior to Bidding and Ordering ANY equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor to confirm the Owners existing Access Cards will work on the specified equipment. C.Access Control Reader Interface (ACRI): 1.The ACRI shall incorporate support communications between ACRI’s via the ACP for local input/output programming. 2.ACRI’s shall be able to provide 12 VDC (125 mA) to each Reader and also provide Reader LED control (to indicate when the door is locked/unlocked). 3.Communications shall be RS-485 to the Access Control Panel. The ACRI shall be equipped with an input/output port. If one of the ACRI’s should lose power, it shall not affect the operation of the ACRI’s. 4.Memory: a.Real time program updates and shall utilize flash memory. 5.Light emitting diodes (LED) shall indicate status of components and communication links. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 14/25 6.Readers: The ACRI(s) shall support the following: a.Up to eight card formats and facility codes b.Multiple card technologies c.Biometric interface support d.Integration with other manufacturers’ card readers e.Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers. f.Up to nine-digit PIN codes g.Up to (2) card readers, (2) door position switches, (2) Request to Exit devices, (2) electro-mechanical locking devices, (4) auxiliary input devices, and (4) auxiliary relay output devices. h.Electrical Power: 1.Primary input power shall be 12VDC or 24VDC. 7.Lenel: Model # LNL-1320 Series2 Intelligent System Controller, located in a Model # LNL-CTX key locking metal enclosure. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in this specification. a.One (1) ACRI shall be located at EACH Card Reader location. b.One (1) ACRI shall be located at EACH Electro-Mechanically controlled door location. c.Provide additional ACRI’s as required for a complete and fully functional system. d.See “System Software” for the functional requirements. This includes, but is not limited to; General Functional Operation, Emergency Lock Down functionality, and Graphic Map software. D.Card Readers and Credentials: Provide one (1) Card Reader at EACH location shown on the drawings. Card readers shall connect to the ACRI, for a fully functional system, as required. 1.The card reader(s) shall be compatible with existing access cards. 2.Card Readers shall meet the following minimum requirements: a.Provide Card Reader(s) that are compatible with the ACRI(s) and ACP(s) b.Private labeled Readers are not permitted c.Readers shall be weather resistant d.When a card is presented to the reader, the beeper shall sound. e.The LED’s shall be controlled individually by the host system. 1.Reader LED’s shall change color when the door is unlocked. f.Reader color shall be specified by the Architect. 1.PRIOR to ordering, obtain written approval of the color selection. g.Manufacturer’s lifetime warranty 3.Single Gang Mount – ThinLine II: a.Read range distance up to 4”, as listed on the manufacturer’s data sheet. b.Surface mount to a single-gang electrical box. c.HID Corporation: Model# 5395 Series. Provide quantities, as shown on the drawings. 4.Mullion Mount – MiniProx: a.Read range distance up to 3”, as listed on the manufacturer’s data sheet. b.Surface mount onto metal surfaces, such as door mullions or storefront applications, where indicated on the drawings. c.HID Corporation: Model# 5365 Series. Provide quantities, as shown on the drawings. 5.Credentials: a.Credentials shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1.Provide Credentials that are compatible with the Card Readers, ACRI(s), and ACP(s). 2.Private labeled Credentials are not permitted. 3.A unique Credential identification number shall be preprinted and encoded on each Credential. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 15/25 b.Cards: 1.Provide 500 Cards. a.HID: Model# 1386 Corporate 1000 ISOProx II b.Coordinate with Owner. E.Card Badging Stations: 1.Provide all devices, software and equipment except workstation PC for a complete turnkey system. Workstation PC shall be furnished by Owner. Provide only one (1) Card Badging Station for this project to be turned over to the owner at the beginning of the project. a.Software: Provide one (1) SWC-IDADV license 2.Manufacturers: Provide the following manufacturers’ products that adhere to the following specifications and will be incorporated into the Work: a.HID Global – Fargo HDP5000 b.HID Global – ISOProx II Card – Corporate 1000 Format c.RFIdeas – pcProx Plus Enroll. d.Videology Imaging Solutions Inc. – 24C708AF 3.Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from, system database, using a dedicated workstation PC. a.Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials. 4.Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards including cryptographic and other internal security checks as required for system. a.Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access the enrollment equipment using passwords. b.Include enrollment-subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the central station. c.Enrollment-station records printer shall meet requirements of the report printer. 5.Entry-Control Enrollment Software: a.Shall include database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to change and modify the data entered in the system as needed. b.Software shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable function. c.Multiple, password-protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station. d.Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator-access level than personnel enrollment functions. e.Software shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent unauthorized use. f.Software shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-control database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the installation. g.In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric data. h.Software shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of simple menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized to suit user and site needs. i.Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files. 6.System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge templates and images shall be in color, supporting the maximum color capability of Microsoft Windows. 7.Badge Configuration: a.Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of background and predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data fields for text, and bar-code and biometric information. Include automatic sizing of data fields placed on a badge to compensate for names, which may otherwise be too large to fit in the area designated. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 16/25 b.Allow different badge templates to be used for each department, tenant, or visitor. c.As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on the group to which the credential holder is assigned. Allow the operator to override the automatic template selection and use a template chosen by the operator for creating a badge. d.Setup shall determine which graphics and credential-holder information will be displayed and where on the card it will be placed. All data in the security access system, such as name, code, group, access level, and any of the 99 user-defined fields, shall be selectable, with the ability to place them anywhere on the card. e.System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and shapes that can be placed on the badge. f.Allow multiple images on the same badge, including, but not limited to, bar codes, digital photos, and signatures. g.Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended background and not by its immediate background. 8.Photo Imaging: Integral to security access. a.Import images from bitmap file formats, digital cameras, TWAIN cameras, or scanners. Allow image cropping and editing, WYSIWYG badge-building application, and badge print-preview and printing capabilities. b.System shall support multiple images stored for each credential holder, including signatures, portrait views, and profile views. 9.Text Objects: Badge configuration shall provide for creation of custom text as an object, allowing font selection, typing, scaling, and formatting of the text object. Formatting options shall include changing font, font size, text flow, and text alignment; bending or curving the text object into a circle or semicircle; applying 3-D effects; and applying predefined effects such as tilt, extrusion, or beveling. Text shall be placed and optionally automatically centered within any region of the badge layout. 10.Badges and Credential Cards: a.Badges are credential cards that do not contain data to be read by card readers. b.Credential cards shall store uniquely coded data used by card readers as an Identifier. 1.Proximity Cards: Use proximity detection without physical contact with the reader for proper operation. c.Allow entry-control card to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge without reduction of readability. The design shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type of badge holder used at the site. 1.Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Standard size (CR-80); dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader. 2.Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, and nontoxic; and impervious to solar radiation and effects of ultraviolet light. 3.Card Construction: Core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos, and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed. a.Incorporate holographic images or phosphorous ink as a security enhancement. b.Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards. 4.Card Durability and Maintainability: Provide manufacturer standard one year warranty. Allow credential cards to be cleaned by wiping with a sponge or cloth wetted with soap and water. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 17/25 11.Card-Making Equipment: Consisting of a workstation, video camera, video-imaging equipment, and a printer. Provide one set of Card-Making Equipment. a.Camera: NTSC color standard, RGB video output, 470 lines minimum horizontal resolution, and automatic white balance with full rated output under illumination of 0.5 fc (5 lx). b.Video Imaging: Live-image capture software and hardware and a digital signature capture pad. c.Standard workstation, modified as follows: 1.Redundant workstation is not required. 2.Inkjet Printer is not required. 3.UPS is not required. 4.Sound card is not required. d.Printer: Dye-sublimation resin thermal transfer, 300 dpi resolution, 16.7 million colors, accepting standard HID card size (CR-80) and having card thickness ranging from 0.030 to 0.050 inch (0.762 to 1.27 mm). Throughput shall be not less than 60 seconds per card. F.Request To Exit (REX): Provide Dual Technology REX with Built-In Sounder. 1.Provide REX(s) at EACH Reader location, as shown on the drawings. a.For EACH single door location, provide one (1) REX. b.For EACH double door location, provide two (2) REX’s. c.Provide manufactures recommended mounting plates as required. 2.GE: Model # RCR-REX-W. G.Door Position Switches (DPS’s): 1.Coordinate with the Intrusion Alarm System Installing Vendor. See the Electrical Legend and Riser Diagram for more information. a.A DPDT Door Position Switch shall be provided for the following systems to use; b.Access Control System c.Intrusion Alarm System 2.Roll-up Doors: a.Each switch shall be provided with the magnet, for the roll-up doors application and all necessary mounting brackets as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary mounting brackets and fasteners, as recommended by the manufacturer. b.GE (formerly Sentrol): Model #2202AU-L. H.Auxiliary Relays (AUXR): 1.Where called for on the plans, specifications, or where required, provide the necessary quantities of auxiliary relays, as required. 2.For outdoor applications: a.Space Age Electronics: Model# SSU-PAM-1 3.For indoor applications: a.Space Age Electronics: Model# SSU-PAM-1, SSU-MR-101 Series, or SSU-MR-201 Series I.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS): 1.Use Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS’s) to power; Electric Locks (EL), Electric Strikes (ES), and Maglocks (MAG) and other system equipment that consume 24vdc power as required. 2.The power supply shall be U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2 Rated PTC Power Limited outputs and a key locking enclosure. The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails, and have AC fail supervision which is a Form “C” contact closure upon loss of power. a.Connect as required, (1) ACP Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided for this system. 3.The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps. 4.At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings. If additional ACPS’s are needed, provide the quantities as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining the design requirements that are defined elsewhere in these specifications. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 18/25 5.Altronix: Model# AL1024ULXPD16CB. a.The ACPS shall be adjusted to provide 26.0vdc or less. J.Electrified Exit Device Power Supplies (EDPS): 1.Elector-Mechanical locks shall be powered by and/or be compatible with the system Power Supplies. The following items provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier, shall include, but not be limited to: a.Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices b.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS) K.Local Door Alarm: 1.Provide Multi-Tone Electronic Chime. 2.ATW Security: Model # PC-300, or approved equal. Provide quantities as shown on the plans. L.Panic Button: 1.United Security Products: Model # Hub-2SA M.Strobe Light (activate when the Panic Button is pressed): 1.Wire this device for the Strobe only. Silent operation is required (do not wire the siren portion of this unit). 2.ATW Security: Model # Doberman N.Push Buttons: 1.Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Button, manufactured by Schlage (formerly Locknetics): Model # 623–RD–L2/LL– 626. Provide quantities as shown on the Drawings. a.The Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Buttons Illuminated LED’s shall continually display the current status of the system (LED in Normal Mode and then change LED color when in Lock Down Mode). 2.10 SPARE CAPACITY A.Spare capacity to add additional devices in the future, shall be an integral part of the system design. B.INCLUDE the additional system growth capability items listed below, when CALCULATING the requirements for EACH of these items, listed elsewhere in this specification. C.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS): 1.The ACPS(s) shall have enough spare power available to add no less than two (2) additional electric locks that are typical for this project. D.Spare Cables: 1.Provide spare cabling as shown on the drawings. 2.11 FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM DESIGN LAYOUT A.Where indicated on the drawings, the Installing Vendor shall have the flexibility in their design to provide system equipment at any of the MDF and designated IDF locations. Do not install equipment in other locations, unless noted otherwise. B.Provide all quantities of equipment as specified, while maintaining the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed elsewhere within this specification. C.Coordinate the exact location of field devices with the Architect, prior to installation. 2.12 SYSTEM DEVICE NAMING MATRIX A.The installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid, the time and materials to generate and create a single System Device Naming Matrix. From left to right, list the information for EACH device, which shall include, but not be limited to the following; 1.Each row shall have an “Item #” 2.The device name (i.e.: Reader, Duress Button, etc.) 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 19/25 3.The device abbreviation a.This is a sample abbreviation that could be used: (i.e. Reader = Rdr). 4.List the Serial Number for EACH device 5.The device ID number 6.Device model number 7.Device Location (for example; South Wing Side Door, MDF Room XXX, etc.). 8.For other system equipment (such as “Head end Equipment”), add rows to the bottom of the matrix, and list the appropriate information. a.Group this information by location. Such as MDF Room XXX, IDF Room XXX, etc. B.Use the maximum characters allowable from the system, to be incorporated into a fully functional system. At the Top of the Matrix, state the Maximum number of characters that are available. 1.Submit this information with the Submittals and Shop Drawings in 11’ x 17’ format, or smaller. C.Prior to ANY system programming, obtain written approval from the Architect of the System Device Naming Matrix. Make corrections as noted. D.Using the Matrix that is included at the end of this specification (see Exhibit ‘A’ for a partial sample format), the Installing Vendor shall create a spread sheet and identify EACH system device and description. For room or area abbreviations that are not listed or if there is more than one room or area of the same name, use a reasonable and logical name. 1.The Matrix shall have consistent information of EACH device. 2.Each system device shall be wired and programmed to communicate to the ACRI(s), ACP(s), system Server, and Workstation(s), to indicate EACH system device abbreviation, as indicated on the System Device Naming Matrix. 2.13 SYSTEM CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND PATCH CORDS A.See PART 3 of this specification and Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements. B.Include the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed elsewhere within this specification, for the calculations and sizing requirements of the cables and/or conductors. C.ALL cables and conductors shall be the same size and color throughout EACH cable run. Such as from EACH field device to the terminals on the ACP, ACRI, and Power Supply. D.Cables/Conductors: The minimum allowable size conductors are specified below. Use larger conductors and/or additional conductors, as required. Prior to Bidding, consult with the system Manufacturer that the following cable types are acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendors responsibility to provide and install Manufacturer approved cables. Use the Manufacturers equivalent cable requirements, to meet all code requirements [such as “Wet Rated” or “Aerial Rated” cable] for the appropriate devices. 1.CAT6 cable(s): a.Refer to Section 27 20 00 b.The outer jack of the data cable color is specified in Section 27 20 00 2.Readers: a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 3021 (18/6oas), or approved equal 1.Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED’s as specified, as required. b.Plenum: West Penn 253186B (18/6oas), or approved equal. 1.Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED’s as specified, as required. 3.Door Position Switches (DPS’s): a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 221 (22/2ns), or approved equal b.Plenum: West Penn 25221B (22/2ns), or approved equal 4.Request To Exit’s (REX’s): a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 241 (22/4ns), or approved equal b.Plenum: West Penn 25241B (22/4ns), or approved equal 5.Electro-Mechanical Locks: a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 224 (18/2ns), or approved equal 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 20/25 b.Plenum: West Penn 25224B (18/2ns), or approved equal 6.Electrified Exit Devices: a.Non-Plenum: West Penn HA210 (10/2 ns), or approved equal b.Plenum: West Penn 25210 (10/2 ns), or approved equal E.Connectors/Terminations: Use the manufacturer approved wire strippers and crimping tool as required. 1.CAT6 cable(s): a.Refer to Section 27 20 00 2.Maintain all cable and system requirements. F.Patch Cords: Size EACH cable length to provide ease of maintenance, while not leaving excessive slack. 1.CAT6 cable(s): a.Refer to Section 27 20 00 2.Maintain all cable requirements. 2.14 PROGRAMMING SURVEY A.The Installing Vendor shall include in the Pricing of their Bid, the time and materials necessary to generate and create the following Documentation, provide the staff and necessary equipment as required to provide the following services, as described below. B.EACH of the documents shall have the following: 1.List the Name or Title of the document, the Section Number, and Section Title. This shall be bold and centered at the top. 2.Header of document: a.The Project Name and the current date. 3.Footer of document: a.Use multiple pages as required, but identify each page by having the footer state “Page 1 of X”, “Page 2 of X”, etc. C.Interview the Owner for no less than a minimum of two (2) 4-Hour sessions. Allow for additional time if required, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Installing Vendor shall be present for this meeting. The purpose of this Interview is to verbally discuss all of the feature sets of the system. The dialog shall describe the benefits for implementing each of the systems features, thus allowing the Owner to make an informed decision on the how they can maximize the functional operation of their system. 1.Prior to starting the Interview process with the Owner, have EACH attendee fill out a “Sign In Sheet” listing EACH attendee’s name, department they work in, and their phone number. 2.Provide a detailed list of software features on a document titled “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet”. This shall be provided in the “Submittal and Shop Drawings” with the Section 27 00 00 submittal. This shall be used as the basis of discussion for the Interview process. a.For EACH separate software feature, provide a row with an ascending number indicating the “Item #” (on the far left side of the page). b.Next to the Item #, provide a Yes, No, and N/A column. This shall be checked off by the Installing Vendor during the course of the Interview, to determine which options the Owner would like to have programmed. c.On each row, provide a brief description of the feature set. d.On the far right of each row, provide adequate space to write comments. 3.All parties shall review the drawings and discuss the intended functions of EACH device. This will allow all parties to have a complete understanding of EACH system devices purpose and the performance requirements of the system that was identified during the Interview process. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 21/25 4.At the conclusion of the Interview with the Owner, prior to leaving the premises, the Installing Vendor shall do the following: a.Review with the Owner, by verbally recapping EACH of the feature sets listed on the “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet” and reiterating this with a Yes (the Owner wants this feature) or No (the Owner does not want this feature). Make any corrections as required. b.Provide no less than three (3) copies of the completely filled out, “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet” to the Architect. 5.For Bidding Purposes, the Installing Vendor shall be expected to program the system to Industry Standards, based on a project of this size, scope, typical functionality for this market segment, and as described throughout this specification. a.Review the testing requirements specified elsewhere within this specification for additional information. D.Within five (5) business days of the conclusion of the Interview, provide the following documents to the Architect for review: E.The updated Interview Document with a new title of “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet”. This shall have the Yes, No, and N/A columns electronically filled out to demonstrate what will and will not be programmed. Include at the conclusion of this document, the following; 1.The date(s) of the Interview with the Owner. 2.The address, building name, room name, and room number of the location that the Interview took place at. 3.Provide copies of the sign in sheet(s). 2.15 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information. B.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional cable and installation requirements. C.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s). D.Install all equipment, devices, and cabling, per the manufacturer’s recommendation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.EACH CABLE RUN SHALL CONTINUOUS, WITHOUT ANY SPLICES, from the device to the terminal strip on the ACRI(s), ACP(s), and Power Supplies. Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B.Setup, connect, and configure the Servers/Workstations/Monitors per the manufacturer’s recommendations to operate as intended. Load, configure, and test the software for a fully functional system. 3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS, AND SETTINGS A.Mount enclosures as specified in Section 27 00 00. B.Prior to Bidding, the Installing Vendor(s) shall confirm and coordinate the actual quantities and locations of the power requirements with the electrical contractor see “Power Supplies” and “Flexibility in System Design Layout” listed elsewhere in this specification. At a minimum, provide 120vac wiring and connections to the ACP(s) and all power supplies, as required for a fully functional system. C.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s). 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 22/25 D.Install EACH of the devices and/or equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation. E.Access Control Reader Interfaces (ACRI’s): 1.Install EACH ACRI: a.On the hinge side of the door, and approximately 5’-0” from the door on parallel or perpendicular walls, to accommodate servicing this unit without blocking the doorway. b.Approximately 6” above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 8’-0” above the finished floor, unless otherwise noted. F.Card Readers: 1.Install EACH Card Reader: a.Flush to the wall surface. 1.Surface mounted boxes are unacceptable 2.At 44” on center 2.For Electric Strike(s), install per the manufacturers recommendation. G.Request To Exits (REX’s): 1.Prior to rough-in: a.Verify exact location with the Architect. b.Mount in the middle of the door frame or header, as recommended by the manufacturer. c.Verify the functional operation of the REX will not be hindered by other equipment. Such as exit signs. 2.Install manufactures recommended mounting plates, as required. 3.Install and make all adjustments to EACH REX, per the manufacturer’s recommendation. H.Door Position Switches shall be installed on the latch side of the door, NOT the hinge side. At the upper portion of the door, near the top of the door (surface mount), on the top of the door (recessed mount), and 4” to 6” from the edge of the door (unless approved by the Architect). Install per manufacturers recommendations. After installation the door shall be able to close properly without rubbing on the door position switch. 1.Provide the appropriate style of Door Position Switch and application appropriate magnet for each type of door. 2.Recessed Mount Door Position Switches: a.The Door Position Switch shall be provided and installed by the Intrusion Alarm Installing Vendor. Coordinate with the Installing Vendor for cable terminations, as required. 3.Surface Mount Door Position Switches: a.Install per the manufacturers recommendation. Conceal all cabling within the walls and/or ceiling, as required. 4.Hollow Metal Door with Grout Filled Frame(s) and/or Concrete/CMU Wall Applications: a.Heavy Duty Surface Mount Door Position Switches: for these types of applications, secure the device to the frame and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the wall penetration. Plastic insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the following methods is acceptable or approved equal; b.Lead anchors. c.Concrete sleeve anchors. d.Secure the armored cable every 4” with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on both sides of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the junction box. Secure at the junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction box. 5.Roll-Up Door Applications: a.The door position switch(s) shall be installed in a manner to be the least obtrusive in the door opening. Consult with the Architect for actual location, prior to mounting. 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 23/25 b.Secure the device to the floor and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the floor or wall penetration. Plastic insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the following methods is acceptable or approved equal: 1.Lead anchors 2.Concrete sleeve anchors c.Secure the armored cable every 4” with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on both sides of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the junction box. Secure at the junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction box. I.Access Control Power Supplies (ACPS): 1.Electric Lock Power Supplies (ACPS) shall power the Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware and other system related equipment. 2.Mounting of ACPS’s, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the Installing Vendor/Contractor. a.Locate the ACPS’s in the MDF/IDF locations, as required, unless noted otherwise. J.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS): 1.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS) shall power the Electrified Exit Devices (ED). The following items shall be provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier. a.Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices b.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS) 2.Mounting of EDPS’s, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the Installing Vendor/Contractor. a.Locate the EDPS’s directly above the ACRI, unless noted otherwise. b.Mount approximately 6” above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 9’-0” above the finished floor, unless otherwise noted. 3.04 DATA CABLES AND OUTLET LOCATIONS A.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional information. Connect the ACP(s) to the LAN/WAN as required. 3.05 PROGRAMMING AND CONFIGURATION A.Program the database as described in “System Software” listed elsewhere in this specification. B.Program the system emergency lock down as required by the owner. C.Time and Date Synchronization. 1.EACH of the ACRI(s), EACH of the ACP(s), and the Access Control Server(s) shall be synchronized for the Time and Date to be exactly the same (where applicable). 2.The “Access Control System” shall be synchronized to other designated systems, such as the CCTV System, for the Time and Date to be exactly the same (where applicable). D.The Installing Vendor shall program the system as defined in the documents that were completed during the “Interview the Owner”, as described throughout this specification, and as required for a fully functional system. 1.The Owner shall program the Owners staff. E.Program EACH ACRI to communicate to the Server and EACH ACRI on the Owners LAN/WAN as required. F.The Installing Vendor shall program the Configuration Files of the system to be automatically backed up onto the Designated Server. These back ups shall occur once per week. Coordinate with the Owners IT Department, as required. This includes, but is not limited to: 1.EACH of the Configuration Files of EACH ACRI and EACH ACP 2.EACH Site Workstation 3.The Server 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00 28 13 00 - 24/25 3.06 TRAINING A.Training for Site Staff: 1.The training sessions shall be held at the project Site. a.Provide Training for up to ten (10) Site Staff. b.Provide a total of two (2) separate training sessions for the Owners personnel. Schedule both training sessions with the Owner, providing a minimum of 14 days advance notice, and offer a minimum of three dates to choose from. 2.The Site Training Session(s) shall only take place AFTER the Owners Administrative Staff have had their first training session. 3.The 1st Training Session shall consist of: a.Being conducted by one of the designated Installing Vendor technicians. The training shall be a minimum of one (1) 4-Hour session that shall be held on the same day, and provide a thorough and in- depth full feature training session. Provide additional training time as required, to answer EACH of the staff’s questions, at no additional cost to the Owner. This training shall address EACH of the software features that meet the Owners requirements identified on the documents that were filled out during the “Interview with the Owner”. This includes, but is not limited to: 1.The “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet”. 2.The Manufacturers Programming Worksheets. 3.At the Owners option, the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training Session on the Owners Workstation. b.The 2nd Training Session shall consist of: 1.A refresher training session shall be held approximately 30 days after the first training session. The training session shall be a minimum of two (2) hours that may be conducted by one of the Installing Vendors designated technicians that attended the first training session. Provide additional training time as required, to answer EACH of the staff’s questions, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.Using an Installing Vendors laptop and projector, connect to the Owners WAN and demonstrate each of the features and functions that the Owner’s staff would like clarification on. a.No less than five (5) business days in advance of this meeting, the Installing Vendor shall request from the Owner, EACH of the items that the Owner would like clarification on. b.The documents that were filled out during the “Interview with the Owner” shall be used as the reference document. c.At the Owners option, the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training Session on the Owners Workstation. c.Following the 2nd training session, the Installing Vendor shall include additional programming to accommodate system functionality changes, based on the requirements of the Owner. 1.Provide up to four (4) hours of system programming changes. 3.07 AS-BUILTS A.Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification. B.Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment. C.The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid, the time and materials to generate and create the documentation, as described below. 1.Provide an “Equipment Information Sheet”, in the O & M manuals. At a minimum, from left to right, provide the following information: 2.Each row shall have an “Item #” 03 January 2023 Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement – Permit | Bid Set 5 December 2022 Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 25/25 3.Manufacturers Name 4.Equipment Device Type (such as Workstation, Control Panel, etc) 5.Location (such as MDF room 103, or area of building) 6.IP Address 7.Software Name 8.Software Version that is installed on the device 9.List the “Highest Level” configurable password for EACH device. 10.List “EACH System Operator” password. 11.List all other password settings for EACH device. D.Provide ALL CD(s)/DVD(s) of installation software, legally required software licenses, and the associated documentation to reinstall all portions of the software that is running on the new and/or existing Server/Workstations. 1.Separate ALL information by Server, and EACH individual Workstation, into large plastic Ziploc bags that are clearly identified with a PC generated label. The information on the label shall include, but is not limited to: a.Project Name b.Date c.PC location (building name, room name, and room number). d.List the contents of EACH bag. e.Software: 1.List EACH bag for EACH PC and lists the contents of EACH bag. END OF SECTION 03 January 2023 This page intentionally left blank